Home

PREPASSR Tutorial/Reference Manual

1. EDLEVELS EDTIME ERIODS ERMISSIV HASE EM LOT ROJ UEUE PE ESE ETU HTTURNONRI ROUND ROUT SATU SAVE SEQUENCES SIMULATION SITESIZE STARTUPLOST STOP ORAGE UBSYSTEM UMMARISI TIMINGS TRUCKCOUNTS RUCKPERCEN PSTREAMVC TILIZATIONS EHICLECOUNTS OLADDITIONALS OLFACTORS OLUMES WIDTHS YELLOWT IME p p p p p p p p Q R RE R R nw H Q HDISTRIBUTION lt Typ gt lt Distr gt lt Node gt lt Dir N KHOURFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt 4 lt Pedestrian Interferenc lt Exclusive Ped phase Tim ped hr gt sec gt lt Phase gt lt Permissive Left NO YES gt Phase gt lt List of Movements gt Scale ft line gt lt Node List gt First Title Line gt Model gt lt Percentile gt lt Auto ft gt lt Trk lt Variable gt lt Start gt lt End gt lt Increment gt 12 lt Required Clearance sec gt lt List of Commands gt 4 lt Right Turn on Red Volume lt Precision of Totals Veh gt lt Route gt lt List of Node s gt 12 lt Lane Group Saturation Flow vphg gt lt Line gt lt File gt lt List of Commands gt lt Sequence Code gt lt Steps Cycle gt lt Min Simul gt lt Stop Pen gt lt Links gt lt Distribution Types gt
2. NOTE PSR IMPORT INTERSECTION 13 GREENTIMES 23 0 8 0 20 0 YELLOWTIMES 34 0 3 0 3 6 0 OFFSET lt 69 2 INTERSECTION 14 GREENTIMES 16 9 17 1 17 0 YELLOWTIMES 3 0 35 9 8 5 0 OFFSE 65 2 INTERSECTION 15 GREENTIMES PT 9 201 L920 YELLOWTIMES 3 0 3 0 3 0 OFFSE 76 2 RETURN 14 lines of data IMPORTed into PREPASSR PREPASSR D 200 Reference APPENDIX E Error Messages and Trouble Spots Appendix E Topics This appendix contains a description of each error message which the PREPASSR program is capable of issuing that is specific to the PREPASSR program Each PREPASSR program error message is discussed as to the potential cause as well as actions which might be taken to correct the errors Note also that additional error messages can be generated by the TEAPAC package itself or by the operating system environment These error messages are listed separately in Appendices F and G In addition to the PREPASSR error messages discussion of typical problem areas and potential trouble spots is given to further assist in debugging problems with PREPASSR and to help avoid problems in the future Appendix E Topics Appendix E Introduction PREPASSR Error Messages PREPASSR Trouble Spots PREPASSR Error Messages The following messages are issued to indicate that the conditions of the program are not as expected The PPSxx number that precedes the message in this document is the error number w
3. DK HQ D n Q Q xx ZANA D m H w E D w E O Cc C D D D E i GEN GOT GRA G G H H I I I I I Master Node gt 0 Level 0 1 2 3 gt 3 lt Location CBD NON CBD gt NON CBD 12 lt Minimum Green Time sec gt 12 550 12 lt 2 character Movement Label gt RT TH LT N E S W lt Dist gt lt Speed gt lt Node gt 4 lt Mov gt lt Page Advance NO YES gt YES LINES 5 lt Next Line of File gt 5 0 ELIST 100 lt Node in Optimization Order gt 100 0 ELOCATION lt X Coordinate gt lt Y Coordinate gt 0 0 lt Third Title Line gt blanks PREPASSR_ A 59 Reference Table A 3 continued All Commands Listed Alphabetically Command NSTOPFACTORS OFFSE IMIZE PU ERLAPS KINGSIDES KVOLUMES HASSIGNMENT Parameter Values 12 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt lt Phase Offset sec sec gt lt Phase gt NONE OFFSTS SPLTS OFFS CYCLE LIS lt Prog gt 287 290 202 4 lt Rt Turn Overlap NO YES gt 4 lt Location NONE RIGHT LEFT BOTH gt 4 lt Parking Volume manuv hr gt lt Path 1 5 gt lt Asg gt lt Node List 16 max gt 15 lt Steps gt
4. The next file default is defined as the file whose number is one greater than the file number currently in use The keyboard should be considered file O for this purpose Thus the default file number for a LOAD from the keyboard is file 1 If a LOAD command is encountered in file 1 its next file default is file 2 etc PREPASSR B 111 Reference LOAD LOAD If lt Line Number gt is entered as 0 the LOAD will start at the last line The last line is defined as the last point in the file where file access was previously initiated For example LOAD 10 followed later by LOAD 0 will re execute the LOAD 10 effectively a ree LOAD LOAD 10 followed later by SAVE 0 will re SAVE the LOADed parameters see Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual A negative lt Line Number gt of n will start the LOAD at a point in the designated file n lines before the default next line of the file i e LOAD 5 will start the LOAD five lines prior to the current next line of the file The SHARE IGNORE option is only in effect during the LOAD where the option was used do not use embedded LOADs with the SHARE option Use of the SHARE option not only ignores commands which it does not recognize but also ignores any RESET commands encountered during the current LOAD It is used to share files created by other programs IGNORE ignores all commands in the file up to the next RETURN command SHARE is automatic when the pr
5. A number of enhancements have been made to network editing functions to improve the response to various user actions as follows If a new link connection will over write an existing leg of a node the user is warned and given the option to select another leg or abort If a new link creation is aborted for any reason any new dummy nodes created as part of that process are deleted including clicking on the network without dragging now deleting the single node which was previously created If a third leg is added to a bend node as part of a new link creation the bend node is converted to a real node and re numbered accordingly If deleting a node removes one leg of a bend node the bend is converted to an external node Default source movements for a new link which connects existing nodes with a diagonal are determined more reliably Left click can be used while in the Create New Link mode to select the current node gt V7 00 21 Fixes to SIMULATION Dialog The Use TRANSYT or PASSER Actuated Model option of the SIMULATION dialog is now both properly selectable without any error messages and displayed properly in the dialog and a PREPASSR_ H 240 Reference random glitch which garbled part of the main window Network display when the SIMULATION dialog opened has been fixed gt V7 00 21 Make Help File Useable When a Data File is Double clicked A problem locating the HLP file when a user data file was double clicked in Windows Expl
6. Many other generic enhancements have been made to the Visual TEAPAC user interface which is now included in every TEAPAC program These include Windows XP style buttons drop down lists scroll windows etc all Edit and Results menus can be accessed by right click all demos allow at least 4 intersections to be entered and analyzed license keys are valid for any older version of the same program license info displays in Help About including site license address leading W removed from all program file names for easy recognition LinkTo and Menu looks for new name first then old name with W for backward compatibility with older versions of other TEAPAC programs default node to renumber is the current node not 0 Startup Help button is located in main window and now in Help menu StartUp txt can be modified by user with virtually unlimited size View Network and Options Graphics menu options have been removed gt Program Specific Enhancements Included in Visual TEAPAC Upgrade The new Permissives options for SIGNAL2000 are displayed and exported properly to all host programs Dummy nodes are ignored for any PLOT or TIMINGS result and bend nodes or unsignalized locations are ignored for any time space PLOT Node number entries for PLOT and TIMINGS are allowed up to the more recent upper bound of 999 instead of the older limit of 327 Various input error checks are skipped for dummy nodes and dummy node cond
7. XXX and the command line to move to is shown following the PREPASSR 18 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE arrow gt To enter the desired parameter values move the cursor to the appropriate display area and type the value in followed by the TAB key Use the OK button when done entering data to return to the Main Menu To display more entries on a single dialog box first select the Tabular View in the View menu before entering data using the Edit menu To use the Manual Mode for this tutorial select the Manual Mode from the Options menu or simply press F4 Once the program is ready to accept input it will display the command prompt arrow To enter the desired parameter values enter the command keyword and parameter values each separated by a space all followed by the ENTER key If the Visual Mode is desired at any point simply press the F4 function key If you wish you can use the drag and drop graphical network creation method to create your analysis network in the main window before entering detailed data To do this follow the instructions in the Data Entry section of Chapter 1 working from left to right so that the intersections that are created are numbered in the correct order Use the distance from the current node information in the status bar to get your intersection spacings correct approximate is adequate for the example After the network is created the additional detailed data described below can be ent
8. gt New Save and Linkage Features Provided When Exiting the Program Warning message for unsaved data has been reversed with option to Save message now consistent with most other Windows programs in the way the question is asked option to Save or not save or to Cancel the exit New ability to link to another program using the File Control Stop dialog name the next program to run as well as file to use if desired can be used from a control file to link programs or control files also link from Manual Mode The Quit menu which duplicated the File Exit menu has been removed gt Command History in Manual Mode Remembers last 10 manual mode commands used Use up and down arrows to see history of commands Re use previous command or adjust to create new command gt WinTEAPAC2000 Ver 5 Menu Program Enhanced A data file can be named in the display for the next selected program A Browse button has been added to assist in naming the data file to be used provides standard extensions for typical files of supported programs A data file from a TEAPAC2000 Version 5 program can be dragged to WinTEAPAC will launch the program that created the file and use the dragged file can drag the file to the WinTEAPAC window or desktop icon PREPASSR_ H 268 Reference The FOR extension used by TEAPAC is registered when WinTEAPAC runs allows double clicking FOR files in Explorer and START command in BAT gt Other Changes A Getting Started help button
9. 36 38 B 118 lt Master Node gt 37 B 113 lt Max Delay LOS gt 40 B 108 lt Max v c gt 40 B 108 lt Maximum Cycle gt 36 40 B 81 lt Minimum Cycle gt 36 40 B 81 lt Minimum Green Time gt 36 39 B 116 lt Model gt 37 B 145 lt Model Actuated gt 37 B 158 lt Movement gt 36 38 B 118 lt Movement Label gt 38 41 B 117 lt Next Line of File gt 46 B 121 lt Next Program gt 46 B 163 lt Node gt 36 38 B 118 lt Node Number gt 36 37 38 B 104 B 110 B 122 B 165 lt Node Dir gt 42 B 93 lt Number of Lanes gt 38 B 106 lt Number of Lines gt 45 B 99 lt Offset gt 37 40 B 126 lt Optimization Type gt 36 37 B 127 PREPASSR lt Output Dev gt 45 lt Page gt 45 B 105 lt Page Advance Option gt 45 B 120 lt Parking Location gt 41 B 131 lt Parking Volume gt 41 B 132 lt PASSER Version gt 37 B 129 lt Path List gt 43 B 133 lt Peak Hour Factor gt 36 39 B 136 lt Pedestrian Interference gt 41 B 137 lt Percentile gt 37 B 145 lt Permissive Left gt 39 B 141 lt Phase Green Time gt 36 40 B 96 lt Phase Number gt 37 40 42 B 126 B 138 B 142 lt Phase Yellow Time gt 37 40 B 178 lt Precision of Totals gt 42 B 152 lt Prog gt 37 B 129 lt Quality of Progression gt 41 B 68 lt Required Clearance gt 41 B 148 lt Right Turn on Red Volume gt 38 B 151 lt Right Turn Overlap gt 40 B 130 lt Route
10. License to use software iv licensed usage level F 223 Line Number G 229 LINKLIST 37 A 56 B 110 E 202 LinkTo menu 47 49 LOAD 12 26 45 46 A 56 B 85 B 91 B 94 B 111 B 121 B 150 B 155 F 212 F 213 F 214 G 228 G 230 location of the intersection 40 B 115 loop variable B 147 lost time B 86 B 162 LOSTTIMES B 86 B 116 B 162 M Manual Mode 10 19 master controller B 113 Master Node D 187 MASTERNODE 37 A 56 B 81 B 113 maximum capacity 36 39 B 154 MESSAGES 44 A 56 B 114 H 233 METROAREA 40 A 57 B 115 Minimum Input Requirements 27 MINIMUMS 36 39 A 57 B 116 MOVLABELS 38 A 56 B 117 multiphase operation 40 B 107 305 Index multiple runs of PASSER B 88 multiple scenarios 25 multiplier B 175 multipliers 38 multi scenario 12 N NEMA B 158 nested F 213 NETSIM 49 NETSIM CORSIM B 83 B 125 NETWORK 20 36 38 A 56 B 104 B 118 B 122 B 123 B 143 B 158 B 165 E 204 network creation and editing on screen 12 B 104 B 118 B 122 B 123 B 165 network simulation model 42 B 83 B 125 NEWPAGE 45 A 56 B 120 B 149 Next button 20 next file B 155 next line B 91 B 155 G 229 NEXTLINES 46 A 56 B 121 B 155 NODELIST 20 23 36 37 A 56 B 70 B 93 B 104 B 118 B 122 B 123 B 133 B 134 B 165 E 203 E 204 E 205 E 207 F 221 NODELOCATION 20 38 A 56 B 72 B 104 B 118 B 122 B 123 B 165 non site volum
11. PPS12 ERROR Movement XX of node XX with non zero WIDTH needs non zero VOLUME Re enter This error indicates that a movement for the intersection whose node number is indicated which has a non zero WIDTHS entry has a VOLUMES entry of 0 vph This suggests that a volume has been omitted since every non zero lane group should have a non zero volume in it Action Enter a non zero VOLUME for the referenced movement or remove the movement s WIDTH entry if the lane group does not exist PPS13 ERROR Movement XX of node XX with non zero VOLUME needs non zero WIDTH Re enter This error indicates that a movement for the intersection whose node number is indicated which has a non zero VOLUMES entry has a WIDTHS entry of 0 feet This suggests that a lane group has been omitted since every non zero volume should have a non zero lane group in which it flows Action Enter a non zero WIDTH for the referenced movement or remove the movement s VOLUME entry if the movement does not exist PPS14 ERROR Usage Level 2 or higher is required for use of the SUBSYSTEM command The SUBSYSTEM command is limited to only Usage Level 2 licenses of PREPASSR or above Action Reduce the size of the network under study so it includes only the subset of signals desired or license a Usage Level 2 version of PREPASSR PPS15 ERROR Node XXX is not properly connected to other nodes in the NODELIST SUBSYSTEM A check is made before an EXPORT or PLOT to make sure that e
12. PREPASSR are available as described below Route numbers can be referenced by use of negative numbers on the SUBSYSTEM PLOT and TIMINGS commands to quickly identify routes for analysis For example if ROUTE 1 is defined by an appropriate ROUTE command a subsystem analysis for only this route can be created through the use of the SUBSYSTEM 1 command this is only valid in Usage Level 2 versions of PREPASSR Negative route numbers can also be used on the PLOT and TIMINGS commands to list only the nodes in the defined route This option of the PLOT and TIMINGS commands can be used in Usage Level 1 versions of PREPASSR Definition of routes with the ROUTE command should follow the specific rules presented in the TRANSYT manual regarding routes in the event they are used by PRETRANSYT For example a route may be l way or 2 way but may not be partially 1 way and partially 2 way Many of these checks are performed by PRETRANSYT to validate the route definition but not all PREPASSR_ H 276 Reference possibilities are checked The user must retain final responsibility for the proper definitions of routes in PRETRANSYT One basic check made by PRETRANSYT is that all nodes of the route exist in the current NODELIST and or SUBSYSTEM and that all of the nodes on the route are connected in the proper order gt New PEAKHOURFACTORS Command Allows Input Consistent with HCM amp SIGNAL85 A new command PEAKHOURFACTORS has been implemented for each i
13. documented with final PLOT and TIMINGS reports and stored in the final PREPASSR data file In Usage Level 2 and 3 versions of PREPASSR the same process can be executed for SUBSYSTEMs of the entire network to assess the potential impact of running the entire system as several independent subsystems Printing and Saving PASSER Results If the AUTO option of EXPORT is used to make runs of PASSER directly from PREPASSR the results of the PASSER run must be printed separately if the printed results are desired This can be done from PASSER directly as desired The name of the file group used is TMPPSR stored in a folder below the data subdirectory defined by the PREPASSR CFG file The program output file to print is called xxx TMPPSR P2O where xxx is the cycle length used If these files are to be retained for future review or archival purposes they must be copied elsewhere or renamed to something different than the TMPPSR name before the next EXPORT AUTO is executed or they will be over written by that EXPORT PREPASSR 31 Tutorial CHAPTER 4 Actions and Entry Parameters Chapter 4 Topics This chapter provides a summary description of all of the actions and entry parameters of the PREPASSR program The usage format of each command dialog and associated parameter values are provided along with a functional description of the command dialog The dialogs are grouped and presented in the following three logical categories RESULTS
14. equal to 32767 Its default value is the line number after the last line accessed for each file Notes The next line of a file is automatically set each time a RETURN command is encountered in a file In this case the next line of that file is set to the line number of the line which follows the RETURN command The next line of a file is automatically set to 1 each time a file is opened with the FILES command e This command is particularly useful to initialize repeated execution of sets of commands which use the default value of lt Line Number gt for the LOAD command PREPASSR B 121 Reference NODELIST NODELIST NODELIST 500 lt Node Number gt Defaults Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter the list of nodes to be optimized lt Node Numbers is the unique number assigned to each intersection on the INTERSECTION command and can be any integer from 0 to 999 Its default value is all zeroes and thus must be entered Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa For compatibility with PRETRANSYT node numbers cannot exceed the value of 327 since all node numbers will be multiplied by
15. invalid entry TPC61 WARNING INTERSECTION required before input can be made TPC62 WARNING INTERSECTION required before data can be listed TPC63 ERROR INTERSECTION not in NODELIST TPC64 WARNING old UTILIZATION entries must be inverted TPC65 WARNING negative SEQUENCE code needed to use PHASEMOVS TPC66 ERROR CONDITIONS values cannot be entered for demo TPC67 ERROR PATHASSIGNMENT list must start end with valid node TPC68 WARNING PATHDISTRIBUTION type required before input can be made TPC69 WARNING PATHDISTRIBUTION type required before data can be listed Miscellaneous Errors TPC71 ERROR BUFFER SIZE EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED TPC72 ERROR SCRATCH FILE LIMITS EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED TPC81 ERROR higher Usage Level License is needed TPC91 ERROR HELP FILE MUST HAVE STRING COUNT IN LINE 1 TPC92 ERROR TOO MANY CHARS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND STRINGS Appendix F Topics Appendix F Introduction TPC01 ERROR This command is not recognizable Re enter or type HELP ALL for full list This error message will be displayed if a command entry cannot be identified as a valid command This error is generally generated by the misspelling of a command or an invalid command abbreviation in the Manual Mode TEAPAC programs will accept a wide variety of abbreviation
16. population is not less than 10 000 default YES population is less than 10 000 lt Progression Impact gt is a keyword which describes whether a signal installation will not seriously disrupt progressive traffic flow It can be any of the following NO signal will disrupt progression default YES signal will not disrupt progression lt Remedial Actions Failed gt is a keyword which describes whether trials of less restrictive remedies have failed It can be any of the following NO other remedies have not failed default PREPASSR_ B 77 Reference CONDITIONS CONDITIONS YES other remedies have failed lt Accidents for Signal gt is the number of reported accidents correctable by traffic signal control within a 12 month period It can be any integer number from 0 to 20 Its default value is 0 lt Stop Sign Delay gt is the number of vehicle hours of peak hour stop sign delay experienced by traffic on one minor approach of the intersection It can be any integer from 0 to 20 Its default value is 0 lt Accidents for Stop gt is the number of reported accidents correctable by multi way stop control within a 12 month period It can be any integer number from 0 to 20 Its default value is 0 lt Minor Street Delay gt is the average peak hour delay experienced by traffic on all minor approaches of the intersection in seconds vehicle It can be any integer from 0 to 300 Its default value is 0 Notes
17. specification or execute the STOP command without a lt Program Name gt and do a system directory to determine the proper name for the desired program TPC53 ERROR The REPEAT specification is not valid Check manual File access aborted This error occurs when any of the parameter values for the REPEAT command are not acceptable For example it could be that the lt Variable gt used is already in use or not an alphabetic character or that the range and increment variables are not valid numeric values Action Re issue the REPEAT command using proper parameter values TPC54 ERROR Only X distinct time period range s is are allowed More have been defined The PERIODS command allows only five distinct time periods of counts to be defined This requires five pairs of start and stop times to be entered If more than five time periods are entered this error will be generated Action If more than five periods were actually counted they will need to be separated into two distinct runs of TURNS or merged into fewer time periods with zeros entered for some of the count intervals which were not counted If this is not the case check for the proper entry of each of the start and stop times on the PERIODS command following the count interval TPCS55 ERROR The second time of the period cannot occur before the first time Re enter The PERIODS command allows the entry of pairs of start and stop times to define the range of time each count p
18. such as SEQUENCE code types 2 and 3 A similar improvement has been made for split phasing types 7 and 8 as well as for single phase control Type 1 Finally if single phase control is used for a leg of an intersection without an opposing approach as in a typical diamond interchange signal improved phase sequence coding for PASSER has been implemented gt Lost Time Added into Minimums Required for PASSER Input Since PASSER does not consider the actual clearance intervals for each phase of each signal the minimum time coded into PASSER input must represent the minimum phase time including clearance In TEAPAC programs the MINIMUM value represents a minimum greentime separate from whatever clearance interval is needed and or used As such for consistency with other TEAPAC program inputs especially if the PREPASSR inputs are being shared with other TEAPAC programs like SIGNAL85 and PRETRANSYT the minimums now coded for PREPASSR_ H 296 Reference PASSER include the entered MINIMUMS for green intervals plus the designated system lost time as input on the LOSTTIMES command That is the minimums used for PASSER are the sum of PREPASSR s input MINIMUMS the Beginning Lag LOSTTIME and the Ending Lag LOSTTIME If this standard TEAPAC convention has not been followed in previous data which has been SAVEd to disk the same effect should be created by modifying the LOSTTIMEs in the file to 0 and 0 or preferably by subtracting the actual LOST
19. 1 through 9 Its default value is 11 two phase operation lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt is a list of two character sequence codes which represent the possible phasings which are allowed each of which can be any valid two digit code a two character abbreviation for a list of codes or ALL Its default value is ALL all possible sequence codes Notes A LEADLAGS entry can be used in addition to the SEQUENCES entry for phasings which are not in the same order as shown on the code sheet Use PERMISSIVES to add permitted left turns before or after protected left turn phases Use OVERLAPS to designate right turn overlaps e Special abbreviation characters A D can be used in place of codes 1 8 as shortcuts to represent common lists of phasing possibilities as noted below A represents codes 1 8 B represents codes 1 6 C represents codes 4 6 D represents codes 7 8 Thus a list of 14 15 16 could be entered as a single code 1C and a list of 11 21 31 41 51 61 could be entered as simply B1 Use DIAGRAMS to view all the SEQUENCES listed for a given abbreviation made here The use of SEQUENCES 1 through 9 requires use of PHASEMOVEMENTS to identify the movements for each phase PREPASSR B 157 Reference SIMULATION SIMULATION SIMULATION lt Steps Cycle gt lt Analysis Period gt lt Stop Penalty gt lt Link Numbering Method gt lt Model Actuated gt lt Assignment Method gt Analysis Period Defaults 300 15 1 TEAP
20. 1433 0 2525 1448 Basic gt SEQUENCE 12 Basic CYCLES 60 60 Basic gt GREENTIMES 0 32 0 14 0 39 Basic gt YELLOWTIMES 3 0 3 0 3 0 The NODELOCATION command is used to provide the X Y coordinates of the intersection The NETWORK command is used to connect each intersection to adjacent intersections by indicating which intersection node number is upstream of each approach It also indicates the distance between these two nodes and the average speed at which vehicles travel this distance In the case of the WIDTHS entries note that if right or left turning movements do not have exclusive turn lanes the WIDTH entry is zero Also note that the width given is for all lanes in PREPASSR_ 20 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE each lane group The SATURATIONFLOWS values are given for each non zero lane group WIDTH The phasing for each intersection is given by the SEQUENCE code according to the codes listed in Figure 1 2 The timings for each phase are entered with the CYCLES GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES commands in the order of the phasing Now use the INTERSECTION command to change to the next intersection and enter the following information for intersection 14 Basic gt INTERSECTION 14 MAIN Intersection NODELOCATION 2125 0 Basic gt NETWORK EAST 530 35 15 Basic NETWORK WEST 2130 35 13 Basic VOLUMES 150 813 244 0 1296589 000 386 6200 Basic gt WIDTHS 0480 02424 000 12240 Basic SATFL
21. 2 E 20 20r 207 62250 ZO 2 200 22 3 0 Storage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SIGNAL CONTROL Phase 1 2 3 4 5 6 Phasing Ordr 13 No Lg Greentimes 11 90 20 10 19 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Permissives Ys Ys Ys No Yellowtimes 3 00 3 00 3 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 RT Overlaps Ys Ys Ys Ys Cycle s 60 60 30 Offset 0 76 to start of Phase 2 NETWORK DATA S E Dist Spd Node Movements Asg Crv Man X Coord Y Coord N Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No 2656 0 E Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No S Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No W Approach 530 35 tA TEOS 0 Def No No PREPASSR D 192 Reference PREPASSR TEAPAC PASSER2xx Formatted Input The PASSER2xx Formatted Input report is generated when the EXPORT command is used to build a PASSER input data file The file created during an EXPORT is a card image file ready for use with the PASSER program The PASSER2xx Formatted Input report can be used to check the PASSER data input prior to running PASSER PASSER2xx Formatted Input The title line of the report displays the PASSER version number for which the input data has been generated PASSER287 represents the PASSER I 87 program PASSER290 represents PASSER II 90 and PASSER202 represents PASSER I 02 PASSER Data Input The card images which are listed include all the pertinent data required to run the PASSER program for the designated version In addition the data is in the correct fixed field format required by the PASSER program PHASER DAT Offset Reference File The i
22. 221 TPC65 WARNING F 222 TPC66 ERROR F 222 TPC67 ERROR F 222 TPC68 WARNING F 222 TPC69 WARNING F 223 TPC71 ERROR F 223 TPC72 ERROR F 223 TPC81 ERROR F 223 TPC91 ERROR F 223 TPC92 ERROR F 224 traffic count data 47 traffic counts B 136 traffic generator data 47 TRANSYT ii 49 TRANSYT 7F B 83 B 125 trip generation rate B 93 Trouble Spots E 206 truck counts B 79 TRUCKCOUNTS 43 A 57 B 79 B 139 B 169 B 173 F 220 TRUCKPERCENTS 39 A 56 B 170 trucks 43 B 169 TSPPD ii 49 turning movement count summaries 50 TURNS 50 TURNS compatibility 43 PREPASSR Tutorial Manual 2 U un install options G 231 unsatisfied demand B 103 update messages B 114 UPSTREAMVC 41 A 57 B 171 Usage Level F 223 user variable 46 B 75 UTILIZATION F 221 UTILIZATIONS 41 A 57 B 172 V VEHICLECOUNTS 43 A 57 B 79 B 139 B 169 B 173 F 220 verify input data 22 Version Number 9 virtual drive G 227 Visual Mode 19 VOLADDITIONALS 50 A 56 B 174 VOLFACTORS 38 A 56 B 160 B 175 VOLUMES 20 36 38 A 56 B 159 B 160 B 168 B 176 C 181 E 204 E 206 W WARNING F 209 Warrant Analysis 43 B 77 WARRANTS 50 B 78 WIDTHS 20 36 38 A 56 B 106 B 177 E 203 E 204 E 206 Windows G 225 Y YELLOWTIMES 20 37 40 A 57 B 102 B 143 B 148 B 178 E 203 yield sign controlled lane group B 98 308 Index
23. ANALYZE command The REPORTS command can also be used to produce the 24 Hour report using the ADT option in the list of reports When the ADTFACTOR is zero the default value the 24 Hour Volume Estimates report is omitted under all conditions PREPASSR B 66 Reference APPLABELS APPLABELS APPLABELS 4 lt Approach Label gt Defaults NES W Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter labels for each approach of the current intersection lt Approach Label gt is a two character abbreviation for each of the four approaches at the intersection and can be any two characters Its default value is N E S amp W for each of the approaches respectively Notes Alternate labels could be for example SB WB NB amp EB respectively or A B C amp D e Use of APPLABELS does not change the order of entry this order is always clockwise starting with the north approach APPLABELS merely allows each approach to be labeled with the user s choice of characters PREPASSR_ B 67 Reference ARRIVALTYPES ARRIVALTYPES ARRIVALTYPES _ 12 lt Quality of Progression gt Defaults 12 3 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the quality of progression for each movement of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Quality of Progression gt specifies various types of parameters related to the quality of progressio
24. Adjustment Factor gt is the factor to adjust number of stops calculated for each movement and can be any number from 0 01 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes If number of stops have been simulated with a network model such as TRANSYT 7F or NETSIM CORSIM which does a better job of modeling delay between coordinated signals than the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual allows NSTOPFACTORS may be used to force the calculations of number of stops in EVALUATE to the same values For example if EVALUATE calculates 20 stops but TRANSYT 7F estimates 16 stops use an NSTOPFACTOR of 0 80 PREPASSR B 125 Reference OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET lt Offset gt lt Phase Number gt Defaults 0 00 0 Groups Menus PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION IMPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the coordinated offset for a phase of the phase sequence at the current intersection lt Offset gt is the coordinated offset in seconds or seconds second and can be any number from 0 to 900 Its default value is 0 00 lt Phase Numbers is the phase for which the offset is specified and can be 0 6 Its default value is 1 Notes e An offset greater than or equal to 1 0 is assumed to be in seconds less than 1 0 is assumed to be in seconds second PREPASSR B 126 Reference OPTIMIZE OPTIMIZE OPTIMIZE lt Optimization Type gt lt Step Size List gt Defaults NONE 15 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC SYSTEM EXPORT The purpose
25. B 133 F 222 generation rates 42 B 93 GetScenarioCase 12 GOTO 46 A 56 B 94 B 147 F 218 GOVERCS 40 B 108 GRADES 41 A 57 B 95 GREENTIMES 20 36 40 A 57 B 96 B 102 B 143 E 203 E 204 Group Name A 53 F 217 Group Name Structure A 54 GROUPTYPES 39 A 56 B 98 growth of traffic B 175 growth rate B 175 H HEADING 45 A 56 B 99 Help 12 44 A 53 A 56 B 100 B 163 F 217 on screen 10 Highway Capacity Manual B 86 B 162 host program executable name G 232 I IDEALSATFLOWS 41 A 57 B 101 IGNORE B 111 IMPORT 25 30 31 35 A 56 B 102 D 200 E 205 PREPASSR INITIALQUEUE 41 A 57 B 103 Input Data from TURNS WARRANTS and SITE 50 Input Limitations 29 Input Modes 10 Input Requirements 27 Installation G 231 INSTALLATION NOTES G 225 Installing TEAPAC Programs G 231 INTERSECTION 20 36 38 A 56 B 70 B 104 B 118 B 122 B 123 B 165 E 202 E 203 E 207 F 221 INTERSECTION Command E 207 intersection conditions 43 B 77 invalid command F 217 invalid entries F 216 invalid time entry F 219 IODEVICES 45 A 56 B 105 B 120 K keyword F 215 L labels for each approach 38 41 B 67 labels for each movement 38 41 B 117 Lane Group WIDTH Designation E 206 LANES 38 A 56 B 106 last line B 91 B 112 B 155 G 229 LEADLAGS 40 A 57 B 97 B 107 B 157 B 178 E 207 left turn trap B 141 LEVELOFSERVICE 40 A 57 B 87 B 108
26. Build 14 29MAR04 gt Installation Setup Modified for Proper Creation of Shortcuts A change has been made to the configuration of the new MSI installation setup now used by most TEAPAC programs Now when shortcuts are created in the start menu or the desktop during installation they are configured properly with the installation folder set as the Start In folder Working Directory for the shortcut In recent TEAPAC releases which use the new MSI installation system this configuration option was not selected resulting in a possible problem when running the program in locating the Help file on screen manual Help Contents menu Help buttons and F1 key and or the Recent Changes file Help RecentChanges menu Build 12 O3MAR04 gt Better Default System Cycle Length Used The system cycle length or cycle optimization range fora TRANSYT analysis is determined by the cycle information provided for the intersection which is designated as the MASTERNODE intersection In the event that the MASTERNODE is not defined or if it points to an intersection not in the current SUBSYSTEM the program now uses the first intersection of the SUBSYSTEM rather than the first intersection of the NODELIST to define the default system cycle length or cycle optimization range The same determination of the default cycle length is made when identifying the sub folder where PASSER results will be imported from gt Further Enhancements to Ver 5
27. Distribution Type gt must not exceed the limit previously established by the SITESIZE command and lt Node gt must be an intersection included in the current NODELIST command e In a Visual Mode dialog that includes PATHDISTRIBUTION or distribution type data the button button Page Up key and Page Down key can be used to in effect dynamically issue a PATHDISTRIBUTION command for the next PREPASSR_ B 134 Reference PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHDISTRIBUTION and previous type numbers If data values are changed on a screen display the Page keys should not be used before the data is first entered with the TAB key PREPASSR _ B 135 Reference PEAKHOURFACTORS PEAKHOURFACTORS PEAKHOURFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt Defaults 12 0 90 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the peak hour factor for each movement of the current intersection lt Peak Hour Factor gt is the peak hour factor for each movement and can be any number from 0 50 1 00 Its default value is 0 90 Notes e Peak hour factors are applied to the demand volume to determine the adjusted volume for future use in the V C and delay calculations As such caution should be used in applying peak hour factors much less than 0 90 since adjusted volumes substantially higher than the hourly volumes will be generated Caution should be exercised in calculating peak hour factors from traffic cou
28. H in the back of the manual for future off line reference The version number of the TEAPAC Interface used in the program is also displayed with the Help About menu Input Modes The Main Menu of the Visual Mode is the first display This is where all program actions can be initiated including data entry and computations Each line of a menu uses a command keyword to describe what that menu line selection will allow the user to accomplish For sub menus a group name is used to label the primary menu line Menu selections can be made with the mouse or with the underlined Alt keys and the Enter key if required When this is done a dialog box is displayed which allows entry or editing of current data values or execution of action dialogs with the Execute button Dialog boxes can be terminated with the OK button the Close button or the ESCape key The Main Menu can be used to select the Tabular View as an alternate input environment using the View menu In Tabular View displays each line of the display is preceded by a command keyword which describes the contents of the command line The bottom line of the dialog provides HELP on how to use this command If this command is an action command it requires use of the Execute button to perform the action The Help button can be used to access context sensitive on screen help The Tabular View can also be toggled using the F3 key The Main Menu can also be used to select the Manual Mode
29. HELP HELP HELP lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups INFO The purpose of this command is to display the command names parameter descriptions and default values for each command listed lt List of Commands gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes HELP provides a brief 1 line summary for each of the listed commands including the parameters and values expected and their default values e The Help Commands menu produces the same result as using HELP ALL an alphabetical list of all commands as found in Appendix A The Manual Mode must be used for any of the other HELP command options If HELP is requested for one command the detailed help of the Help button or the F1 key found in any Visual Mode dialog is displayed as found in Appendix B PREPASSR B 100 Reference IDEALSATFLOWS IDEALSATFLOWS IDEALSATFLOWS 12 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt Defaults 12 1900 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the base ideal saturation flow rate for each movement of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt is the base saturation flow rate of a single lane under ideal conditions in pcphgpl and can be any integ
30. Max Cycle D 189 Minimum Green D 188 Network Data D 189 Number of Lanes D 188 Offset D 189 Offset sec D 198 Optimization Type D 187 PASSER Data Input D 193 PASSER2xx Formatted Input D 193 PASSER II Imported Data D 200 Peak Hour Factors D 188 Permissives D 189 Phase sec D 197 PHASER DAT Offset Reference File D 193 Phasing Diagram D 197 Phasing Order D 189 Pin Settings Found D 200 PSR Greens amp Yellows D 200 Right Turn on Red D 188 RT Overlaps D 189 Saturation Flow D 188 Sequence D 197 Simulation Period D 187 Specified List of Links to be Simulated D 187 Speed Slope Guide Lines D 195 Startup Lost Time D 188 Steps per TRANSYT Cycle D 187 Storage D 188 Time Space Plot D 195 Truck Percentages D 188 Vertical Axis D 195 Yellowtimes D 189 ALL A 54 A 58 ASSIGNMENT B 160 BASIC 19 A 54 A 58 CONTROL A 54 A 58 DATAFILES 25 A 54 A 58 EXPORT A 54 A 58 GENERATOR B 160 IMPORT A 54 A 58 INFO A 54 A 58 INTERSECTION A 54 A 58 B 104 PARAMETERS 19 A 54 A 58 RESULTS A 54 A 58 SIGNAL2000 A 58 SITE A 54 A 58 SYSTEM A 54 A 58 PREPASSR TITLES A 54 A 58 TURNS WARRANTS A 54 A 58 APage Down key 23 B 104 B 134 Page Up key 23 B 104 B 134 2 24 hour volumes 43 B 66 A abbreviation F 211 F 212 access points 42 B 93 ACKNOWLEDGMENTS iii action command
31. Max gt lt Cycle Inc gt 60 120 30 lt List of Commands gt PARAM AAYFACTORS 12 lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt T2 T00 RIPTION lt Second Title Line gt blanks HO lt Input Output Echo Condition NO YI NO DGAIN 12 lt End Gain Time sec gt J25 20 ESS lt List of Priority Movement s gt 0 PORT lt File gt AUTO STACK lt NO YES gt lt VIEW IMPRT BOTH gt AUTO NO IMP CTORS 12 lt Capacity Adjustment Factor gt 12 1 200 5 lt File Name gt 5 blanks lt IN OUT BOTH gt lt Gen Rate gt 10 lt Node Dir gt 0 0 10 0 lt Line gt lt Repeat Variable gt next 4 lt Grade of Approach gt 4 0 0 6 lt Phase Green Time sec or sec sec gt 6 0 0 12 lt Lane Group NORM FREEFL DUALOPT STP YLD gt 12 NORMAL lt Number of Lines gt 3 lt List of Commands gt PARAM 12 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate pcphgpl 12 1900 lt PASSER Output File gt AUTO lt Display NO Y AUTO NO 12 lt Initial Queue veh gt 12 0 lt Node gt lt Intersection Description gt 0 blanks lt View NORM TABL gt lt Page gt lt Ln Pg gt lt Lst Ln gt Norm 0 66 63 12 lt Number of Lanes gt 12 0 2 lt Lead Lag Phasing NONE LEAD LAG gt 2 NONE lt Delayl gt lt Delay2 gt lt Delay3 gt lt vcl gt lt vc2 gt lt vc3 gt C E 5 90 100 5 500 lt lt Node gt N E S W gt 500 0 lt Line gt lt File gt lt PROCESS SHARE IGNORE gt lt gt next next P 1 lt lt
32. PLOT If an entry of this input is made however say from the Manual Mode or from an old control file it will be accepted without error and then ignored This keeps PREPASSR upwards compatible with old data and control files as well as old habits The same logic used to determine the main street direction for PLOT is also used in preparing the new card type 61 which requires the input of a route orientation gt NODELIST Check Improved Especially for One way Streets Any time an active command is executed PREPASSR inspects the SUBSYSTEM NODELIST entry to make as sure as possible that no obvious omissions have been made in the network definition This check has been slightly improved to better accommodate conditions which might exist at the end point nodes of one way streets gt EXPORT Review Option Changed to VIEW The REVIEW option of the EXPORT AUTO command has been changed to the keyword VIEW to better indicate the intended purpose of the option to view the output created by PASSER gt Generic Changes for Newest TEAPAC Interfaces V2 L2 3 And V2 L2 4 The generic changes involved in the latest TEAPAC Interfaces have been fully implemented in PREPASSR as described below V2 12 4 17JUN94 Better ESCape Processing Provided An improved method for detecting and trapping ESCape depressions has been implemented to provide quicker response to a user s desire to escape from a current activity in the program This problem has become
33. Phase 1 2 3 4 5 6 Phasing Ordr 12 No Lg Greentimes 16 90 17 10 17 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Permissives Ys No Ys Ys Yellowtimes 3 00 3 00 3 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 RT Overlaps Ys Ys Ys Ys Cycle s 60 60 30 Offset 0 65 to start of Phase 2 NETWORK DATA aa ar a ae Dist Spd Node Movements Asg Crv Man X Coord Y Coord N Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No 2125 0 E Approach 530 35 15 Se Gi ak 0 Def No No S Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No W Approach 2130 35 13 5 TE 63 T 0 Def No No PREPASSR D 191 Reference PR Gl INTERSECTION PASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 15 Water amp Pershing Summary of Parameter Values AOVEMENT DATA North East South West Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Demand Volumes 0 0 0 466 780 0 386 135 453 O D73 294 Peak Hr Factors 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 Truck Percents 220 2410 2x0 20 lt 2 10 2530 220 24 0 2 20 20 2210 2550 Rt Turn on Red 0 0 0 0 Approach Widths OO O20 gt 000 020 3650 05 00 12 0 4 8 0 gt _ 0 5 0 0 0 24 0 12 0 Number of Lanes 0 0 0 1 3 0 1 4 0 0 2 1 Lane Group Type Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Saturation Flow 0 0 0 1359 3387 O 1345 4402 0 O 2486 1300 Minimum Green 940 5210 25 30 B20 D0 Sr 90 Da0 75 0 9120 50 570 Actuated Movmts No No No No No No No No No No No No Startup Lost 220 2510 2 0 260 20 233 90 220 24 0 230 20 2 0 2 50 End Gain Ze0F 230 220 ZH0K
34. Reference PATHASSIGNMENT PATHASSIGNMENT PATHASSIGNMENT lt Path gt lt Path gt lt Path List gt Defaults 0 0 8 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter a path list of intersections which vehicles of the current distribution type follow when traveling to and from the development lt Path gt is the path number which determines which of the four possible paths is to be defined for the current distribution type and can be 1 5 a selected path number It has no default value it must be entered lt Path gt is the percentage of total trips generated for the current distribution type which is to be assigned to the following path and can be 0 100 percent Its default value is 0 lt Path List gt is a list of intersection node numbers separated by spaces through which vehicles generated by the site for the current distribution type in the order they occur in the path and not to exceed 16 intersections in length Each entry can be any valid intersection number see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered Notes The first and last node numbers of the lt Path List gt must agree with the external node number of the current PATHDISTRIBUTION type and one of the access points of the GENERATION command If the distribution type is an inbound type the first node number must be the external node of the current distribution type and the last node number must be an inbound
35. Table A 2 continued Cross Reference of Commands and Groups Groups Command ALL INF DAT TIT CON RES PAR BAS SYS INT SIG TUR SIT EXP IMP ACTUATIONS MINIMUMS STARTUPLOST ENDGAIN RAGE URAT IONF LOWS EQUENCES E ISSIVES ERLAPS DLAGS ES ENTIMES LOWTIMES a D lt E K KK KKM MK KK KK KK EM H ZUOKA Q FOVNNNE TICALS IME UNTTYP RIODS NDITIONS TFACTOR HICLECOUNTS UCKCOUNTS ESIZE UND E ERATION HDISTRIBUTION HASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT KKK KKM MK KKK KK KKM KK K xx KKM HDAMUOHOCHDNE D gt O n Z AS s QWAWNHAS PAVAVOQAAZVAHHDAPaACw D K KKK K KK OK OM DK OOK OO OO OOOO OOOO KK KK KX XX S K MK mK mK mK KK KK OM OM OD OKO OO OO OKO KOO OO KKK KX XX OX xx KK KM MS Common TEAPAC Group Names PREPASSR_ A 57 Reference The group name ALL contains every possible PREPASSR command This group is organized in alphabetical order The ALL group is divided into six sub groups all of which have standard group names used in every TEAPAC program These are INFO DATAFILES TITLES CONTROL RESULTS and PARAMETERS The first four encompass the 22 standard TEAPAC commands found in every TEAPAC program These are used primar
36. Topics Chapter 1 Introduction Structure and Organization Conventions Review of TEAPAC Procedures PREPASSR 1 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Structure and Organization This document the PREPASSR Tutorial Reference Manual explains the data entries and procedures necessary to use the PREPASSR program The organization of the PREPASSR Tutorial Reference Manual is similar to all of the TEAPAC manuals Chapters 1 through 5 serve as the program Tutorial Manual The tutorial steps through a simple example problem and then discusses the specific analysis techniques and procedures of the PREPASSR program The attached appendices form the program Reference Manual which provides easy look up of detail on the program s inputs operation and output The following paragraphs briefly describe each section of this manual This chapter Chapter 1 discusses the overall structure of the tutorial reference manual and the conventions used throughout see the outline in Table 1 1 It also contains a brief explanation of the basic procedures of TEAPAC which are described in detail in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual If you are unfamiliar with the TEAPAC package you could review the tutorial section of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual in order to better understand the basic TEAPAC inputs and procedures PREPASSR 2 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Table 1 1 Organization of the PREPASSR Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION S
37. access node If the distribution type is outbound the reverse applies e Previously entered path lists on the PATHASSIGNMENT command can be deleted by entering a zero percentage for the list This completely removes the list of intersections which is readily apparent in the Visual Mode and also ignores any list which may be entered following the zero percentage This allows the removal of an unneeded list of intersections If a previously entered PATHASSIGNMENT list must be shortened the entry of node number 0 anywhere in the list will erase all nodes from that point to the end of the list If the entire path is to be discarded either replace it with a new path or use 0 percent so that the path is effectively ignored at this point an entire path cannot be eliminated from the PATHASSIGNMENT command Intersection node numbers in lt Path List gt must match intersections previously established with the NODELIST command PREPASSR B 133 Reference PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHDISTRIBUTION lt Distr Type gt lt Distr gt lt Node gt lt Node Dir gt lt Descr gt Defaults z 0 0 30 blanks Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter and set the current distribution type number and enter its related distribution percentage external node and description lt Distr Type gt is the number of the distribution type for which the following distribution information applies and whi
38. and that the SAVE command describes which of these five files are to be used The SAVE command can also tell the program where in the file to save information allowing different scenarios to be stacked one after the other in the same file The LOAD command is used to retrieve the information at a later date All of these options relate to advanced file manipulation capabilities such as batch control file scripts and multiple scenarios described in detail in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual Exiting the Program Additional experiments may be conducted at this point When finished the Exit option of the File menu can be used In the Manual Mode the STOP or QUIT command can also be used Control gt STOP Control of the computer is returned to the operating system This step is not necessary if you will continue with the examples of Chapter 3 Additional Concerns The procedures and commands presented in this chapter are representative of the functions which can be performed using the PREPASSR program A number of important aspects were not presented in the interest of simplifying the example problem Specifically default values were used for many of the possible parameter values of the program These parameter default values may not be appropriate for the conditions to be studied and thus may require modification Another important command not mentioned is the SUBSYSTEM command which allows a subset of the network to be exporte
39. by first setting the ECHO parameter to YES This is a convenient way to visualize what is happening during LOADs and SAVEs As such it is also a powerful tool for debugging complicated batch control file sequences ECHO can also be used to view some other file data transfer functions such as outputting volumes to files from TURNS and SITE for use by SIGNAL2000 etc PREPASSR B 85 Reference ENDGAIN ENDGAIN ENDGAIN 12 lt End Gain Time gt Defaults 12 2 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the length of time that vehicles effectively extend the green period into the yellow and all red period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection lt End Gain Time gt is the number of seconds during the yellow and all red period which is effectively used as green time and can be any number from 0 0 to 30 0 Its default value is 2 0 Notes The usage of the system wide LOSTTIMES entry has been discontinued now being replaced by the more detailed movement specific STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN entries described above The system wide LOSTTIME entry was used by PREPASSR to code the system wide lost time entry required by PASSER Since LOSTTIMES entries found in prior data files will now be ignored PREPASSR will always enter a standard default system wide lost time value of 4 seconds consistent with the same default in the Highway Capacity Manual and SIGNAL2000 The user should note how
40. check is now made before an EXPORT or PLOT to make sure that each of the intersections in the NODELIST and or SUBSYSTEM are reasonably connected This does not guarantee that PREPASSR_ H 287 Reference the system is fully or properly connected but will make sure each intersection in sequence is connected in both directions to the following intersection gt System Node Number Included in EXPORT Street Name Since PASSER only accepts intersection numbers from 1 to 20 these numbers can be easily confused with system network numbers which are normally any arbitrary numbering scheme System node numbers are used by the INTERSECTION command to reference each intersection in the network These node numbers are now included in the street name which is exported to PASSER so that the PASSER results clearly indicate which intersection is which This also aids in the problem of the limited number of characters which are allowed by PASSER for the street name since the node number is now always listed first This node number is also used by the new IMPORT process to place the imported timings with the proper intersection gt Improvements in EXPORT Minimize Problems When Running PASSER Several minor adjustments to the EXPORT process have been implemented which help minimize problems when PASSER is running using the exported data When a splitt offset optimization is performed the minimums for non overlapping phases which are given to PASSER are checked
41. complete set of commands using a single parameter value In order to use a group name as a parameter value it is necessary to enclose the group name in square brackets XXX as shown in this appendix PREPASSR_ A 53 Reference Table A 1 Group Name Structure Std Std GROUP NAME Types of Commands Included in Group Name Group ALL All of the PREPASSR commands alphabetically INFO help amp information about updates DATAFILI data and file management TITLE nter the headings for report output control program execution environment perform program specific actions enter program specific data enter essential data requirements enter system data ECTION nter intersection data SIGNAL2000 enter additional intersection data TURNS WARRANTS enter traffic count data SITE enter traffic generator data EXPORT related to export to PASSER actions IMPORT lated to import from PASSER actions Appendix A Topics Appendix A Introduction PREPASSR Command Structure All Commands PREPASSR Command Siructure Each PREPASSR command has been classified into one or more groups each of which consist of a subset of all PREPASSR commands Each group contains commands which share functional similarities The Group Name associated with each group describes the function shared by the commands The Group Names f
42. control files as 2 5 instead of 1 is now the recommended practice gt T2004v6 X Entry for INTERSECTION Number Allowed As Positional Input The intersection number on an INTERSECTION command line or dialog is now allowed to be a negative number between 1 and N where N is the number of intersections in the NODELIST When this is the case the intersection selected is the i th node of the NODELIST when i is used The expected use of this feature is to allow REPEAT loops in control files to easily sequence through all the nodes of the NODELIST when the NODELIST is not in numerical order and or not a sequential list of nodes from 1 to N gt T2004v6 TEAPAC Menu Enhancements A new File menu in the TEAPAC Menu shows recent files which have been used by the program a new Options menu allows program folder setup for all of the third party programs supported by the Menu a new Help menu can list recently installed changes and check the internet for updates default support for VISSIM 4 and TRANSYT 7F Release 10 is provided TEAPAC files which are double clicked to be launched thru the TEAPAC Menu now open into the menu only without launching the program that created the file since any file can now be used by any program this old action is no longer appropriate gt T2004v6 Printable On screen Manuals Available as PDF Downloads The full documentation for each TEAPAC program has always been directly available as the on screen manual whi
43. default value is 40 Notes The lt Model gt defines the preferred queue model which will be used to calculate queues represented in the ANALYZE and EVALUATE results as well as the bottom of the QUEUECALCS report See Appendix C for a complete description of each of the queue models which can be computed by SIGNAL2000 All models do not support the calculation of any specified percentile value For example only a limited set of percentile values can be selected for the HCM model the ARRB model always uses the 95th percentile and the original SIGNAL97 models always uses the 90th percentile see Appendix C PREPASSR B 145 Reference QUEUEMODELS QUEUEMODELS e All models do not support the calculation of an entered length of autos and trucks For example the lengths of autos and trucks for the original SIGNAL97 models always use 25 and 40 feet respectively see Appendix C Average lane Models 2 amp 5 are no longer separately defined by the 2000 HCM PREPASSR B 146 Reference REPEAT REPEAT REPEAT lt Variable Names lt First Val gt lt Last Val gt lt Increment gt Defaults 7 1 1 1 Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to initiate a loop in a control file so that the set of commands which follow will be repeated a finite number of times lt Variable Name gt is the name of the variable to be associated with the loop and can be any character string beginning with a letter It has no defa
44. defined by the PERIODS command If entries are being made for a given time interval no more than twelve count entries may follow the time being entered one for each movement Action Check the entries made following the movement number of time making sure the number of entries match the limits discussed above This can be particularly tricky when entering counts for a given movement especially when more than one time period is defined by the PERIODS command Use the Tabular View of the Visual Mode or the ASK VEHICLECOUNTS command to see on the full screen display what entries are expected when entering rows or columns of the count tables TPC60 ERROR xxxxx is not a valid movement number or time value entry Re enter properly The first parameter of the VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands must define whether the following entries are for a given movement or a given time interval To do this the first entry must be a valid movement number 1 12 or a valid time interval as defined by the PERIODS command Action If entering data for a given time interval use the DATA or ASK command to display the valid times which have been generated by the current PERIODS command Re issue the VEHICLECOUNTS or TRUCKCOUNTS command with a proper movement number or time or re issue the PERIODS command so the proper times are defined for your count information TEAPAC F 220 Reference TPC61 WARNING An INTERSECTION must be given before this input can be m
45. exceeded the TEAPAC limits of 180 characters for the file path or 70 characters for the file name The file path limit includes the drive letter and the file name limit includes the file extension and any switches used Action If the file path is too long re locate the file or sub folder being used to a location where this limit will not be exceeded Then re issue the file access command if appropriate As an alternate network drives can frequently be mapped to a new drive name thereby reducing the file path length considerably by using a drive letter instead If the file name is too long re name the file so that it meets the file name limit Since SCENARIO Condition files and certain file switch options can add as many as 6 characters to file names designated by users it is recommended that user file names not exceed a limit of 64 characters to avoid potential problems when these tools are used TPC21 WARNING Data written by XXXXX Vv vv bb may be lost Overwrite No Yes This message indicates that a save operation has been requested for a file which contains data which was written by a different TEAPAC program and thus is subject to possible data loss if the save operation is permitted The authoring program of a file is determined when a file is opened and used only if it was created by any TEAPAC program with the Version 5 or later TEAPAC F 214 Reference TEAPAC interface This message may also be issued if an earlier version of th
46. extension then archive the for files so they are not used by mistake The long file names and paths mentioned above are valid for either extension gt New User Discussion Forum Is Accessible Directly from the Help Menu The new User Discussion Forum which has been implemented for TEAPAC users and is available 24 7 for posting questions and searching through answers to previous questions can PREPASSR_ H 235 Reference now be accessed directly from the Help menu of the program The Forum can also be accessed directly using any internet browser at www StrongConcepts com Forum PREPASSR Ver 2 71 0O8SEP06 Build 07 25JAN07 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS5 Build 07 1LNOVO5 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt SCENARIO Program Makes its Debut SCENARIO is a new Visual TEAPAC program that can create multi scenario data files either from scratch or from data files of earlier versions of TEAPAC Users can 1 select from pre defined typical scenario structures like multiple volume conditions or multiple timing plans 2 create completely unique scenario conditions for their analyses or 3 customize a pre defined scenario structure to meet their specific needs The primary advantage of using SCENARIO is that all the scenario data is saved without dangers of duplicated data which often occur when scenarios are managed by the typical use of File SaveAs The SCENARIO program also fu
47. full use license of PREPASSR to eliminate this artificial constraint This message will not be issued in a full use licensed version of PREPASSR PPS09 ERROR YELLOWTIMES are limited to values of only 3 0 seconds in demo Re enter In a demonstration version of PREPASSR clearance intervals can only take on values of 3 0 seconds This error indicates that this limitation has been exceeded Action Correct the YELLOWTIMES so that they equal the demo limit of 3 0 seconds or purchase a full use license of PREPASSR to eliminate this artificial constraint This message will not be issued in a full use licensed version of PREPASSR PREPASSR E 203 Reference PPS10 ERROR Zero GREENTIME for phase X of node XX not allowed Re enter or use 0 01 sec This error indicates that a phase for the intersection whose node number is indicated has a GREENTIMES value of 0 0 seconds PASSER will not allow this to be modeled Action Re enter the proper non zero GREENTIME for the phase If the actual phase time is 0 0 seconds enter a value of 0 01 seconds so that PASSER will not reject the input PPS11 ERROR Movement XX of node XX with non zero WIDTH needs non zero SATFLOW Re enter This error indicates that a movement for the intersection whose node number is indicated which has a non zero WIDTHS entry has a SATURATIONFLOWS entry of 0 vphg PASSER will not allow this to be modeled Action Re enter the proper non zero SATURATIONFLOWS for the lane group
48. gt 37 B 153 lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt 42 B 90 lt Scale gt 35 B 143 lt Second Title Line gt 45 B 84 lt Sequence Code gt 36 39 B 157 lt Speed gt 36 38 B 118 lt Startup Lost Time gt 39 B 162 lt Step Size List gt 36 37 B 127 lt Steps Cycle gt 37 B 158 lt Stop Penalty gt 37 B 158 lt Stopping Bus Volume gt 41 B 74 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt 42 B 125 lt Storage Distance gt 36 39 B 164 lt Stream Saturation Flow gt 36 39 B 154 lt Target Delay LOS gt 40 B 108 lt Target v c gt 40 B 108 lt Third Title Line gt 45 B 124 lt Truck gt 37 B 145 lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt 39 B 170 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt 41 B 171 lt v c Incr gt 40 B 108 lt Variable Name gt 46 B 147 lt Visual View gt B 105 lt X Y Coord UR gt 42 B 72 lt X Y Coordinates gt 38 B 123 Actuated Model D 187 Actuated Movements D 188 Approach Widths D 188 Cumulative sec D 198 Cycle D 195 Cycle Increment D 189 Cycle Length D 189 D 197 Default Link Assignment Method D 187 Demand Volumes D 188 End Gain Time D 188 Greentimes D 189 302 Index Horizontal Axis D 195 Intersection D 188 Interval sec D 197 Lane Group Type D 188 Leadlags D 197 Legend of Phase Symbols D 195 List of Intersection s in Defined Routes D 187 List of Intersection s in Network D 187 List of Intersection s in Subsystem D 187
49. in seconds second the first cycle length of the CYCLES command will be used to convert the phase times to seconds e If all entries are greater than or equal to 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds if all entries are less than 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds second If entering GREENTIMES by phase they must be entered in the order of the phases as specified by the SEQUENCES code and the LEADLAGS command To prevent division by zero errors in PASSER all phases except overlap phases must have non zero GREENTIMES To analyze a phase with an effective greentime of zero use 0 01 seconds This will display as zero but prevent division by zero errors When EXPORTing to PASSER for a split or cycle optimization the input of GREENTIMES is not required since they will be ignored by PASSER If a zero time for an overlap phase is used this is permitted by PREPASSR although 1 second is used for PASSER since PASSER will not allow a zero time phase In the event that an overlap phase s green and yellow times are both zero the clearance time is set to the minimum value of 1 second rather than the 4 second default PREPASSR B 97 Reference GROUPTYPES GROUPTYPES GROUPTYPES 12 lt Lane Group Type gt Defaults 12 NORMAL Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the special lane group type for each possible lane group such as dual optional lanes free flow lanes and sign controlled lanes for the cur
50. in the plot as shown in the Legend of Phase Symbols Symbol Signal Phase Description blank Main Street Through Phase roy Main Street Lead or Lag from the Right Overlap Main Street Lead or Lag from the Left Overlap Main Street Lead or Lag Dual Left Turn Phase PREPASSR D 195 Reference Side Street Through Phase FFF Side Street Lead or Lag from the Top LLL Side Street Lead or Lag from the Bottom REE Side Street Lead or Lag Dual Left Turn Phase The following is an example of the Time Space Diagram text only report using the PREPASSR program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum PREPASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Time Space Diagram for Cycle 60 sec 0 100 200 300 4 4 4 4 4 4 13 0 l 14 2130 tll l TEI t E A E E E 2500 15 2660 dul We eee ba Ne oe phere ft he ee 4 4 4 4 4 4 0 100 200 300 Legend of Phase Symbols Thru Lead Lag lLead Lag Dual Phase N or E S or W Lefts Main Street blanks Pe oy E RE E N Si
51. information are provided for each command as described below COMMAND lt Parameter Name gt 5 lt Another Parameter gt Defaults default for lt Parameter Name gt 5 default for lt Another Parameter gt Menus Groups lt menu group name gt This section shows the proper usage format of the command including the parameter values and their order of input The command is in capital letters and parameter names are in angle brackets lt and gt An integer followed by an asterisk indicates that the parameter can be repeated the specified number of times five times in the example Below the command line each of the default values for each parameter is shown followed by a list of any menu group names to which the command belongs other than ALL This is followed by a description of the purpose of the command For each parameter listed a separate paragraph provides a complete description of the parameter its allowed values and its default value All of the parameters descriptions are followed by a section of Notes which describe any special information warnings and other hints to insure the proper use of the command Appendix B Topics Appendix B Introduction Alphabetical List of Commands PREPASSR B 61 Reference Alphabetical List of Commands Commands ACTUATIONS ADTFACTOR APPLABELS ARRIVALTYPES ASK ASSIGNMENT BASE BIKEVOLUMES BUSVOLUMES CALCULATE CONDITIONS COUNTTYPE CRITICALS CYCLES D
52. intersection Its default value is 2 seconds consistent with the Highway Capacity Manual and SIGNAL2000 It is not used by PREPASSR ENDGAIN can be used to define an explicit amount of end gain time for each individual movement of each intersection Its default value is 2 seconds consistent with the Highway Capacity Manual and SIGNAL2000 It is not used by PREPASSR NETWORK has two new options added at the end of the entry one to define the upstream downstream assignment method to be used on links of the TRANSYT network and the other to define the link curvature for CORSIM Their defaults are Default and None respectively They are not used by PREPASSR SIMULATION has a new option which defines the default link assignment method to be used by PRETRANSYT if not specifically selected on a NETWORK entry as described above It is not used by PREPASSR gt New Lost Time Model is More Consistent with Highway Capacity Manual The usage of the system wide LOSTTIMES entry has been discontinued now being replaced by the more detailed movement specific STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN entries described above The system wide LOSTTIME entry was used by PREPASSR to code the system wide lost time entry required by PASSER Since LOSTTIMES entries found in prior data files will now be ignored PREPASSR will always enter a standard default system wide lost time value of 4 seconds consistent with the same default in the Highway Capacity Manual and SIGNAL2000 The
53. intersection numbers which have been used and a new INTERSECTION dialog to select the current intersection from the NODELIST The current intersection can be selected by using the drop down list in the INTERSECTION dialog or by walking through the NODELIST with the new buttons found on the main toolbar and relevant entry dialogs The PREPASSR_ H 259 Reference current intersection is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the main window Intersection numbers can now range from to 999 New intersections can be added to the network by first adding it with the NODELIST dialog then selecting it from the INTERSECTION drop down list or typing it in the INTERSECTION combo box As a shortcut the new intersection number can be typed with a description in the INTERSECTION combo box in which case the user will be prompted with an option to add the intersection to the end of the NODELIST automatically INTERSECTION 0 is a selection which represents all intersections in the NODELIST When this is selected certain actions like View Summary will be performed for all intersections Otherwise View Summary will now summarise the data only for the current intersection gt View Network Menu Added to Display Connected Intersection Network This new menu option permits viewing the interconnections between intersections which have been defined primarily in the NETWORK dialogs The graphical display shows all of the relationships between
54. intersections which have been established in a proportional diagram layout that can be scrolled across the entire network area If desired a bitmap of an aerial photograph or map of the study area can be defined as a background for this display to show the study network in relation to the information reflected by that background The bitmap should be stored in the same folder as the associated data file and should have the same name as the data file but with a BMP extension An example bitmap background is supplied with the sample data file PREPASSR FOR gt Explicit Ability to Represent Nema style Controllers When entering or viewing controller timings a new Convert button appears on the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES dialogs which allows the user to select the style of entry or view either By Phase which is the traditional HCM method or By Movement which is more similar to the way timings are used on NEMA and other dual ring controllers If any timings are present they will be converted to the other format at the same time including YELLOWTIMES if the GREENTIMES dialog is displayed and vice versa When timings are Converted the conversion will also include reviewing the allowed SEQUENCES list and moving the appropriate sequence code to the top of the list according to the timings present Allowing timings By Movement makes it apparent that for certain overlap phases phase lengths which are apparently negative in the By Phase meth
55. more details The excess time will be allocated to the phases in which the specified movements occur If the movements specified occur in more than one phase the excess time will be allocated to each in proportion to the g C required by each If a specified movement occurs in more than one phase its excess time phase will be designated as the single phase serving the movement i e if movement 2 is specified with sequence 21 the excess will go to the north south through phase PREPASSR B 87 Reference EXPORT EXPORT EXPORT lt File AUTO STACK gt lt Display Output gt lt Auto Option gt Defaults AUTO NO VIEW Menus Groups RESULTS EXPORT The purpose of this command is to create a PASSER compatible input data file from the current data values with an optional automatic link to PASSER lt File AUTO STACKsS is the name of the PASSER input data file to EXPORT to and can be any valid file name or the keywords AUTO or STACK Its default value is AUTO lt Display Output gt option is a keyword which describes if the EXPORTed data is to be displayed during the EXPORT process and can be either NO or YES Its default value is NO lt Auto Option gt is a keyword which describes what action should follow an automatic link to PASSER It can be any of the keywords listed below NONE no further action VIEW view PASSER results onscreen default Notes The default file name extension is DAT and follows the data file str
56. more of an issue in recent years as computer processing speeds have increased More frequently the user finds himself pressing ESCape after the computer has checked for it because the computer processes the intervening activities so quickly This has led to the need to press ESCape repeatedly to abort and sometimes never actually executing the abort process The new method used nearly eliminates this problem completely allowing the program to respond to the ESCape key instantly almost any time it is pressed PREPASSR_ H 282 Reference Better Error Message Procedures Used Faster and more screen compatible error display procedures are now used to minimize the occurrence of spurious error display problems which sometimes locked up the screen or displayed gibberish Several minor clarifications in the text of some of the standard error messages have also been made Better Diagnostic Response if HELP File Not Found at Program Start An improved error message is now displayed if the program s HLP file cannot be located when the program is first started Dynamic Pointer Key Operation Enhanced The dynamic pointer increment decrement function using the Ctrl Page Down Up key combination has been enhanced from its initial implementation in V2 L2 3 Now the command on which the cursor resides is not executed when these keys are pressed and the cursor is not moved to the next line of the screen display Manual Mode Message from Opening Screen Doesn
57. of the current intersection lt Startup Lost Time gt is the number of seconds which is not used at the beginning of a movement s green period and can be any number from 0 0 to 30 0 Its default value is 2 0 Notes The usage of the system wide LOSTTIMES entry has been discontinued now being replaced by the more detailed movement specific STARTUPLOST and ENDGAIN entries described above The system wide LOSTTIME entry was used by PREPASSR to code the system wide lost time entry required by PASSER Since LOSTTIMES entries found in prior data files will now be ignored PREPASSR will always enter a standard default system wide lost time value of 4 seconds consistent with the same default in the Highway Capacity Manual and SIGNAL2000 The user should note however that the default lost time used previously for LOSTTIMES was 3 seconds so a slight difference in lost time modeling will occur PREPASSR B 162 Reference STOP STOP STOP lt Next Program gt Defaults Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to stop running the current program and optionally run a new program lt Next Programs is the name of another program which is to be run following the end of the current program and can be any valid program name Its default value is blanks no program will be run following the end of the current program Notes lt Next Program gt may also include a file name to be used by the named program e The command QU
58. of the current open file can be inserted anywhere in a title line PROJECT DESCRIPTION or NOTE entry by placing F at the desired location of the title line The file name can be placed at a specific column location in a title line by using the XX form of a title entry see Help for any of the title commands gt Bigger Output Window for Higher Resolution Displays Output windows containing program results which are displayed at resolutions of 1024x768 or higher now use a larger window so that more results can be displayed and less scrolling is required to observe all of the results gt Additional Help and Shortcut Features Added Several new help features have been added One of these is a new Help button on the toolbar for direct access to the on line manual Help notes in the status line at the bottom of the window for each of the menu items in the File menu have also been added The File Close menu item in the main window now uses a shortcut of C instead of L for consistency with other programs and the File Exit menu item in the Results window has been changed to File CloseResults to avoid confusion with the File Exit menu item of the main window Lastly the last used file name is retained in the File Open and File SaveAs dialogs even when a previous dialog was cancelled gt New Warning Messages PREPASSR H 270 Reference A new warning message has been generated to warn users if unsaved data values are about to be reset to def
59. of this command is to enter the type of optimization to be performed by PASSER lt Optimization Type gt defines the values that are to be optimized by PASSER and can be any of the following keywords NONE No optimization only a simulation of input default OFFSETS Optimize offsets only SPLITS OFFSETS Optimizes splits and offsets CYCLE SPL OFF Optimizes cycle split and offset LIST Allows user to specify the step sizes used in the hillclimb optimizing process For compatibility with options available with PRETRANSYT the keyword LIST may also be used It has the same effect as SPLITS OFFSETS above lt Step Size List gt defines up to 15 step sizes to be used by TRANSYT when the LIST option is selected above or defines the DI PI PROS DI optimization type and multi cycle options of card type 5x when LIST is not selected It can be any valid step sizes or option values for the TRANSYT model from 3 to 99 Its default value is 0 0 0 2 0 which assumes the LIST option is not selected Notes If CYCLE optimization is selected for TRANSYT or PASSER the CYCLES command must also specify a cycle range with more than one cycle If the LIST option of OPTIMIZE is not used then the first three step size values input are used to designate the 2nd 3rd and 4th fields of the 5X card These are respectively the definition of the disutility index DJ the definition of the performance index PI and the relative weight of PROS for
60. optimized SEQUENCES GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by NOSTOP PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD for various forms of coordinated operation assessment and or optimization In PREprocessors e Imported optimized OFFSETS and possibly GREENTIMES can be transferred to SIGNAL2000 or other TEAPAC PREprocessors for evaluation graphical rendition simulation animation or further optimization In TURNS WARRANTS e Peak 15 minute or 60 minute VOLUMES and possibly TRUCKPERCENTS and PEAKHOURFACTORS can be transferred to SIGNAL2000 for HCM compliant capacity analysis HCM phasing timing optimization or intersection design e Peak 15 minute or 60 minute VOLUMES and possibly TRUCKPERCENTS and PEAKHOURFACTORS can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD e Peak 15 minute or 60 minute VOLUMES can be transferred to SITE as background traffic for traffic impact analysis studies In SITE e Projected added volumes VOLADDITIONALS can be transferred to SIGNAL2000 for HCM compliant capacity analysis HCM phasing timing optimization or intersection design e Projected added volumes VOLADDITIONALS can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD Traffic volumes are an important element either determined by or used by virtually all modules of TEAPAC thus a discussion here of how volume information flows
61. second the first cycle length of the CYCLES command will be used to convert the phase clearance times to seconds Normally YELLOWTIMES should be entered in seconds e If all entries are greater than or equal to 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds if all entries are less than 1 0 they are assumed to be seconds second When EXPORTing to PASSER for a split or cycle optimization YELLOWTIMES may be omitted in which case the time for each clearance interval in PASSER will be set to a default value of 4 seconds In the event that an overlap phase s green and yellow times are both zero the clearance time is set to the minimum value of 1 second rather than the 4 second default PREPASSR _ B 179 Reference APPENDIX C Analysis Methods and Formulations Appendix C Topics The following describes the various methods and formulations which are used in the PREPASSR program Appendix C Topics Appendix C Introduction Calculation of Volumes Calculation of Volumes In the simplest form a user enters volumes V for each intersection movement with the VOLUMES dialog and these volumes are used in any subsequent analyses which requires a measure of traffic demand These volumes are provided in vehicles per hour and frequently they represent the average hourly flow rate or equivalently the hourly count for the hour to be analyzed Since the Highway Capacity Manual HCM dictates that the normal analysis period is to be 15 minutes th
62. such a way that they will be restored previously blank entries were ignored leaving the prior entry The option to use F in a title line entry is noted in the input dialog gt TED Edit Window Available in Advanced Edit Option of File Menu Option to edit current open file 1 contents directly particularly for control files also option to open a different file into the editor converts to TEAPAC format when Saved CONVERT exe no longer needed for small files available only when licensed copy of TED is installed Upon saving the edits option to open the edited file into the program PREPASSR_ H 267 Reference e g to Launch an edited control file gt Printer Setup Supported Directly in File Menu Option to Setup printer only or Setup and Print ability to select printer and printer options while in the program prior method only allowed printing to current selected printer and option Toolbar button and Ctrl P accelerator print immediately with current setup Same print options are provided in the File menu of the Output window gt Improved Context sensitive Help Features Tooltip popup help has been added for any dialog box input field or button display after delay when mouse cursor hovers over input field or button Status line help also appears for the input field with the input cursor HELP in manual mode for a single command displays the relevant part of HLP As before Help button or F1 key to display the relevant part of HLP
63. system cycle length for coordinated systems will be equal to lt Minimum Cycle gt for the intersection referenced by MASTERNODE If MASTERNODE is 0 lt Minimum Cycle gt for the first node in the NODELIST will be used as the system cycle PREPASSR B 81 Reference DATA DATA DATA lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to display the current parameter values for the specified commands lt List of Commands gt is a set of commands and or groups names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program It default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes DATA will tabulate a list of the current parameter values of the listed commands To obtain a formatted list of all data values with column headings and labels etc use the SUMMARISE command e In the Manual Mode of menu versions of TEAPAC programs use of ASK for the same list of commands will display the current data values as well as allow any input editing which may be needed all in a single step PREPASSR B 82 Reference DELAYFACTORS DELAYFACTORS DELAYFACTORS 12 lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter factors for each movement of the current intersection used to adjust the delay calculations for example to match delays obtained fro
64. that will work on all configurations of Windows NT gt WinPREPASSR Uses the New TEAPAC2000 Interface Version 4 00 WinPREPASSR has been released with the new TEAPAC2000 Interface Interface Version 4 00 which offers many new features to enhance the computing experience with TEAPAC programs The following new features are among those provided by the TEAPAC2000 Interface Context sensitive link to Help file for error messages Context sensitive link to Help file for program outputs Modernized dialog box design consistent with Windows 95 98 NT New radio button and drop down list input features Sizable main window for better screen display and integration with other running programs New Toolbar buttons for common functions File name and save status displayed in main window caption Help strings for menu options PREPASSR_ H 271 Reference Dynamic title display during batch control file execution New accelerator keys shortcuts for common menu selections New File Close menu option Sizable File Open dialog Proportional scroll button for viewing output Other useful and unique features carried over from the previous Windows interface for TEAPAC include Visual Mode of input that shows graphically what inputs are needed Optional Manual Mode of input for blazing fast input by power users Context sensitive link to Help file for all Visual Mode inputs Complete fully in
65. the APPLICATION menu selection so that the Summary of Parameter Values report can be produced from the same menu selection as other application specific commands An entry selection to set the TITLES commands has also been added to the Special Menu so that the report headings can be set in the Special Menu without the need to return to the Program Control Menu Improved Demo Support The demonstration period has been increased to 60 minutes for demonstration copies of TEAPAC programs and a new Student Demonstration version with a demonstration period of 240 minutes has been established Special arrangements with Strong Concepts must be made for such a Student Demonstration version Minor Annoying Bugs Fixed An apparent intermittent problem when LOADing control files directly from the DOS command line has been corrected Support for screens which are longer than the normal 25 lines has been improved A problem which evolves when the ESCape key is pressed to terminate the display of error messages has been corrected PREPASSR V1 L1 3_05MAR91 gt Improved Phase SEQUENCE Coding for PASSER Input The decoding of the TEAPAC phase sequence codes and re coding for the inputs required by PASSER has been substantially improved so that the phasing used in PASSER is more representative of the TEAPAC phasing which is expected This is primarily in cases where one left turn is unprotected leaving the opposite left turn as an independent lead phase
66. the DATA request for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the PATHDISTRIBUTION command TPC71 ERROR BUFFER SIZE EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED Programs which perform substantial built in sorting functions may encounter files whose contents require too much buffer space to be sorted Within a TEAPAC program it is difficult to correct this situation Action Attempt to reduce the amount of information being sorted or use a system program to sort the file external to the TEAPAC program TPC72 ERROR SCRATCH FILE LIMITS EXCEEDED SORT ABORTED Programs which perform substantial built in sorting functions may encounter files whose contents require too much scratch file space to be sorted Within a TEAPAC program it is difficult to correct this situation Action Attempt to reduce the amount of information you are trying to sort or use a system program to sort the file external to the TEAPAC program TPC81 ERROR A higher Usage Level License is needed to use this command Upgrade license A command or action request has been made for a function which is not supported by the Usage Level which has been licensed For example a design optimization function of Usage Level 2 may have been requested while using a program licensed only for Usage Level 1 which does not optimize Also the limits of program may have been exceeded for the Usage Level licensed as in trying to use 25 intersections when the li
67. the intersections from the typical rectangular directions then connect these stubs with a new link then move the dummy nodes at the ends of the original stubs which have now become bend nodes and or add additional bend nodes to create the desired link appearance If you have received this error message for a node which is connected with a diagonal or curved link these requirements have probably not been met and the easiest way to correct the situation is probably to delete any bend nodes on the link and then re create the connection with the instructions above PPS16 WARNING Code X error detected during IMPORT see App E Check results carefully Several possible and typical errors which may be encountered when IMPORTing data from PASSER II output files are identified as listed below 0 File read error usually due to a bad diskette or hard disk no import is performed Action Determine and correct the cause of the bad disk 2 Pin settings not found in PASSER output file no import is performed Action Make sure that the run being made generates the Pin Settings output This error may also occur if a PASSER error has occurred so no PASSER results exist view the results to see if this is so 3 Node number in import file is not in the node list import is aborted Action Make sure that the NODELIST contains all of the intersections which are found in the PASSER output otherwise PREPASSR cannot IMPORT the results to the proper int
68. to prevent an error in the TRANSYT and PASSER runs PREPASSR B 113 Reference MESSAGES MESSAGES MESSAGES lt Level of Messages gt Defaults 3 Menus Groups INFO The purpose of this command is to display messages concerning changes made to the program since the last printing of the tutorial reference manual lt Level of Messagess gt is the level of detail desired for the update messages and can be any integer from 0 to 3 as described below 0 display only the current version level of the program 1 display a summary of changes made in the last revision of the program 2 display detailed discussions of each change made in the last revision of the program 3 display detailed discussions of all recent revisions to the program default Notes The Help RecentChanges menu uses message level 3 by default The Manual Mode must be used for any of the other options Messages concerning changes bugs fixes etc in the program will be displayed For option 3 the version level number and date of each revision of the program will be displayed at the start of each message listing For this option different version levels of the program are listed in reverse chronological order with the most current version first All messages for versions of the program after the version shown on the title page of the tutorial reference manual should be printed and inserted in Appendix H of the manual as addenda to the manual These changes wi
69. to the Version 6 release when it is made official These enhancements are described below gt Output and Edit Window Management Changes The output window has been vastly enhanced with a number of important new features which the user will find helpful These are 1 The output window can be left open to accept additional PREPASSR_ H 261 Reference subsequent output in situations where having all the output together in one place will make its assessment easier 2 The maximum size of output held in the output window has been increased from a nominal amount to a virtually unlimited amount limited only by available memory 3 Toolbar buttons and status bar tool tip help has been added for all output window menu items 4 The output generated by long calculations or multi intersection computations can be viewed progressively in the output window as they are generated rather than needing to wait until they are all completed 5 In control files the HEADING 1 command can be used to force a display of results generated so far 6 The output window is sizable and moveable and the size and location is remembered throughout the remainder of the session Most of these changes apply to the Edit window as well gt Moveable Dialogs Location Remembered All dialog boxes and message boxes are now moveable to any location on the screen and the location is remembered for future dialogs throughout the remainder of the session This allows for custom orga
70. turn overlaps are to be handled for each approach of the current intersection LEADLAGS 2 lt Lead Lag Phasing gt Enter the order of the phases particularly in multiphase operation of the current intersection CYCLES lt Minimum Cycle gt lt Maximum Cycle gt lt Cycle Increment gt Enter the cycle length for the current intersection to be used for PASSER s simulation or optimization as well as a time space plot or timing diagram as well as a possible cycle optimization range GREENTIMES 6 lt Phase Green Time gt Enter the duration of green for each of the phases of a specified phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection YELLOWTIMES 6 lt Phase Yellow Time gt Enter the clearance interval at the end of each phase of a phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection OFFSET lt Offset gt lt Phase Number gt Enter the coordinated offset for a phase of the phase sequence at the current intersection PHASEMOVEMENTS lt Phase Number gt lt List of Movements gt Enter the movements permitted during each phase for a non standard phasing at the current intersection Commands to Enter Additional Intersection Data The following are commands which can be used to describe each intersection being analyzed but whose data values are not used by PREPASSR Their inclusion in the program is to provide seamless data file compatibility with the SIGNAL2000 prog
71. user should note however that the default lost time used previously for LOSTTIMES was 3 seconds so a slight difference in lost time modeling will occur gt Allowable Limits Increased for Coordinate Entries via NODELOCATION Coordinate values entered via the NODELOCATION entry can now have a range of plus or minus 2 147 483 647 instead of the prior limited range of 9999 to 32 768 This greatly increases the flexibility and ease with which coordinate values can be derived and used although this information is not used by PREPASSR gt New Features for Export Auto Host Definition and Launching The Options Setup dialog now allows the name of the Host executable file to be added at the end of the Host path in the event that this executable name is different than used by default This is possible when Exporting to releases of PASSER earlier than the most recent version supported by PREPASSR The dialog also displays the 64 char limit for path file names which must be observed When the AUTO option of Export is executed the program will now first look for the designated Host program either the default or specified name and issue a message if it is not found cancelling the Export Also some systems may have experienced problems returning to PREPASSR_ H 264 Reference PREPASSR after Export AUTO due to a random loss of focus problem which could occaissionally occur this has been corrected gt Other Export Auto Enhancements Before Expor
72. using old SITE data files which were created before the PATHASSIGNMENT command was available lt Type gt may not exceed the limit previously set with the SITESIZE command and lt Intersection gt must represent a node included in the NODELIST command Movement numbers begin with the north leg right turn as movement number 1 and proceed clockwise around the intersection to movement number 12 PREPASSR B 70 Reference ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT Multiple pairs of movement numbers and their associated assignment factors may be entered on one ASSIGNMENT command They should be entered one after the other at the end of the ASSIGNMENT command PREPASSR B 71 Reference BASE BASE BASE lt Generation Base gt lt X Y Coord LL gt lt X Y Coord UR gt Defaults 0 00 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the base development size for generating trips as it relates to the generation rates used for the development lt Generation Base gt is the base development size to which the traffic generation rates are applied and can be any integer from 9999 to 32767 Its default value is 0 lt X Y Coord LL gt are the X and Y coordinates of the lower left southwest corner of the site for display in the schematic diagram and can be any common coordinate system value as an integer from 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 Its default value is 0 0 lt X Y Coord UR gt are the X and Y coordinates of the
73. was achieved while in the second diagram there is a definite band of progression While the example problem is over simplified it does demonstrate that PREPASSR s interactive analysis and design techniques allow many conditions to be tested quickly and efficiently In addition printed reports can be produced to document the analysis and analysis conditions can be saved at any time as illustrated below At this point of the analysis we may feel we have an adequate solution to the problem and wish to SAVE the data values which created the final results for future use The typical Save SaveAs options of the File menu are normally used but the DATAFILES commands of the File menu PREPASSR 25 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE also offer these capabilities by first defining the disk FILE name to be used for storage then issuing the SAVE command to save the parameter values Datafiles FILES SAMPLENN Datafiles SAVE 11 Note that the file name SAMPLE has a N switch added to its name the first time it is used to indicate to PREPASSR that you expect to create a new file This is not required but saves the steps of responding to the new file creation query When used an error will be produced only if this file name already exists Other such switches and file name conventions are discussed in Appendix G as they relate to your operating system Also note that as many as five files can be named at any given time
74. with the Edit menu After the network is entered the data for each intersection can be entered by right clicking the intersection and using the same menus which appear in the Edit menu described above A network is created with the mouse by first clicking anywhere in the main window to reveal a grid with 500 spacing then clicking the Create Link button in the Edit Mode section of the left PREPASSR 12 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION side toolbar In the Create Link mode simply click down at the location of the beginning of the link street drag the mouse to the position of the end of the link and release the mouse A link terminated by two dummy nodes will be shown Any time a created link crosses an existing link a real analysis intersection is created and numbered in increasing order starting from 1 Dummy nodes are numbered in decreasing order starting from 999 In the Select Intersection mode the intersection which is clicked becomes the current intersection for which any subsequent entered data will belong or results may pertain The current intersection can also be selected with the Intersection dialog of the Edit menu or the Select Intersection toolbar button under the main menu or with the Home key combination When dragging the mouse the status bar at the bottom of the window shows the coordinate location of the mouse cursor as well as the distance of the cursor from the current intersection Usin
75. 10 active command 35 ACTUATIONS 39 A 57 B 65 B 68 addenda H 233 adjusted volume B 136 Adjustment Factors Delay 42 B 83 Satflow 42 B 90 Stops 42 B 125 ADTFACTOR 43 A 57 B 66 advanced procedures 47 all red clearance B 116 B 148 All red time B 178 Analysis 24 ANALYSIS METHODS C 181 analysis period 37 B 158 Analysis Procedures 30 Basic 30 Special 30 ANALYZE B 66 B 80 B 145 B 148 annual growth factor B 175 APPLABELS 38 A 56 B 67 ARRIVALTYPES 41 A 57 B 68 ASK 12 14 23 44 A 53 A 56 B 69 B 82 B 163 F 217 ASSIGNMENT A 57 asterisk 11 Authors iii automatic link to PASSER B 88 automatic link to PASSER II 35 B BASE A 57 B 93 BIKEVOLUMES 41 A 57 B 73 bitmap scale 13 buffer space F 223 BUSVOLUMES 41 A 57 B 74 303 Index C CALCULATE 46 A 56 B 75 Calculation of Volumes C 181 calibrate bitmap 13 calibration B 90 capacity analysis 49 CFG file B 91 G 227 changes made to the program 44 B 114 clearance interval 37 40 B 178 clearance times required 41 B 148 clipboard G 231 Close button 10 COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS ABBREVIATED A 53 DETAILED B 61 Command Structure A 54 Commands to Access Data Stored In Files 45 Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data 44 Commands to Control Operation Of Program 45 Commands to Control Program Execution 46 Commands to Enter Additional Intersection Data 40 Commands to Enter Basic Data 35 Commands to E
76. 100 when link numbers are created and PRETRANSYT cannot create link numbers greater than 32767 due to internal arithmetic limitations When using Release 6 or higher of TRANSYT7F and modeling permitted left turns either with exclusive permissive phases or permitted only phases TRANSYT requires that the permitted movement link number be input as a negative number Since only five columns are allowed for the input the negative sign leaves four columns for the link number thus node numbers less than 100 are recommended 99 is the limit for TRANSYT Release 9 e In Usage Level 1 the NODELIST can only be 12 nodes in length In Usage Level 2 versions the NODELIST can be as many as 100 nodes in length Usage Level 3 allows up to 500 nodes When using a Usage Level 2 or 3 version note that PASSER will only accept input for up to 20 nodes at a time in a single run If more than 20 intersections are included in the NODELIST only the first 20 will be exported to PASSER unless the SUBSYSTEM command is used to select a different group to export When in the Visual Mode or using the ASK command to enter the NODELIST the actual list can be enetered only once After this entry the list must be modified one intersection at a time with the edit buttons of the NODELIST dialog When entering the NODELIST this first time type no more than 80 characters per entry using ampersands amp to continue long entries to subsequent entry lines PREPASSR B 122 Re
77. 12 Interface The Ver 5 12 TEAPAC interface found in most TEAPAC programs has been further refined with additional features to aid in the analysis process These include 1 saving the current PREPASSR_ H 256 Reference intersection in the data file so that when the file is re opened the same current intersection is re established rather than always being pointed to the last intersection in the Nodelist 2 providing the ability to scale a bitmap background for a single intersection analysis by right clicking on a point 100 feet from the intersection and 3 providing a Clear button on the Subsytem and Route dialogs so that the lists displayed can be removed with a single click Build 10 31DEC03 gt Imported Timings Treated Properly if Input Timings were Decimal Percentages Imported timings from PASSER are always displayed in units of seconds If prior user input timings were decimal percentages sec sec the imported timings in seconds would not be treated properly except for a Save and subsequent Open action Now the internal flags are set properly to indicate that the imported timingsare in seconds instead of the original secconds second so any subsequent analyses will be performed correctly gt Default Path Set to C PASSER II 02 In the event that a PREPASSR configuration file is not present WPREPASS CFG the default path used for PASSER II has been changed from C P290 to C PASSER I 02 gt Pending New PRENOSTOP Program A
78. 250 vph In summary analysis volumes are computed for performance assessments and design functions as the combination of entered volumes VOLUMES growth factors VOLFACTORS and additive volumes VOLADDITIONALS and adjusted by peak hour factors PEAKHOURFACTORS VOLUMES and PEAKHOURFACTORS and TRUCKPERCENTS can be determined directly by TURNS and WARRANTS from traffic count data including the effect of growth or seasonal factors VOLFACTORS and ignoring any entered VOLUMES PEAKHOURFACTORS or VOLADDITIONALS or TRUCKPERCENTS YVOLADDITIONALS can be determined directly by SITE for development scenarios including the effect of growth factors WOLFACTORS on any entered VOLUMES and ignoring any entered VOLADDITIONALS This process makes for a completely seamless integration of all of the TEAPAC programs with respect to consistent traffic volumes used by each program PREPASSR_ C 183 Reference APPENDIX D Report Descriptions and Examples Appendix D Topics This appendix describes each of the major output reports which can be produced by the PREPASSR program The reports are discussed followed by an example output in the order indicated in Table D 1 The table includes the report title and the primary command associated with the contents of the report The report title and primary command for each report appear at the top of each page of the appendix for easy reference Each of the outputs presented in this appendix w
79. 42 B 134 lt Description gt 36 38 B 104 lt Design Hour Volume gt 36 38 B 176 lt Destination gt 46 B 94 lt Direction gt 36 37 38 B 110 B 118 lt Display Output gt 35 B 88 B 102 lt Distance gt 36 38 B 118 lt End Gain Time gt 39 B 86 lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Time gt 42 B 138 lt File Name gt 45 B 91 lt File Number gt 45 B 111 B 155 lt File AUTO STACK gt 35 B 88 lt File AUTO gt 35 B 102 lt First Title Line gt 45 B 144 lt First Val gt 46 B 147 lt Grade of Approach gt 41 B 95 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt 41 B 101 lt Increment gt 46 B 147 lt Initial Queue Size gt 41 B 103 lt Input Output Echo Condition gt 45 B 85 lt Lane Group Type gt 39 B 98 lt Lane Group Width gt 36 38 B 177 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt 41 B 172 lt Last Line gt 45 B 105 lt Last Val gt 46 B 147 lt Lead Lag Phasing gt 40 B 107 lt Level of Messages gt 44 B 114 lt Line Number gt 45 B 111 B 155 lt Lines Pg gt 45 B 105 lt Link Numbering Method gt 37 B 158 lt List of Artery Nodes gt 37 B 153 lt List of Commands gt 44 45 B 69 B 82 B 100 B 149 B 155 lt List of Movements gt 40 B 142 lt List of Nodes gt 35 B 143 B 168 lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt B 157 lt List of Priority Movement Numbers gt 40 B 87 lt LOAD Type gt 45 B 111 lt Location gt 40 B 115 lt Manual Distance gt
80. 4567890123456789012345678901234567890 Master amp System Int 13 Offset to Start of lst Art Phase 1 1 39 0 0 BEGIN Master amp System Int 13 Offset to Start of lst Art Phase 1 1 39 0 0 BEGIN PREPASSR _ D 194 Reference PREPASSR TEAPAC Time Space Diagram for Cycle XX sec The Time Space Diagram report is generated using the PLOT command A time space diagram can be plotted for the offsets obtained from the PASSER program or from any offsets input into PREPASSR A time space diagram is useful in visualizing the progression within a system The terminology of Left Right Top and Bottom in the discussion below assumes that the time space diagram is viewed with the distance axis running horizontally and such that the title headings are on the left hand side of the page Time Space Diagram for Cycle XX sec The title line of the report displays the cycle length in seconds for which the time space diagram is plotted This is the overall system cycle length Vertical Axis The vertical axis of the diagram represents time in percent of the system cycle length The axis shows three complete cycles 100 200 amp 300 with each vertical increment equal to five 5 percent of the cycle The specified cycle length can be used to convert these axes to seconds for calculating the actual travel time between intersections Horizontal Axis The horizontal axis of the diagram represents distance in feet measured cumulatively from the
81. 65 0 78 3 83 3 16 7 PREPASSR D 198 Reference 13 PREPASSR TI BAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Main amp Pershing Timings for Intersection Timings for Intersection Sq 12 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 LG 2 J lt k ok kD lt kKKK lt KKKK v KKK l v North KERES KkKKK VvV Cyc 60 Green Clear Green Clear Green Clear Phs sec 19 9 20 20 1 20 20 0 20 S 332 U 33 3325 0 334 33 3 3 Green Clear Green Clear Green Clear Int sec 16 9 30 Tt 3 0 17 0 3 0 28 2 5 0 28 5 S20 28 23 5 0 Cum sec 0 0 16 9 19 9 37 0 40 0 57 0 0 0 28 2 33 2 61 7 66 7 95 0 Off s er 19 1 3670 39 0 56 1 59 1 esd 31 8 60 0 65 0 93 5 98 5 26 8 PREPASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Water amp Pershing Sq 13 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 LG 3 KkKKK ZIN lt kxkxx xx N a KKKK North ck ok KD KK KKD KKKKD Cyc 60 Green Clear Greent tClear Green Clear Phs sec 14 9 15 23 1 23 22 0 22 24 8 25 38 5 38 36 7 37 Green Clear Green Clear Green Clear Int sec 11 9 3 0 20 1 3 0 19 0 3 0 19 8 50 33225 DO ole 5 0 Cum sec O20 LES 24 9 35 0 38 0 5720 O20 D958 242583 S823 63 3 95 20 Off sec 30 7 42 6 45 6 Sel 8 7 27 7 51 2 71 0 76 0 9 5 14 5 46 2 PREPASSR D 199 Reference 14 15 PREPASSR TEAPAC PASSER II Imported Data The PASSER 2 Imported Data report is generated when the IMPORT command is used to automatical
82. 96 0 0 386 620 15 Water 0 0 0 466 780 386 135 0 573 Table 2 2 Saturation Flow Rates for Example Problem Approach From North From East From South From West Intersectn RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT 13 Monroe 0 2771 1433 0 2337 1433 0 2525 1448 14 Main O 3041 2606 0 0 O 1448 2634 0 15 Water 1359 3387 O 1345 4402 0 O 2486 1300 PREPASSR 16 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE 15 Water Street X Y 2656 0 A l 530 feet 35 mph 14 Main Street X Y 2125 0 assume 12 ft lanes 13 Monroe Street X Y 0 0 Pershing Figure 2 1 Intersection Geometrics for Example Problem PREPASSR 17 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE System Cycle 60 sec Int 13 Monroe amp Pershing Seq Code 12 Green Yellow sec Int 14 Main amp Pershing Seq Code 12 Green Yellow sec Int 15 Water amp Pershing Seq Code 13 Signal Phasings and Timings for Example Problem Data Entry If you are not currently running the PREPASSR program do so according to the way it was installed on your computer see Appendix G The program will display the program name along with important licensing information As described in Chapter 1 two input modes can be used to manipulate the program In the examples below the Edit menu line to select in the Visual Mode is shown in square brackets
83. AC NO Full Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter simulation control parameters including the length of the analysis period for all intersections under study lt Steps Cycle gt is the number of increments each cycle will be divided into in the TRANSYT simulation and can be any value from 300 to 300 The absolute value of the input is the number of steps per cycle If the value is negative a step wise simulation is performed otherwise a standard link wise simulation is performed Its default value is 300 It is used by PRETRANSYT only lt Analysis Period gt is the length of the analysis period in minutes and can be any integer from 999 to 9999 Its default value is 15 It may also be entered as a negative number whose positive value is the number of cycle lengths which define the analysis period lt Stop Penalty gt is the stop penalty to be used in calculating the performance index of the TRANSYT simulation and can be any value from 1 to 9999 Its default value is 1 to minimize fuel consumption It is used by PRETRANSYT only lt Link Numbering Methods is a keyword which describes which link numbering method will be used when creating links for TRANSYT and can be any of the three following keywords TEAPAC links will be numbered using TEAPAC s normal numbering scheme counting clockwise around the intersection starting with the right turn on the north approach default TRANSYT links will
84. AC program by selecting the Printers folder of My Computer selecting the desired printer and clicking the Set_As_Default option in the File menu Disk File Output TEAPAC programs have several options for directing program output to disk files In the Results window the File SaveAsText menu option can be used to copy the contents of the Results window to a file named and located by the subsequent dialog entry This file is an ASCII text file which can be opened by any text editor Its default extension is txt The Edit CopyAll menu option will copy the entire contents of the Results window to the Windows clipboard which can then be used by any other Windows program such as a text editor or word processor The Edit Copy menu option will copy to the clipboard only that part of the Results window which has been selected by dragging the mouse cursor over a small portion of visible text In the event that too much output has been generated to be displayed by the Results window as in the case of output from a control file the SaveAsText file will contain all of the output even though it cannot all be displayed Some printer drivers and or Windows printing systems may also offer other alternative ways to direct printed output to a file although this will normally not result in a strict ASCII text file like the options above Installing TEAPAC Programs Installation of TEAPAC programs follow the normal Windows practice of running the Setup exe program f
85. APAC program the desired executable name can be added at the end of the path in the Options Setup dialog or the CFG file directly All TEAPAC programs are designed to co exist in the same installed folder and work best together when installed this way If a TEAPAC program is to be re located to a different folder on a system it is highly advised that it first be un installed using the Add Remove Programs dialog in the Control Panel then re installed to the desired location Network installations must take care that all files and directories used have correct read write privileges for the users TEAPAC G 232 Reference APPENDIX H Addenda Appendix H Topics Appendix H provides a location for recent release notes and addenda which may be published after the official release of this documentation This appendix can also be used to store printed copies of new release notes for updated versions of the software as produced by the Help RecentChanges menu or the MESSAGES command for off line reference Appendix H Topics Appendix H Introduction Version Notes Ver 2 81 Ver 2 80 Ver 2 71 Ver 2 70 Ver 2 61 Ver 2 60 Ver 2 02 Ver 2 00 Ver 1 61 Ver 1 60 Ver 1 54 PREPASSR H 233 Reference PREPASSR Ver 2 81 27MAY08 Build 11 27MAY08 gt Dialogs identify need for consistency between Yellowtimes amp ReqClearances The dialogs for GreenTimes and YellowTimes have been updated with additional text to clarify the importance o
86. ASSR D 189 Reference PREPASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Summary of Parameter Values SYSTEM PARAMETERS Simulation Period of 15 minutes 300 Steps per TRANSYT Cycle Use actuated model No Default link assignment method Full Optimization Type Spl o0ff List of Intersection s in Network Master Node is 13 13 14 15 List of Intersection s in Defined Routes Route 1 13 14 15 INTERSECTION 13 MacArthur amp Pershing MOVEM C NT DATA North East South West Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Demand Volumes 122 216 80 79 722 187 212 310 198 139 660 134 Peak Hr Factors 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 Truck Percents 2r 0u 230 2252 0 26 0 230 22 20 2 0 230 2 2 0 220 Be0 gt lt 22 0 Rt Turn on Red 0 0 0 0 Approach Widths 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 24 0 12 0 0 0 2420 123 0 0 0 24 0 12 0 Number of Lanes 0 2 0 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 Lane Group Type Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Saturation Flow 0 2410 0 0 2771 1433 0 2337 1433 0 2525 1448 Minimum Green 52 00 52 05 30 R20 D0 3 30 9 08 Da0 2570 920 505a Actuated Movmts No No No No No No No No No No No No Startup Lost 20u 20a 23 0 A O 230 23 0 24 0u 2220 23 0 ZAS O 230 2 0 End Gain 2a 0 2210 2520 220 250 20 B20 222 0 gt 23 0 B20 2510 8252 0 Storage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SIGNAL CONTROL Phase 1 2 3 4 5 6 Phasing Ordr 12 No Ld Gree
87. ASSR V1 L4 0 22NOV94 gt New Commands for More Analysis Options Caution Re Increased Save Length Several new commands have been added resulting in a net increase of many new lines of data which are SAVEd in a file This has an important impact on re saving data into files where multiple scenarios have already been SAVEd since each SAVE now takes more lines than previously Such situations require that the original information be LOADed from the original file then updated then SAVEd into a different file stacking the scenarios in the new file as before but with more lines per scenario If you have any questions about this process call Strong Concepts for assistance In addition to saving the new commands identified above a full sized NODELIST and SUBSYSTEM is always saved along with complete PHASEMOVS so that if these options are used before a re SAVE in the future the problem described above will not occur Along a similar line if SAVE is issued without a NODELIST the SYSTEM commands are now saved in the file as opposed to not being saved in the past gt New ROUTE Command Offers Shortcut Option A new command ROUTE has been implemented which can be used to identify up to eight artery routes The first entry is the route number 1 8 followed by a list of up to 25 nodes which make up the route ROUTE is primarily to define routes for TRANSYT from PRETRANSYT for route summaries and PROS optimization but several applications in
88. ATA DELAYFACTORS DESCRIPTION ECHO ENDGAIN GENERATION GOTO GRADES GREENTIMES GROUPTYPES HEADING HELP IDEALSATFLOWS IMPORT INITIALQUEUE INTERSECTION IODEVICES LANES LEADLAGS LEVELOFSERVICE LINKLIST LOAD MASTERNODE MESSAGES PREPASSR _ B 62 Reference METROAREA MINIMUMS MOVLABELS NETWORK NEWPAGE NEXTLINES NODELIST NODELOCATION NOTE NSTOPFACTORS OFFSET OPTIMIZE OUTPUT OVERLAPS PARKINGSIDES PARKVOLUMES PATHASSIGNMENT PATHDISTRIBUTION PEAKHOURFACTORS PEDLEVELS PEDTIME PERIODS PERMISSIVES PHASEMOVEMENTS PLOT PROJECT QUEUEMODELS REPEAT REQCLEARANCES RESET RETURN RIGHTTURNONREDS ROUND ROUTE SATURATIONFLOWS SAVE SEQUENCES SIMULATION SITESIZE STARTUPLOST STOP STORAGE SUBSYSTEM SUMMARISE TIMINGS PREPASSR B 63 Reference TRUCKCOUNTS TRUCKPERCENTS UPSTREAMVC UTILIZATIONS VEHICLECOUNTS VOLADDITIONALS VOLFACTORS VOLUMES WIDTHS YELLOWTIMES PREPASSR_ B 64 Reference ACTUATIONS ACTUATIONS ACTUATIONS 12 lt Actuated Movement gt Defaults 12 NO Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the type of phase module present actuated or non actuated for each movement of the current int
89. CTORS may also be useful in estimation of special use lane satflows i e dual optional turn lanes see Chapter 5 PREPASSR B 90 Reference FILES FILES FILES 5 lt File Name gt Defaults 5 nul Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to enter the names of the permanent storage file areas where information is to be LOADed and SAVEd lt File Name gt is the name of the file to be used and can be any valid file name see Appendix G Its default value is no defined file Notes FILES can be used so that the program remembers the name of the file to be used by subsequent LOAD and SAVE commands thus avoiding the file name entry for each LOAD and SAVE e The file numbers referenced by the file access commands are determined by the order of the file names in the FILES command For example the third file name specified on the FILES command is designated as file 3 for LOAD and SAVE Each time a new file name is specified by a FILES command the associated next line and last line values of the file are both reset to point to line 1 Appendix G describes details about specifying file names etc for your specific operating system For example new files that don t presently exist may use the N suffix to the file name in order to allow the program to create a new file automatically preventing accidental use of pre existing files thought not to exist If the N suffix switch described above is not use
90. D 197 Phasing Sequence Codes 7 Phasing SEQUENCE Designations E 207 platoon ratio B 68 PLOT 24 30 31 35 A 56 B 143 B 153 D 195 E 204 PPSO1 ERROR E 202 PPS02 WARNING E 202 PPS03 WARNING E 202 PPS04 ERROR E 202 PPSOS5 ERROR E 203 PPS06 WARNING E 203 PPS07 ERROR E 203 PPS08 ERROR E 203 PPS09 ERROR E 203 PPS10 ERROR E 204 PPS11 ERROR E 204 PPS 12 ERROR E 204 PPS13 ERROR E 204 PPS 14 ERROR E 204 PPS15 ERROR E 204 PPS16 WARNING E 205 PPS17 ERROR E 205 PPS20 ERROR E 206 precision 42 B 152 PRENETSIM ii 49 B 123 PRENOSTOP 49 PREPASSR ii 1 15 49 PREPASSR CFG B 88 PRESYNCHRO ii 49 pretimed signal B 65 PRETRANSYT ii 49 PRETSPPD ii 49 Printer Control G 230 Printing and Saving PASSER Results 31 priority movements B 87 PROCESS B 111 PROJECT 45 A 56 B 144 B 155 projected volumes 50 PROPRIETARY NOTICE iv 306 Index PROS B 127 Q queue spacing B 145 QUEUECALCS B 80 B 145 QUEUEMODELS 37 B 145 QUIT 26 B 163 R range of values F 216 recent changes H 233 rectangular network B 119 Reference Manual 2 relative location in the system network 36 38 B 118 release notes H 233 REPEAT 46 A 56 B 94 B 147 F 218 F 219 REPORTS B 66 REQCLEARANCES 41 A 57 B 148 RESET 44 A 53 A 56 B 104 B 112 B 120 B 149 B 155 F 217 RESULTS Dialogs 35 Results window G 230 R
91. D ENTRIES Appendix C ANALYSIS METHODS AND FORMULATIONS Appendix D REPORT DESCRIPTIONS AND EXAMPLES Appendix E ERROR MESSAGES AND TROUBLE SPOTS Appendix F TEAPAC SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES Appendix G OPERATING SYSTEM MESSAGES AND INSTALLATION NOTES Appendix H ADDENDA Index PREPASSR v Manual LIST OF TABLES 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 4 A 1 A 2 A 3 D 1 F 1 G 1 Organization of the PREPASSR Tutorial Definition of Terms Demand Volumes for Example Problem Saturation Flow Rates for Example Problem Organization of Command Discussions Group Name Structure Cross Reference of Commands and Groups All Commands Listed Alphabetically Report Descriptions and Examples Summary of TEAPAC System Error Messages Summary of Operating System Messages and Installation Notes LIST OF FIGURES 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 Intersection Approach and Turning Movement Conventions Phasing Codes for PREPASSR Intersection Geometrics for Example Problem Signal Phasings and Timings for Example Problem PREPASSR vi Manual CHAPTER 1 Introduction Chapter 1 Topics Strong Concepts develops and maintains a package of programs which provides quick accurate and consistent analysis and design of traffic and transportation related engineering problems These programs are known collectively as TEAPAC an acronym for Traffic Engineering Application PACkage Mor
92. Dialogs action commands for PREPASSR found in the Results menu which are specific to the act of solving the traffic problem addressed by the PREPASSR program and used to control the type of analysis performed PARAMETERS Dialogs entry commands for PREPASSR found in the Edit menu which are specific to the process of entering data for the traffic problem to be solved by the PREPASSR program Common TEAPAC Dialogs entry and action commands of the PREPASSR program which are common to and used by all of the TEAPAC programs These are found primarily in the Datafiles and Control sub menus of the File menu Table 4 1 describes the detailed organization of how each of the PREPASSR commands is presented in this chapter according to these categories PREPASSR 33 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Table 4 1 Organization of Command Discussions RESULTS Dialogs PARAMETERS Dialogs Commands to Enter Basic Data Commands to Enter System Data Commands to Enter Intersection Data Commands to Enter Additional Intersection Data Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data Common TEAPAC Dialogs Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data Commands to Label Output Commands to Control Operation of Program Commands to Access Data Stored in Files Commands to Control Program Execution For each command discussed the first line of a command header provides the basic usage format of the command dia
93. ECTION description field will be omitted from the TIMINGS results along with unsignalized intersections which are already omitted Build 50 O83MAY03 gt Support for New PASSER II 02 Program PREPASSR H 258 Reference PREPASSR Version 2 is an upgrade that supports the new PASSER II 02 Windows version of PASSER II This includes the new executable file names and launching syntax default installation folders and new input and output file name extensions and locations 202 is now the default version of PASSER to Export to as found in the Edit System Output menu When opening old data files which have 290 or 287 in this field for the older verions of PASSER II the value must be changed to 202 in order to let PREPASSR know of the user s intent to Export to PASSER II 02 When Export AUTO is used PASSER II 02 will be launched automatically with the PASSER data file created PASSER II 02 will provide a warning that the data file format and extension will be changed from DAT to P2I press the Yes button followed by advice about details regarding the computations of Satflows press the Ok button When PASSER II 02 opens press the Run button to generate the PASSER results Results from PASSER II 02 optimizations can be imported back into PREPASSR as before if the PASSER I 02 run was originally generated by PREPASSR This includes whatever variables were allowed to be optimized according to the Optimize dialog selection in PREPASSR includin
94. ETURN 46 A 56 B 111 B 112 B 121 B 150 B 156 F 214 right turn overlaps 40 B 130 RIGHTTURNONREDS 38 A 56 B 151 ROUND A 57 ROUTE 37 A 56 B 143 B 153 B 166 B 168 Run Time Error Codes G 226 S SATURATIONFLOWS 20 36 39 49 A 57 B 154 E 204 SAVE 12 25 45 A 53 A 56 B 85 B 91 B 111 B 155 F 212 F 213 F 217 G 228 G 230 SCENARIO 12 scramble phase 42 B 138 scratch file space F 223 seasonal variations B 175 semiactuated signal B 65 SEQUENCES 20 36 39 A 57 B 97 B 142 B 157 B 178 E 203 E 207 F 222 Setup exe G 231 SHARE B 111 Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs 47 Sharing Data with SIGNAL2000 PRENOSTOP PRETRANSYT PRETSPPD PRESYNCHRO and PRENETSIM 49 SIGNAL2000 ii 49 B 81 B 86 B 162 SIGNAL2000 compatibility 40 SIGNAL2000 A 54 sign controlled lanes 39 B 98 SIMULATION 31 37 A 56 B 158 PREPASSR simulation control parameters 37 B 158 simulation order 38 B 110 SITE 50 B 123 SITE compatibility 42 SITESIZE 42 A 57 B 70 B 134 B 160 size of the output 45 B 105 Special PREPASSR Group Names A 58 speed slope lines B 143 STARTUPLOST 39 A 57 B 86 B 162 STOP 26 46 A 56 B 163 F 218 stop sign controlled lane group B 98 STORAGE 36 39 A 57 B 164 subset of the NODELIST 37 B 165 SUBST command G 227 SUBSYSTEM 31 37 A 56 B 104 B 118 B 122 B 123 B 153 B 165 E 204 subsystem boundari
95. EXPORT single input data file This function is performed by using STACK for lt File AUTO STACK gt on the EXPORT command after having previously used a specified file name for an EXPORT STACK may not be abbreviated nor may any file name used start with the five letters S T A C K Further user edits of the STACKed file will normally be required before a multiple run of PASSER can be made If no NODELIST exists no EXPORT is attempted This option can be used to establish the name of the export file for subsequent EXPORT STACK commands particularly if they are in a REPEAT loop where each EXPORT is to be stacked one after the other PREPASSR B 89 Reference FACTORS FACTORS FACTORS 12 lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter satflow adjustment factors for each movement of the current intersection to adjust 2000 Highway Capacity Manual satflow computations for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt is an adjustment factor which when multiplied by satflows obtained from the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual produce satflows that more accurately reflect conditions known to exist in the study area It can be any number from 0 01 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes e FACTORS are useful in adjusting 2000 Highway Capacity Manual computations to match surveyed satflows i e calibration FA
96. Edit Menu and its sub menus Data may also be loaded from a disk data file created earlier with the save options of the File menu by using the Open option of the File menu If a multi scenario structure has been created in the file by the SCENARIO program then a specific scenario case can be retrieved with the GetScenarioCase option of the File menu TEAPAC programs contain default values for many of the parameter values however there are some parameter values which must be entered for each analysis to adequately define the problem The dialog box display shows all of these default values Data entry may also be accomplished in the Manual Mode particularly when a known and small group of command keywords are to be used In this mode the HELP command is useful in identifying those commands which can be used to enter these necessary parameter values The commands can be entered directly with their parameters or the ASK command can be used to generate a custom input editing session with a specified sequence of dialog boxes Normal View or a specified list of input lines Tabular View Before entering the detailed data above the analysis network can be created on screen in the main window with the use of the mouse in most TEAPAC programs not in NOSTOP or TUTOR Creating the network in this manner replaces the need to do it using the Edit menu as above and the network data can be edited further by additional mouse actions in the main window or
97. Enter the type of count data which is to be supplied to the program at the current intersection and to provide a description of the count PERIODS lt Count Interval gt 5 lt lt Start Time gt lt Stop Time gt gt Enter the count interval and the beginning and ending times for each count period for which subsequent data will be entered at the current intersection CONDITIONS lt Major Direction gt lt N S Lanes gt lt E W Lanes gt lt High Speed gt lt Low Population gt lt Progression Impact gt lt Remedial Actions Failed gt lt Accidents for Signal gt lt Stop Sign Delay gt lt Accidents for Stop gt lt Minor Street Delay gt Enter intersection conditions which affect the conduct of a Warrant Analysis at the current intersection ADTFACTOR lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumes gt Enter a factor which will be used to estimate 24 hour volumes from partial day s counts at the current intersection VEHICLECOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Enter the count of vehicles for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection TRUCKCOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Enter the count of trucks for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection PREPASSR 43 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Common TEAPAC Dialogs There are 22 command dialogs common to all TEAPAC programs These commands control interactive functi
98. H will not use the through lane width Exclusive turn lane WIDTH is designated by putting a non zero WIDTH in a turn lane group slot Another way of looking at this is how VOLUMES are assigned to lane group WIDTHS Through lane VOLUMES can only be assigned to through lane group WIDTHS Turning PREPASSR E 206 Reference VOLUMES will be assigned entirely to exclusive turn lane group WIDTHS if they exist otherwise they will be assigned only the adjacent through lane group WIDTH A common occurrence of this dilemma is on the stem of a T intersection where no throughs exist but all turns are made out of a single lane approach In this case the only option is to declare the single lane as a through lane from which all turns will be made If more than one lane exists each can be assigned to the appropriate turns as they are used Phasing SEQUENCE Designations Any time a sequence code is required by the program a two digit number must be entered The first digit represents the phasing type for the north south movements as defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 while the second digit represents the phasing type for the east west movements This is a standard convention used by all TEAPAC programs which require the specification of a signal phasing It only requires remembering the eight distinct phasing types shown in Figure 1 2 all of which follow a logical progression of phasing treatment for left turns By learning these eight types a combi
99. IMES dialog which allows the user to select the style of entry or view either By Phase which is the traditional HCM method or By Movement which is more similar to the way timings are used on NEMA and other dual ring controllers If any timings are present they will be converted to the other format at the same time including YELLOWTIMES if the GREENTIMES dialog is displayed and vice versa When timings are Converted the conversion will also include reviewing the allowed SEQUENCES list and moving the appropriate sequence code to the top of the list according to the timings present It is important to make sure that YELLOWTIMES and REQCLEARANCES entries are always kept consistent with each other especially when converting Timings by Phase to Timings by Movement and when exporting to third party ring based software e Allowing timings By Movement makes it apparent that for certain overlap phases phase lengths which are apparently negative in the By Phase method are in fact perfectly valid timings for dual ring controllers as long as the negative value of the overlap phase greentime does not exceed the yellowtime of that same phase This permits a wider range of timings to be represented by the traditional By Phase HCM methodology e By Movement timings are not allowed when special phasings represented by negative SEQUENCE codes are used PREPASSR B 96 Reference GREENTIMES GREENTIMES If green times are entered
100. IMINGS ER II Imported Data IMPORT Appendix D Topics Appendix D Introduction PREPASSR TEAPAC Summary of Parameter Values PREPASSR TEAPAC PASSER2xx Formatted Input PREPASSR TEAPAC Time Space Diagram for Cycle XX sec PREPASSR TEAPAC Timings for Intersection xx PREPASSR TEAPAC PASSER II Imported Data PREPASSR D 186 Reference PREPASSR TEAPAC Summary of Parameter Values The Summary of Parameter Values report generated using the SUMMARISE command is a compilation of the data required to analyze network progression recognizing all the pertinent information required by the PASSER program It is divided into two report sections the first for system parameters and a section of intersection parameters for each intersection The contents of these two sections are discussed below System Parameters The System Parameters are those parameters which define parameter values for the entire system or network These values are entered only once for the system Simulation Period The length of time in minutes of the simulation period Steps per TRANSYT Cycle The number of incremental steps to be used to simulate the performance during each cycle period This is used by PRETRANSYT only Actuated Model Describes whether PASSER s actuated model will be used for actuated movements Default Link Assignment Method The link assignment method which will be used on any given link where a link
101. ION Chapter 5 discusses advanced techniques for using the PREPASSR program which will improve the efficiency of conducting analyses These techniques require a working familiarity with the basic principles of using both the TEAPAC package and the PREPASSR program as described in Chapters 1 4 Attached to this tutorial are eight appendices A through H which form the PREPASSR Reference Manual Each of these appendices is designed to provide quick answers to questions which may arise during the use of PREPASSR These appendices provide detail on program actions entries methods and formulae used in calculating results program reports error messages operating system conventions and addenda Their contents are each ordered in a manner that is convenient for lookup purposes The introduction at the front of the appendices briefly describes each appendix and how to use it as a reference document An index at the end of the entire document is provided for the combined Tutorial Reference Manual Conventions Due to the interactive nature of the PREPASSR program the tutorial contains sections which provide hands on program instructions When reading these sections it is recommended that each step be executed as shown in the documentation The information described below will help in understanding the conventions and terms used in this example as well as the entire document Definition of Terms Intersection Approach and Movement Data Entry Phas
102. IT may be used in the Manual Mode as an alias command to represent the STOP command It cannot be used in any lt List of Commands gt entries such as with ASK or HELP PREPASSR_ B 163 Reference STORAGE STORAGE STORAGE 12 lt Storage Distance gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the amount of storage distance for queued vehicles for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection lt Storage Distance gt is the distance in feet which can be used to store a queue of vehicles without obstructing vehicles in other lane groups or at other intersections and can be any integer from 0 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes This input has no effect on PREPASSR calculations but appears for compatibility with other TEAPAC programs such as SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM PREPASSR_ B 164 Reference SUBSYSTEM SUBSYSTEM SUBSYSTEM 100 lt Node Number gt Defaults 100 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM EXPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the subset of the NODELIST for which subsequent actions should be taken lt Node Number gt is a unique number assigned to each intersection on INTERSECTION command and can be any integer from 0 to 999 or the negative value of any defined ROUTE number Its default value is 0 Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be
103. L2000 can provide a number of relevant analyses for typical arterial signal timing studies For existing conditions SIGNAL2000 can provide a complete and comprehensive capacity analysis strictly according to the methods of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual HCM When optimizing the signal timings of each signal in an arterial SIGNAL2000 will consider HCM level of service virtually every possible phasing combination for both the major street and the cross street and will completely consider the effects which right turns clearance intervals and minimums have on the best timings Each of these optimized conditions can be SAVEd with SIGNAL2000 and then PREPASSR can be run using all of these results without any re entry of data This virtually eliminates any input at all to PREPASSR using all of the data already entered and optimized from SIGNAL2000 Since the data inputs and file information for SIGNAL2000 PRENOSTOP PREPASSR PRETRANSYT PRETSPPD PRESYNCHRO and PRENETSIM are identical files which are opened and saved with PREPASSR can be opened directly with all the others using the File Open menu allowing the immediate use of the SIGNAL2000 HCM capacity analysis and HCM delay optimization program the NOSTOP bandwidth optimization program the PASSER bandwidth optimization program the TRANSYT simulation optimization program the TSPPD time space platoon progression diagram program the SYNCHRO simulation optimization program and the NETSIM simul
104. LL should be COMMAND When done the EXIT command will return control to the original program This is the DOS SHELL function Improved Error Checking and Status Messages A number of minor improvements have been made in the arena of input error checking and processing following certain types of errors Valid ranges of input have been established for certain commands like GOTO HEADING IODEVICES LOAD NEXTLINES REPEAT and SAVE and no action is taken on these types of active commands if any type of input error is detected Commands with no parameters like SUMMARISE are also verified to make sure no parameters were entered A new status message in the opening screen indicates that a DOS command line file entry is being loaded rather than press any key The error message displays have also been enhanced to indicate if a message is only a warning rather than an error New Meaning for Escape in Program Control Menu When the Program Control Menu is displayed pressing the ESCape key now has the same meaning as pressing Q for Quit That is pressing ESCape now places the cursor on the Quit menu selection in preparation to terminate the program Command Buffer Size Increased to 10 Lines The number of manual mode commands which are remembered has been increased from five to ten These commands can be retrieved by using the up and down arrows in the Manual Mode Minor Problems Resolved in Menu Displays A few minor bugs have been rep
105. LOAD Options Allow Multiple SHAREs and IGNORE Sections of Files The LOAD command has been enhanced in two ways as described below An additional parameter has been added which can be used when the SHARE option is used This indicates how many sets of data should be LOADed during the SHARE operation For example if five PREPASSR H 292 Reference sets of intersection data for SIGNAL85 are stored sequentially in a file by SIGNALS85 and are to be LOADed by PRETRANSYT all five intersections can be LOADed with the SHARE option by using the LOAD 1 1 SHARE 5 command A new option has been added to the LOAD command which allows sets of data to be skipped in a file This is the IGNORE option For example if the same file as above is used by SIGNAL85 but only the fifth intersection is needed the LOAD 1 1 IGNORE 4 command can be used to skip over the first four intersections then followed by LOAD to LOAD the fifth This option can be particularly useful when LOADing the lines which need to be skipped would over write data already LOADed into the program Since the IGNORE option does not process the skipped lines at all the previous data will be retained This option also assists in moving quickly through a file without the need to know the line numbers where desired section begin Improved Full screen Editing Options A frustrating problem with earlier versions of TEAPAC programs was when data values were entered on an active command then t
106. LS is now allowed to have negative values with a complete input range permitted from 9999 to 9999 This is primarily to afford the possibility of re assignments of traffic to result in a net reduction of volume for individual movements either by manual entry or computations from SITE In the case of SITE this also means that ROUNDing of results can create small negative VOLADDITIONALS in locations that receive little or no new traffic and where final volumes are rounded down this is appropriate and to be expected gt LinkTo followed by Another LinkTo Performs Properly Multiple LinkTo operations can now be performed smoothly under all conditions without limitation Previously it was observed that under certain conditions one LinkTo followed by another LinkTo could cause certain problems successfully connecting to the next desired program gt Better Graphics for Phasing Display and Bitmap Buttons The arrows used to represent phasing in various dialogs have been improved in quality and appearance and if timings for phasings are defined by movement instead of by phase the by PREPASSR H 248 Reference movement phasing diagrams are now shown in every relevant dialog In addition the pan and zoom button bitmaps within the View Network display have been improved for better clarity gt Option to Select Pages to Print Page 0 for Current Page An option has been added to the Print Setup dialog which allows the selection of specific page
107. Length The cycle length in seconds for the intersection This is also the minimum cycle length if a cycle range is given Max Cycle The maximum cycle length in seconds which will be searched in a cycle range evaluation Cycle Increment The increment of cycle length in seconds which will be used in a cycle range evaluation to get from the minimum cycle to the maximum cycle Offset The system progression offset for the phasing and the phase number to which this offset applies Numbers less than 1 00 represent proportions of the system cycle time in seconds second Network Data The description of the location of the intersection in the network being analyzed For each approach to the intersection this includes the distance in feet from the upstream node the average travel speed from the upstream node the node number of the upstream node and the movements numbers at the upstream node which supply traffic to the downstream node the link assignment method the link curvature and if the link distance has been manually entered The X Y coordinates of the node are also given The following is an example of the Summary of Parameter Values text only report using the PREPASSR program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum PREP
108. Limit for VOLFACTORS Adjusted for Consistency with Save The largest VOLFACTOR which can be saved in a TEAPAC data file has always been 9 99 but it s been recently noticed that the input dialog error checking permitted factors as large as 20 0 without an error resulting in subsequent problems if an attempt was made to save such an entry The input error checking has been modified to match the save limitation to resolve this problem At the same time the discussion in the documentation has been modified to reflect the same precision of save accuracy to avoid any further confusion gt V7 00 28 Multiple Copies of a Program Can Be Open Simultaneously Again The source of a problem which has recently prevented multiple copies of any given program from being open at the same time such as when comparing alternatives side by side This problem has been resolved and the ability to have multiple copies open simultaneously has been re enabled gt V7 00 28 Minor Fixes to Drag and Drop Network Interface An occasional problem connecting T intersections properly when bend nodes were present in the network has been resolved Build 21 versions of the programs would notify the user of the problem immediately upon creation of a link under these circumstances If an earlier version was used to create the network the problem is easily detected if it exists with the Analyze function in the new Coordinate System section of the Setup button dialog in the main w
109. NAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the number of vehicles queued at the intersection at the start of the analysis period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Initial Queue Size gt is the number of vehicles queued at the start of the analysis period due to unsatisfied demand in the previous analysis period and can be any integer from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 Notes If the initial queue is observed in the field it should be the queue observed at the end of a green phase at the start of the analysis period This observation will reflect unsatisfied demand The queue should not be observed at the end of a red phase since this would be a queue which also included the significant effects of cyclical queueing not just unsatisfied demand The observer should also take care that the observed queue is typical of other cycles at the end of green and near the start of the analysis period and not unduly influenced by random fluctuations in demand If a non zero initial queue value is entered SIGNAL2000 will compute the additional d3 delay term and adjust the d term as appropriate according to the methods of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual The analyst should be aware that an analysis period with an initial queue value may generate more delay per vehicle than another analysis period which has higher volume but no initial queue Thus it may be appropriat
110. NITIAL EXAMPLE Note also that the VOLUMES and WIDTHS listed are only for the current intersection as defined by the current value of the INTERSECTION command To review information for any given intersection precede the data command with the proper INTERSECTION command as below Basic INTERSECTION 13 Basic DATA VOLUMES SATFLOWS Basic INTERSECTION 15 Basic DATA VOLUMES SATFLOWS The most efficient way to check input from the Manual Mode is to use the ASK command This displays the current values of the commands ASKed for in a dialog box display which provides on screen HELP and allows the user to move the cursor among the data fields and even change any values desired just like the Visual Mode Try the following from the Manual Mode both in the Normal and Tabular Views use F3 to toggle between views ASK BASIC In the Visual Mode the and buttons can be used at any time to increment and decrement the intersection number displayed in the dialog according to the order defined in the NODELIST The Ctrl PageUp and Ctrl PageDown keys Page Up Down may also be used as shortcut keys as long as no changes have been made to input fields in the dialog If a change is made first TAB to the next field then use Page Up Down Try this as the quickest way to review and or edit data input for each intersection Review the data values listed using any of the methods described above Note that
111. NS WARRANTS and SITE these are present for seamless data file compatibility with these programs using the LinkTo menu The other two special group names are for actions which relate to exporting PREPASSR data to PASSER and to importing the results of PASSER back into PREPASSR These are called EXPORT and IMPORT respectively These special group names are best used with the ASK command from the Manual Mode to generate helpful sequences of command dialogs for the activities described above PREPASSR_ A 58 Reference All Commands Table A 3 All Commands Listed Alphabetically Command Parameter Values Defaults ACTUATIONS 12 lt Actuated Phase NO YES gt 12 NO ADTFACTOR lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumes gt 0 0 PLABELS 4 lt l character Approach Label gt N E S W RIVALTYPE 12 lt Arrival Type 1 2 3 4 5 6 PVG or RP gt 12 3 lt List of Commands gt PARAM ENT lt Type gt lt Int gt 12 lt lt Mov gt lt Asgn Fctr gt gt ere 10 lt Dev Size gt lt LL X Y Coord gt lt UR X Y Coord gt 0 00 0 0 UMES 4 lt Conflicting Bicycles bikes hr gt 4 0 ES 4 lt Stopping Bus Volume bus hr gt 4 0 E lt Algebraic Expression gt TIONS lt MjDr gt lt LnNS gt lt LnEW gt lt SPD gt lt POP gt lt PRG gt lt REM gt 2 lt lt Acc gt lt Dly gt gt CO YPE lt Count Type CUM RED gt lt Truck Type INC SEP gt RED INC RITICALS 6 lt Critical Movement Number gt 6 0 ES lt Cycle Length sec gt lt Cycle
112. NTERSECTION commands The ENTER or J key may also be used to enter a field on a line of a full screen display and immediately move the cursor to the first field of the next line This is particularly useful when the last entry for a line is not in the last field of the line avoiding the need for several cursor movements which would otherwise be necessary to move to the next input field A feature that has been in testing in some programs like SITE PREPASSR and PRETRANS YT has now been formalized allowing the clearer display of the field boundaries on active selector commands in the full screen displays This allows that when the selector field such as the INTERSECTION number is entered the entire line is blanked so that the previous fields will not PREPASSR H 293 Reference inadvertently be entered for the newly selected intersection but when the cursor is move to the other fields the field boundaries re appear for more clear editing New CALCULATE Command and Use of User Variables A new command called CALCULATE has been added which allows the user to use the program either as a simple calculator a complex expression evaluator or even a programmable calculator Arbitrarily complex arithmetic expressions using the and symbols can be entered and evaluated using either numeric constants as operands or using previously CALCULATEd variables as operands Multiple levels of parentheses can be used The result is always displ
113. ORS are used to generate analysis volumes for various types of analyses within TEAPAC PREPASSR B 176 Reference WIDTHS WIDTHS WIDTHS 12 lt Lane Group Width gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the width of the lane group for each movement at the current intersection lt Lane Group Width gt is the the width in feet of the lane group for each movement and can be in the range of 0 0 60 0 feet Its default value is 0 0 feet Notes Widths for turning movements should be entered only if the approach has exclusive turning lanes If no turning lanes exist the turns will come out of the designated through lane group PREPASSR B 177 Reference YELLOWTIMES YELLOWTIMES YELLOWTIMES 6 lt Phase Yellow Time gt Defaults 6 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION IMPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the clearance interval at the end of each phase of a phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection lt Phase Yellow Time gt is the duration of the clearance interval after each phase or movement in seconds or seconds second and can be any number from 0 to 900 Its default value is 0 0 seconds Notes If the list of YELLOWTIMES is preceded by the keyword Movmt then each of the entered values will be interpreted as timings for individual through and left turn movements clockwise around t
114. OUPTYPES dialog most of whose possible entry values can typically exceed the actual allocated input field width Another effect of the overly aggressive error check was that certain drop down list values in a number of dialog boxes had pre programmed entries which exceeded the input field width thus preventing them from executing properly These included drop down lists in the OUTPUT CONDITIONS GENERATION and PATHDISTRIBUTION dialogs The field widths of all of these entries have been modified to accept the full drop down list pre programmed entries gt Extra Warning Message Eliminated When Opening New Files If a user is warned about unsaved data or results values when a new file is about to be opened with an option to first save the values certain circumstances could cause the same message to be re displayed a second time regardless of the user response to the first message This duplicate warning message has been eliminated gt Debug Value Removed from Display for Text Search Function PREPASSR_ H 246 Reference A spurious debug value was inadvertently left in the production version of the program displaying each time a text string is searched for in any output window or edit window The debug display has been removed gt Key Files Are Now Valid for All Prior Versions of Program The key file processing logic has been enhanced to allow a given key file to be used not only for various builds and minor updates for the licensed ve
115. OWS 0 52960 0 3041 2606 000 1448 2634 0 Basic gt SEQUENCE 12 Basic CYCLES 60 60 Basic GREENTIMES 0 23 0 26 0 36 Basic gt YELLOWTIMES 3 0 3 0 3 0 Finally select intersection 15 and enter its information as follows Basic gt INTERSECTION 15 WATER Intersection NODELOCATION 2656 0 Basic gt NETWORK WEST 53035 14 Basic VOLUMES 000 366 780 0 386 135 453 0 573 291 Basic gt WIDTHS 000 12360 12480 02412 Basic SATFLOWS 000 1359 3387 0 1345 4402 0 0 2486 1300 PREPASSR _ 21 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Basic SEQUENCE 13 Basic gt CYCLES 60 60 Basic gt GREENTIMES 0 34 0 11 0 40 Basic gt YELLOWTIMES 3 0 3 0 3 0 The Tabular View is a particularly efficient data entry mode when lots of data is to be entered buts lacks some of the dialog box cues that the Normal View provides Use the View menu or the F3 key and the Edit menu to explore this view and see the data values you have entered If you have entered a value improperly simply re enter the proper value The next section shows how you can verify all entries particularly if you are using the Manual Mode Data Review Once data has been entered it should be checked for accuracy and completeness In the Visual Mode this process is simply a matter of reviewing the data entered in each dialog since this reflects the actual current values In the Manual Mode DATA and SUMMARISE are used for this da
116. PASSR H 285 Reference can be used to show the offset to any phase or clearance interval including a phasing diagram and a north arrow which minimizes confusion in interpreting the results gt New IMPORT Command Brings PASSER Results Directly into PREPASSR PASSER results can now be imported directly into PREPASSR using the new IMPORT command When PASSER s results are saved in an output file this output file is read by IMPORT and the CYCLE length and OFFSETS are set directly into the PREPASSR program for each intersection as if manually entered If the OPTIMIZE command is set to SPLITS OFFSETS or CYCLES when the IMPORT is performed each intersection s GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES are entered as well The first parameter of IMPORT is the name of the PASSER output file to import from the default is PSR OUT and the second parameter determines whether the imported values should be displayed in a report format the default is NO If the file name is entered as AUTO then the automatic file name TEMPPSR OUT used by the automatic EXPORT option is used see following section AUTO may not be abbreviated nor may any file name used start with the four letters A U T O gt New EXPORT Option Allows Automatic Linkage to and from PASSER A direct linkage to and from PASSER can now be created which handles the export file naming running of PASSER optional review of PASSER s results re loading of PREPASSR and optional import of PASSER s results into P
117. PREPASSR Tutorial Reference Manual PREPASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 81 27MAY08 May 2008 This work is protected under the Copyright Act of 1976 Created by Strong Concepts All rights reserved Contains its trade secrets reverse engineering prohibited PREPASSR TEAPAC Pre and Post processor for PASSER II Arterial Optimization PREPASSR is a pre and post processor to be used in conjunction with the PASSER II program PASSER input such as phasing minimums volumes and saturation flow input must be carefully coded and coordinated in order to generate valid results sometimes in a confusing and error prone manner On the other hand PREPASSR accepts data in a form directed by traffic engineering terms which are easy to understand and builds the required PASSER input coding thus eliminating user error in preparing its input This interactive analysis tool will automatically generate the network structure for the signalized arterial being analyzed through the use of the standard TEAPAC NETWORK command Further the phasing and timings for each signal is specified in straightforward traffic engineering terms and can be changed easily when testing alternatives After an analysis by PASSER is completed PREPASSR has the capability of interactively plotting a time space diagram for any portion of the system The optimum timings which have been generated can also be imported and displayed for each intersection including a phasing diagram which makes und
118. Prompt may still be used even in the Win32 version of the program In the DOS version of PREPASSR a new entry has been added to the end of the PREPASSR CFG file which can be used to define the destination of printed output The default has been changed from the PRN value previously used to LPT1 This can be changed to any valid DOS printer device name A file name may also be used for this entry to direct all printed output to an ASCII file in lieu of the IODEVICES option which requires use of the Manual Mode New versions of the TEAPAC BAT and WinTEAPAC shell programs Ver 3 01 have also been produced primarily to handle the new CORSIM program CORSIM is now the default option of each shell WinTEAPAC also allows running the DOS version NETSIM by first selecting a DOS check box The DOS check box can also be used to over ride the presence of a Windows version of a TEAPAC program such as SIGNAL94 PREPASSR PRETRANSYT or PRENETSIM by forcing the running of the DOS version instead The normal mode is now to PREPASSR_ H 275 Reference search for and run the Windows version of any TEAPAC program before a DOS version is attempted The newest version of WinTEAPAC also fixes a problem sometimes encountered on WinNT and some Win95 systems when trying to run DOS programs from the WinTEAPAC shell Improved error message have been created as well and long path names are also supported although not encouraged in the WTEAPAC CFG file PREP
119. R and has been greatly improved in functionality regarding the ability to pan up down and left right as well as new functions for zoom in out and selecting a view area of the network connections and underlying bitmap with the mouse gt T2004v6 Output Edit Window Major Enhancements The Output and Edit Windows have been enhanced with menus and toolbar buttons which provide the ability to Find a user entered text string find the next output report and find the next page of results A button also allows moving backwards thru the output to the previous output page In the Edit Window an additional Find amp Replace function has also been provided Also the current line number of the cursor is displayed in the status line of the window and the A function now performs the standard SelectAll function instead of copying the entire window to the clipboard gt T2004v6 Toolbar Button Provided for Intersection Selection A toolbar button has been provided in the main window next to the buttons which provides direct access to the Intersection dialog to select the current intersection allowing quick access to this common function without the need to use the menus gt T2004v6 Intersection Type Description Listed in Dialog Caption If an intersection description has been provided for the current intersection via the Intersection dialog this description is displayed in the caption of any intersection data dialog in addition to the inte
120. REDS 4 lt Right Turn on Red Volume gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS APPROACH The purpose of this command is to enter the right turn on red volume for the right turns on each approach of the current intersection lt Right Turn on Red Volume is the volume in vehicles per hour of right turns being made on red and can be any integer from 0 to 300 Its default value is 0 Notes This input has no effect on PREPASSR calculations but appears for compatibility with other TEAPAC programs such as SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM PREPASSR B 151 Reference ROUND ROUND ROUND lt Precision of Totals gt Defaults 1 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the precision to be used in computing the results lt Precision of Totals gt defines the precision of rounding of assignment totals for each intersection movement and can be any integer from 1 to 1000 Its default value is 1 Notes All computations are calculated to the nearest vehicle until the last computation is completed At this point the results for each intersection are rounded to the nearest whole multiple of the rounding precision entered on the ROUND command If multiple computations are being CUMULATED by the COMPUTE command successive rounding errors can be eliminated by making all the initial calculations and cumulations to the nearest 1 vehicle except the last which should be ROUNDed to the desired prec
121. REPASSR This option is selected by entering AUTO as the EXPORT file name The second parameter to display the exported data can still be set to NO or YES When AUTO is selected a third parameter can be entered to define whether the PASSER results should be automatically IMPORTed back into PREPASSR the keyword is IMPORT whether the PASSER output file should be reviewed on screen the keyword is REVIEW or both functions should be performed the keyword is BOTH The default value of the third parameter is IMPORT and the third parameter is ignored if AUTO is not selected AUTO may not be abbreviated nor may any file name used start with the four letters A U T O The default file to export to has been set to PSR IN and can now be input with 16 characters When the AUTO option is selected the export file name used is TEMPPSR IN and the PASSER results are stored in the file TEMPPSR OUT If multiple exports are to be stacked in a single data file for a batch run of PASSER the file name STACK must be used and the file used by the previous EXPORT will be used by placing the new export after the previous export STACK may not be abbreviated nor may any file name used start with the five letters S T A C K In order for the AUTO option of EXPORT to function properly the PREPASSR program must be initiated using the TEAPAC Menu System and the PREPASSR CFG file must be configured to properly represent the subdirectories where the system s batch PREPASSR da
122. RFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt Enter the peak hour factor for each movement of the current intersection MINIMUMS 12 lt Minimum Green Time gt Enter the minimum green time requirements for each of the twelve movements at the current intersection STORAGE 12 lt Storage Distance gt Enter the amount of storage distance for queued vehicles for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection SATURATIONFLOWS 12 lt Stream Saturation Flow gt Enter the maximum capacity for each lane group of the current intersection SEQUENCES lt Sequence Code gt Enter the desired and allowed phasings of the traffic signal of the current intersection according to the codes defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 CYCLES lt Minimum Cycle gt lt Maximum Cycle gt lt Cycle Increment gt Enter the cycle length for the current intersection to be used for PASSER s simulation or optimization as well as a time space plot or timing diagram as well as a possible cycle optimization range GREENTIMES 6 lt Phase Green Time gt PREPASSR 36 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Enter the duration of green for each of the phases of a specified phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection YELLOWTIMES 6 lt Phase Yellow Time gt Enter the clearance interval at the end of each phase of a phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection OFFSE
123. Reference NETWORK NETWORK If no lt Movement gt is entered lt Movement gt s are calculated when needed assuming a rectangular network relationship That is if no lt Movement gt is entered for the north approach the movement numbers of the upstream node which are assumed to feed the downstream node are 2 6 and 10 lt Assignment Method gt and lt Curvature gt are not not used by PREPASSR If lt Manual Distance gt is set to YES the upstream distance for this link will be excluded from the calculation of the avergage network scale factor as well as any checks for consistency between the link s apparent scale factor based on its endpoint coordinates and the rest of the network A value of NO is recommended but if an upstream distance is intentionally inconsistent with the coordinate values and real network scale factor YES should be used to prevent that condition from improperly affecting the calculation of the average network scale factor and related contingency checks for network connections which are made PREPASSR B 119 Reference NEWPAGE NEWPAGE NEWPAGE lt Page Advance Option gt Defaults YES Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to enter a flag indicating that the next output report should begin with title headings at the top of the next page lt Page Advance Option gt is a keyword identifying whether or not the next report should be forced onto the next page of output even if i
124. SIZE SITESIZE SITESIZE lt of Distribution Types gt lt of Inbound Types gt Defaults 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the number of distribution types to be used to describe the inbound and outbound traffic generation lt of Distribution Types gt is the total number of inbound and outbound distribution types which will be used to define the distribution of trips generated into and out of the site and can be any integer from 0 150 see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered before any distribution information can be entered lt of Inbound Types gt is how many of the total distribution types are to be used to define those trips which are destined for the site These will be the first of the total distribution types the remainder of which will be declared outbound types It can be any integer from 0 150 and less than or equal to the lt of Distribution Types gt Its default value is 0 Notes The SITESIZE command must be virtually the first command entered when defining a study network and generator since no GENERATOR or ASSIGNMENT commands can be entered until the SITESIZE of the study is defined The maximum size of the study depends on the licensed Usage Level of the program Usage Level 1 allows up to 50 distribution types while Usage Level 2 allows up to 100 distribution types and Usage Level 3 allows up to 150 distribution types In the M
125. SR B 144 Reference QUEUEMODELS QUEUEMODELS QUEUEMODELS lt Model gt lt Percentile gt lt Auto gt lt Truck gt Defaults 1 90 25 40 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter parameters which control the queue model calculations used for all intersections under study for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Model gt is the number of the preferred queue model as computed by the QUEUECALCS command and can be any integer from 1 to 10 but not 2 or 5 Its default value is 1 1 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane XXth Percentile Queue 3 ARRB ARRB MBQ Worst Lane 95th Percentile Queue 4 HCM 2000 HCM MBQ Worst Lane Average Queue 6 MBQ Historical MBQ Average Lane Average Queue 7 S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 8 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane XXth Percentile Queue 9 S97E SIGNAL97 Evaluate MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue 10 S97A SIGNAL97 Analyze MQL Average Lane 90th Percentile Queue lt Percentile gt is the percentile value desired to be estimated by the queue models and can be any integer from 50 to 99 Its default value is 90 lt Auto gt is the average queue spacing between front bumpers of queued automobiles in feet and can be any integer from 5 to 100 Its default value is 25 lt Truck gt is the average queue spacing between front bumpers of queued trucks in feet and can be any integer from 5 to 100 Its
126. SUMMARISE Display a formatted summary of all PARAMETERS values It has no parameters Commands to Label Output The four commands described below control the report headings of the program Report headings are used to identify the conditions of an analysis Report headings are critical when multiple analyses are performed and documentation of various conditions analyzed is required PREPASSR 44 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS PROJECT lt First Title Line gt Enter the first line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed DESCRIPTION lt Second Title Line gt Enter the second line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed NOTE lt Third Title Line gt Enter the third line of information contained in the title of each report HEADING lt Number of Lines gt Display the current title heading lines Commands to Control Operation of Program The following commands control various aspects of program operation ECHO lt Input Output Echo Condition gt Enter the echo condition flag indicating whether or not command information should be displayed after being input from or output to a file IODEVICES lt Visual View gt lt Page gt lt Lines Pg gt lt Last Line gt Set the visual view style for dialogs as well as the page number and the size of the output medium i e paper NEWPAGE lt Page Advance Option gt Enter a flag indicating that the next output repor
127. Strong Concepts Strong Concepts 15 Timber Lane Northbrook Illinois U S A 60062 3715 phone 847 564 0386 fax 847 474 4486 email support StrongConcepts com internet www StrongConcepts com PREPASSR_ iii Manual PROPRIETARY NOTICE TEAPAC programs and tutorial reference manuals are protected under the Copyright Act of 1976 and all rights are reserved by Strong Concepts Only you as the original purchaser may use the TEAPAC programs and only on computer systems located in the one office of your agency for which the programs are licensed As an original purchaser of the TEAPAC programs you are hereby licensed only to read the programs from their medium into the memory of a computer solely for the purpose of executing the programs Use of the TEAPAC programs purchased hereby by any other entity or on computer systems other than the ones for which it is licensed is an unauthorized use Except for the limited purpose of system back up the copying duplicating selling or otherwise distributing of TEAPAC programs is a violation of the law The TEAPAC documentation may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without the express written permission of Strong Concepts other than for personal convenience DISCLAIMER Strong Concepts shall have no liability or responsibility to licensee or any other person or entity with respect to any liabili
128. T lt Offset gt lt Phase Number gt Enter the coordinated offset for a phase of the phase sequence at the current intersection Commands to Enter System Data The following are commands which can be used to describe the signalized system which is being analyzed Some of these commands were also included in the Basic Data discussed above NODELIST 100 lt Node Number gt Enter the list of nodes to be simulated or optimized SUBSYSTEM 100 lt Node Number gt Enter the subset of the NODELIST for which subsequent actions should be taken ROUTE lt Route gt lt List of Artery Nodes gt Enter a list of node numbers which represent the intersections on the artery for the given route number MASTERNODE lt Master Node gt Enter the node number of the intersection which is the master node location for the system QUEUEMODELS lt Model gt lt Percentile gt lt Auto gt lt Truck gt Enter parameters which control the queue model calculations used for all intersections under study SIMULATION lt Steps Cycle gt lt Analysis Period gt lt Stop Penalty gt lt Link Numbering Method gt lt Model Actuated gt lt Assignment Method gt Analysis Period Enter simulation control parameters including the length of the analysis period for all intersections under study OPTIMIZE lt Optimization Type gt lt Step Size List gt Enter the type of optimization to be performed by PASSER OUTPUT lt Prog gt lt PASSER Version g
129. TERS INTERSECTION SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter abbreviated labels for each movement of the current intersection lt Movement Label gt is a two character abbreviation used to identify each of the twelve movements at the intersection and can be any pair of printable characters Its default value is RT TH LT for the right turns throughs and left turns of each approach respectively Notes Use of MOVLABELS does not change the order of entry this order is always clockwise starting with the north approach MOVLABELS merely allows each movement to be labeled with the user s choice of characters PREPASSR B 117 Reference NETWORK NETWORK NETWORK lt Direction gt lt Distance gt lt Speed gt lt Node gt 4 lt Movement gt lt Assignment Method gt lt Curvature gt lt Manual Distance gt Defaults 0 0 0 4 0 Default None Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the current intersection s relative location in the system network including spatial and speed parameters lt Direction gt is the the approach to the intersection for which the following data applies and can be NORTH EAST SOUTH or WEST There is no default value for this parameter it must be entered lt Distance gt is the the distance in feet from the closest upstream node for the approach specified and can be any number from 0 to 32000 Its default value is 0 lt Spee
130. TIMES from the input MINIMUMS gt Improved Delineation of Fields for Active INTERSECTION Command The fields of the active INTERSECTION command are now more clearly delineated for entry of the description along with the actual intersection node number When the cursor is in the node number field the delineation still disappears so that any entry will erase the entire command line but pressing ENTER will now move more clearly to the description field so that it can be entered if desired The erasure of the entire command line still exists so that the previous description does not inadvertently get assigned to a new node number especially if the INTERSECTION command is only being used to select another current intersection after all descriptions have been previously entered gt Advisory Usage Notes OFFSETS and OPTIMIZE If OFFSETS for existing or optimized conditions are to be entered into the PREPASSR data base and subsequently used for a simulation only run of PASSER the OFFSETS must be entered for the phase which is represented in the PHASER DAT file of PASSER This is usually but not limited to the beginning of the main street green phase In the documentation the discussion for OPTIMIZE is not exactly correct The option other than NONE simulation should be SPLITS OFFSETS not OFFSETS since at this point PASSER s optimization cannot be easily controlled to optimize offsets only except if the MINIMUMS are entered so as to f
131. TRANSYT is installed on the system gt T2004v6 Global Input Option for Most Intersection Inputs A powerful new feature has been added to all TEAPAC programs that allows the value of a single data entry to be made to all intersections in the NODELIST or the SUBSYSTEM if one is defined This is done when Intersection 0 is selected and the user is first warned of the PREPASSR_ H 251 Reference pending global entry action and followed by an audible beep when the global entry is made The warning message can be omitted for future such actions if desired Examples of uses for this new feature include the following Enter a common cycle length or cycle range for SIGNAL2000 optimization of all signals designate a full SIGNAL2000 phasing optimization for all signals set the new volume adjustment factor or number of years for compounding a growth factor for all intersections for sensitivity analysis enable or disable the new additional volumes entry for all intersections designate a common peak hour factor for specific movements or all movements of all intersections set the minimum or required clearance values for optimization at all signals set the satflow adjustment factor for all signals to perform sensitivity analysis etc The possibilities of this new feature are virtually endless gt T2004v6 View Network Function Improved with Easier Pan amp New Zoom The View Network function has been added to all programs except NOSTOP and TUTO
132. The data entered for the CONDITIONS command are used by the WARRANTS command in WARRANTS and Usage Level 2 of TURNS to describe intersection conditions which affect the warrant levels and conditions which must be met to satisfy the warrants lt N S Lanes gt and lt E W Lanes gt is the number of lanes for moving traffic on each of the North South and East West approaches respectively and normally does not include exclusive turn lanes It is the number of lanes on each approach not the total number of lanes on the street If the actual number of lanes exceeds the maximum allowed entry of 4 enter 4 the MUTCD only considers whether there is 1 lane or more than 1 lane PREPASSR_ B 78 Reference COUNTTYPE COUNTTYPE COUNTTYPE lt Type of Data gt lt Type of Truck Counts gt lt Count Description gt Defaults REDUCED INCLUDED 40 blanks Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the type of count data which is to be supplied to the program at the current intersection and to provide a description of the count lt Type of Data gt is a keyword which defines the type of count data which will be entered on the VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands and can be any of the following CUMULATIVE The count data entered is the cumulation of traffic counted from the start of the survey REDUCED The data entered is the actual volume counted for the count interval default lt Type of Truck C
133. Windows NT PREPASSR_ H 273 Reference gt Add Intersections to NODELIST Simply by Using a New INTERSECTION Number Intersections may now be added to the end of the NODELIST simply by using an INTERSECTION number which is not currently in the NODELIST When this happens the user is prompted as to whether the new number should be added or re entered This means the user can avoid the strict use of the NODELIST command entry if desired simply by creating the NODELIST every time a new INTERSECTION number is referenced The most useful place this might occur is when multiple intersection files are being LOADed from files created by SIGNAL94 gt New Actions and Defaults for EXPORT AUTO The VIEW option is now the default action for EXPORT AUTO so that the normal process will be to VIEW the PASSER output file which is generated The previous default IMPORT is still a valid option for DOS versions but under Windows the IMPORT command must now be used to import PASSER results after the PASSER run is completed due to the multi tasking operation of newer Windows platforms A new option NONE has also been created for EXPORT AUTO which performs no additional actions after the EXPORT AUTO is executed gt Improved File Management by EXPORT When EXPORT AUTO is used previous PASSER result files TMPPSR POF etc which may exist from a previous PASSER run are first deleted before the PASSER run is made This prevents any possible confusion as to
134. ach of the intersections in the NODELIST and or SUBSYSTEM are reasonably connected This does not guarantee that the system is fully or properly connected but will catch intersections that are not connected to any other intersections in the network Action Review the NETWORK commands of the referenced intersection to make sure traffic flow from every signal in the NODELIST SUBSYSTEM is PREPASSR E 204 Reference properly defined including both the source nodes and source movements Also check intersections whose NETWORK commands include the referenced intersection In the case of diagonal connections between intersections special care must be taken when creating these connections as follows A diagonal connection is a link that connects two intersections without the typical rectangular relationship For example a rectangular connection might connect the east leg of one intersection to the west leg of another while a diagonal connection might connect the east leg of one to for example the north leg of the other The connection does not need to be a straight diagonal line to be considered a diagonal connection and often appears as a curved link the important consideration is that the link does not connect two intersections with the typical east to west or north to south relationship The best way to assure that the proper relationships are created for a diagonal link is to first create stubs for each of the intersections which approach
135. ade Enter here This message indicates that an INTERSECTION number has not been selected prior to the entry of a data value When an input value is entered that is intended to pertain to a specific intersection that intersection number must first be selected with the INTERSECTION entry before the input value is entered If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which intersection to assign the entry value to Action If you know the intersection number you intend to be using enter it in the error dialog and select Yes In this case the INTERSECTION command will be issued for you for that intersection If you do not know the intersection number you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the INTERSECTION command to select an intersection from the NODELIST and re enter the input value for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the INTERSECTION command TPC62 WARNING An INTERSECTION must be given before this DATA can be listed Enter here This message indicates that an INTERSECTION number has not been selected prior to the request to list a DATA value When a data value is to be listed with DATA for a specific intersection that intersection number must first be selected with the INTERSECTION entry before the value can be listed If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which intersection s data to list Action If you know the intersection number you intend to
136. ain problems with ROUTES which contained more than 8 nodes have been fixed including saving these route definitions gt T2004v6 Recent File Menu Option Works Under All Windows Platforms Display of recently used files in the File menu has presented problems under certain Windows platforms and thus an option has been provided to turn this display off so recent files are accessed only thru the File RecentFiles dialog This problem has been fixed so recent files can be displayed in the File menu on any Windows platform and thus the default condition for this feature has been changed from No to Yes gt T2004v6 Command Line Control File Enhancements When a user has set a TEAPAC program to start in the Tabular View ASK commands in command line control files could not be used This limitation has been eliminated so this feature can be used if desired The output window for output generated by a command line control file now appears in front of the main window so it is immediately visible without the need to click it to bring it to the front PREPASSR_ H 254 Reference A new x option has been added at the end of a command line file name which instructs the program to open the command line file as File x the default is File 1 as before This allows the data file which a control file 2 5 opens to be designated as File 1 so that it is the file which will be open for subsequent File Save operations from the File menu Opening command line
137. aired which sometimes caused unpredictable results For example if an active command which was executed from a menu display happened to be displayed on the last possible display line of the menu the next display of the same menu would have random garbage in it This has been corrected Also fixed is a rare problem where the last lines of certain long output reports would be distorted on the screen A minor enhancement has also been made which eliminates unnecessary pauses in the screen displays when output is being directed to the printer or a file V2 L2 1 O7JAN92 PREPASSR_ H 291 Reference Opening Screen Displays TEAPAC Interface Version Being Used The opening screen of TEAPAC programs now display the version level and date of the TEAPAC interface being used for easy reference This will be most useful in the future when checking the interface version being used by TEAPAC programs installed on a given computer More Editing Keys Added Two new editing keys have been added for compatibility with some word processors and editors which are available When editing a field in either the Menu or Manual Mode the cursor can be advanced to the beginning of the next word of the field by as using Ctrl Right Arrow as well as F The cursor can be moved to the beginning of the previous word by using Ctrl Left Arrow as well as A These additions should be noted in Table G 2 of Appendix G in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual DOS Shell Opt
138. all capital letters usually refer to specific commands of the program They may also refer to keyword options or a program name Entries in all capital letters enclosed in square brackets XXX refer to group menu names representing specific menus or groups of commands Entries enclosed in angle brackets lt XXX gt refer to specific data inputs associated with commands of the program Entries preceded by an equal sign XXX indicate a discussion of an output of the program either a result of the computations or an input tabulation The primary discussions for commands are indicated by page locations in bold print located in Appendix B of the Reference Manual lt button 23 B 104 B 134 lt Blocks gt 45 B 111 lt of Distribution Types gt 42 B 160 lt of Inbound Types gt 42 B 160 lt Actuated Movement gt 39 B 65 lt AddFactor gt 38 button 23 B 104 B 134 lt Algebraic Expression gt 46 B 75 lt Analysis Period gt 37 B 158 lt Approach Label gt 38 40 B 67 lt Assignment Factor gt 43 B 70 lt Assignment Method gt 36 37 38 B 118 B 158 lt Auto Option gt 35 B 88 IN 26 B 91 G 228 lt Auto gt 37 B 145 0 G 228 lt Conflicting Bicycles gt 41 B 73 lt Critical Movement Number gt 42 B 80 lt Curvature gt 36 38 B 118 lt Cycle Increment gt 36 40 B 81 PREPASSR 301 Index lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt 42 B 83 lt Delay Incr gt 40 B 108 lt Descr gt
139. am and to be used by another such as peak period volumes from TURNS HCM satflows from SIGNAL2000 optimized signal timings and phasings from SIGNAL2000 projected traffic from SITE etc need only be saved into the data file with File Save then the next program launched with the same file using the LinkTo menu A single click positions the user in the next program ready to do the analysis of that program Lastly all programs except NOSTOP and TUTOR now have the ability to store all of this data for up to 500 intersections in a single file gt T2004v6 LinkTo Menu In All TEAPAC Programs Includes All TEAPAC Programs All TEAPAC programs except NOSTOP and TUTOR now contain the LinkTo menu which now provides immediate access to all other TEAPAC programs with a single click which causes the current data file to be re opened in that program gt T2004v6 LinkTo Function Now Allows Direct Link to Host Programs A new function of the LinkTo menu has been added which allows direct linkage to the six host programs which are supported by the six TEAPAC preprocessors These are PRETRANSYT for TRANSYT PREPASSR for PASSER PRENETSIM for CORSIM PRESYNCHRO for Synchro SimTraffic PRETSPPD for TS PP Draft and now PRENOSTOP for NOSTOP Since all programs have access to the control directives for all the preprocessors this means for example that a TRANSYT run can be made directly from SIGNAL2000 with a LinkTo TRANSYT assuming a licensed copy of PRE
140. among all the TEAPAC programs will be helpful Analysis volumes in any TEAPAC program are the additive combination of VOLUMES and VOLADDITIONALS entries Thus for any given movement the VOLUMES entry for that movement is added to the VOLADDITIONALS entry for that movement to arrive at the analysis volume for that movement For added flexibility VOLUMES entries can be factored up or down by corresponding VOLFACTORS entries with the additional possibility of compounded growth applied to those factors and VOLADDITONALS entries can be factored up or down by a separate factor Normally VOLUMES will be either entered by the user or set automatically by peak period analysis in TURNS or WARRANTS consistent with the then current VOLFACTORS entries Normally VOLADDITIONALS will be either entered by the user or set automatically by traffic generation computations in SITE consistent with the then current VOLUMES and VOLFACTORS entries The user is directed to the specific formulas for analysis volume determination described in detail in Appendix C PREPASSR 48 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES The following discussion provides further program specific notes about data file sharing for this program Sharing Data with SIGNAL2000 PRENOSTOP PRETRANSYT PRETSPPD PRES YNCHRO and PRENETSIM Input Data from TURNS WARRANTS and SITE Sharing Data with SIGNAL2000 PRENOSTOP PRETRANSYT PRETSPPD PRESYNCHRO and PRENETSIM SIGNA
141. and The LOAD and SAVE commands can now be used without using the FILES command first to define the file to be used If the FILES command is not used to define the file before the LOAD or SAVE commands are used the user will now be prompted to enter the file name if desired If this is done the LOAD or SAVE proceeds as normal with the exception that the file named will not be retained in the FILES list and the LOAD will start at line 1 of the named file regardless of any line number given The file name must be entered each time the file is accessed in this fashion Entering the file name once on the FILES command eliminates this duplicate entry and is recommended if a file will be accessed more than once in a given session New CFG Files Designate Location of Data Files New CFG files can now be used to designate the drive and path where data files are to be stored among other things If no drive or path is specified for a file this location will be used for the data file A specified drive or path will over ride the CFG file location A TEAPAC CFG file can be used for any and all TEAPAC programs but it will be over ridden by a program specific CFG file if it exists The definition of the contents of these CFG files appear in Appendix G along with the discussion of the new TEAPAC Menu System which also uses the CFG files see next section Data files can now also be preceded by the notation to refer to the current logged subdire
142. ane turn lane conditions MULTIOK compound left turn phasing allowed even when the left turn lane consists of more than one lane multi lane but not for left turn trap conditions Permitted left operations will also be allowed for multi lane turn lanes in a single phase when this is selected UNRESTRICTED compound left turn phasing allowed under any conditions including left turn trap and multi lane conditions Notes A left turn trap is a condition where the through movement opposing a left turn continues moving after the left turn s permitted phase ends possibly leaving a left turning vehicle stranded in the intersection facing a red indication or causing the potentially stranded left turner to think the opposing traffic phase is also ending and making the left turn directly into oncoming traffic Selecting TRAPOK or UNRESTRICTED allows the program to set the phasing so such a trap condition exists with the presumption that the analyst is satisfied that the otherwise unsafe condition will be handled safely on the street PREPASSR _ B 141 Reference PHASEMOVEMENTS PHASEMOVEMENTS PHASEMOVEMENTS lt Phase Number gt lt List of Movements gt Defaults 6 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the movements permitted during each phase for a non standard phasing at the current intersection lt Phase Number gt is the number of the phase within the sequence of phases for he fo
143. anual Mode lt Inbound Types gt does not need to be entered If it hasn t been entered its default value will be one half of the total number of distribution types set only after lt of Distribution Types gt is first entered Its value cannot exceed the entered lt of Distribution Types gt It is possible to declare 0 distribution types on the SITESIZE command so that all subsequent calculations only apply to defined non site VOLUMES and appropriate growth VOLFACTORS This is particularly useful when calculating non site volumes separately from a set of cumulated multi site volumes in order to separate the non site volume definitions completely from any of the site traffic e The SITESIZE command can specify that all of the declared distribution types are either all inbound or all outbound This effectively increases the number of inbound or outbound distribution types in a single calculation from a maximum of 15 to a maximum of 30 in the largest SITE distribution Usage Level All types PREPASSR _ B 160 Reference SITESIZE SITESIZE in a given calculation can be inbound followed by a cumulated calculation of all outbound types PREPASSR_ B 161 Reference STARTUPLOST STARTUPLOST STARTUPLOST 12 lt Startup Lost Time gt Defaults 12 2 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the length of the lost time at the beginning of a movement s green period for each of the twelve movements
144. as a plugin to the other Visual TEAPAC programs so that they automatically support the SCENARIO structured files for both File Open and File Save A new File menu option labeled Get Scenario PREPASSR_ H 236 Reference Case allows the user to select any of the Conditions for all of the Issues which have been created and any subsequent changes to data which are made are automatically saved in the correct Condition files which have been defined SCENARIO has also been added to all LinkTo menus so that SCENARIO is immediately available to modify the defined scenario structure as necessitated by changing project assumptions gt Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs A number of additional generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 releases of Visual TEAPAC and are collectively included as Ver 7 01 Build 07 These are documented below Ver 7 01 Build 07 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses Data entry dialogs that don t apply to dummy nodes have been modified so that if they are inadvertently displayed while pointing to a dummy node they will not display unpredictable values or cause the program to crash The LinkTo menu has been adjusted so that if no data file path has been defined it will attempt to use the program s file path but will not crash if neither of these is defined The file menu options for Open SaveAs and IntoEdit have been adjusted similarly for the condition when no data pa
145. as another alternate input environment using the Options menu This mode allows quick entry of the same command lines of the Tabular View but without the rigid structure of the Tabular View dialog box The Manual Mode is indicated by the presence of the command prompt in the Manual Mode window as shown below gt When a command prompt is displayed the program is ready to accept command keyword input Input is the same as a line of the Tabular View display but must be preceded by the command or abbreviation which is to be used for the input The Manual Mode can also be toggled using the F4 function key PREPASSR 10 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Example Data Entries When executing the hands on examples in this manual actual entries to be made by the user are shown here in BOLDFACE CAPITAL LETTERS The information which precedes these values indicates what command keyword should be used showing both the menu line group name and the command name In the Visual Mode the menu group name in square brackets xxx can be found in the Edit menu to change data entries or the command keyword can be found in the Results menu to execute actions In the Manual Mode only the command keyword and parameter values need to be entered after the command prompt followed by the OK button or ENTER key For example consider the entry below which might be found in the manual Basic VOLUMES 225 665 165 In the Visual Mode Basic should be sel
146. as created using the example data included in the sample file named PREPASSR FOR These results can be re created by opening this file found in the installed program folder and executing a LOAD command with default parameters from the File Datafiles menu The reports shown here are the text only versions of the output in order to reduce the size of the downloadable programs demos updates help files and pdf manuals Using the LOAD command above will by default produce the far superior looking graphical output reports whose inclusion herein would vastly increase the size of the downloads mentioned Opening the file reads in the basic data for the examples of this appendix The LOAD command will produce the output reports contained in this appendix by reading a control file script stacked in the file after the input data This procedure is a good way to verify the operation of the program as well as to create a starting point for further experimentation with the PREPASSR program The data used in the example outputs is summarized in the first output example Summary of Parameter Values Each report description that follows includes all of the commands which can be used to generate the report PREPASSR D 185 Reference Table D 1 Report Descriptions and Examples Report Title Keyword Summary of Parameter Values SUMMARISE PASSER2xx Formatted Input EXPORT Time Space Diagram for Cycle XX sec PLOT ings for Intersection XX T
147. ation and animation program for the data previously input to PREPASSR The most convenient way to move among all of these programs is to use the LinkTo menu provided in each program This gives access to each of the SIGNAL2000 NOSTOP PASSER II TRANSYT TSPPD SYNCHRO and NETSIM programs from a single data base If optimized intersection results from SIGNAL2000 are to be used by PREPASSR these results should be SAVEd after they are computed Also if SIGNAL2000 s SATURATIONFLOWS are to be used by PREPASSR they must be SAVEd after an action command such as ANALYZE or SERVICEVOLS computes them In another joint use scenario a common effort is to use the optimized results of PASSER as a starting point for a TRANSYT optimization In order to accomplish this easily the PASSER results should be imported into PREPASSR and all info then SAVEd This file can be transferred directly to PRETRANSYT using the LinkTo menu and EXPORTed immediately to TRANSYT PREPASSR_ 49 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Input Data from TURNS WARRANTS and SITE TURNS and WARRANTS is another program which can provide useful results for PREPASSR as well as SIGNAL2000 After the turning movement count summaries and peak period analyses of TURNS are completed the peak period VOLUMES entries which are created are normally used as existing traffic volumes for the initial capacity analyses with SIGNAL2000 and demand volumes for PREPASSR The VOLUMES results of t
148. ault values by the File New menu item A new message also warns if the installed folder has spaces in its name which will cause problems in certain operations like printing gt Potential Problem Running Under Windows NT Eliminated In the initial release of the TEAPAC 2000 interface O7NOV99 a technique for dynamic menu building was used which had a conflict with certain service packs and memory configurations of Windows NT To avoid this potential problem on any given machine the dynamic menu building has been removed and replaced with a method that will work on all configurations of Windows NT PREPASSR Ver 1 53 O7NOV99 gt Additional Help Features Added Several new help features have been added which were inadvertently omitted from the initial TEAPAC2000 release One of these is a new Help button on the toolbar for direct access to the on line user guide This guide is a complete fully indexed copy of the printed manual Help notes in the status line at the bottom of the window for each of the menu items in the File and Edit menus have also been added gt Potential Problem Running Under Windows NT Eliminated In the initial full release of the TEAPAC 2000 interface O7NOV99 a technique for dynamic menu building was used which appears to have a possible conflict with certain service packs and memory configurations of Windows NT To avoid this potential problem the dynamic menu building has been removed and replaced with a method
149. ave easily viewable information at the beginning of the file Message advising of successful save remains visible until closed by user option to close the message automatically for subsequent Saves Warning if Save is attempted into a file that may over write other info warning condition is if file was written by another program or unknown certain earlier versions of the same prog may provide warning if relevant option to cancel save or to permit save anyway gt New Feature for Opening Files If data from another prog or earlier ver of same program read from a file that file is protected from Saves that may over write other information In particular for file from another program Share is automatic makes File Open same as File OpenShared amp LOAD same as LOAD Share eliminates the need to use the OpenShared or LOAD Share explicitly gt New Results Log Option Ability to create text file with results of primary functions of program Log Results item in Options menu Log On Off toggles whether computed results are currently being logged Start New Log clears all prior logged results and toggles Log On Log file is always the program name with log extension located in folder where program was installed gt Improvements Regarding Output Titling Information Any time a title line is read from a file displayed in the title bar provides feedback when loading multiple stacked files or control file Blank title entries are saved in
150. ayed with four decimal accuracy and the integer rounded value can be optionally assigned as the value of any of the 26 user variables A thru Z by preceding the equation with the variable name and an sign These user variables can then be used in subsequent CALCULATions or as numeric parameter values in any command of the program as described below The user variables are the same as those used by the REPEAT command allowing REPEAT variables to be used in the CALCULATion and vice versa The CALCULATE command replaces the unused USERMODEL command User variables from either CALCULATE or REPEAT commands can now be used as parameter values for any numeric field of any command in the program This means for example that the VOLUMES of TUTOR can be CALCULATE to include the effects of several iterative growth factors or that the lt Cycle Length gt used in a DESIGN can be CALCULATEd from the user variable of a REPEAT command The value of any of the 26 user variables is entered as the parameter value simply by preceding the variable name with the equal sign As an example if a REPEAT CYC 1 5 is used in a control file giving the successive values of 1 2 3 4 and 5 to the C variable an actual cycle length to be used can be calculated by the CALCULATE X 25 C command and followed by a DESIGN X command to analyze the impact of the five cycles 25 50 75 100 and 125 Improved Status Messages The Error Number which is listed in the program do
151. be numbered using the scheme described in the TRANSYT 7F user manual NEMA links will be numbered using the alternate NEMA scheme described in the TRANSYT 7E user manual lt Model Actuated gt is a keyword which describes whether the TRANSYT or PASSER actuated model should be used for actuated movements and can be NO or YES Its default is NO It is used by PRETRANSYT and PREPASSR only lt Assignment Method gt is the default method to be used to assign upstream volumes to downstream links if not specified on a NETWORK entry and can be FULL or LIMITED Its default value is FULL It is used by PRETRANSYT only Notes PREPASSR_ B 158 Reference SIMULATION SIMULATION e If the analysis period is anything other than the default of 15 minutes VOLUMES should be entered as the flow rates in vehicles per hour during this period and PEAKHOURFACTORS should be entered as 1 0 The use of the PASSER actuated model which is used to simulate actuated systems can be somewhat confusing and may lead to erroneous results and misinterpretations of the results if not clearly understood by the user On the other hand the ACTUATIONS input makes it quite simple to implement this model without knowledge of the consequences The lt Model Actuated gt entry can be used to disable the PASSER actuated model regardless of the ACTUATIONS inputs and disabling the PASSER actuated model is the default and recommended condition PREPASSR B 159 Reference SITE
152. be using enter it in the error dialog and select Yes In this case the INTERSECTION command will be issued for you for that intersection If you do not know the intersection number you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the INTERSECTION command to select an intersection from the NODELIST and re enter the DATA request for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the INTERSECTION command TPC63 ERROR This INTERSECTION number is not in the NODELIST Add to NODELIST No Yes This message is issued if an intersection number is entered that is not currently in the NODELIST Since the purpose of INTERSECTION is to select a node number from the list in NODELIST most often this condition indicates an invalid selection that the user will want to correct Action The normal response will be to select No indicating that the intersection number entered is incorrect and must be corrected However there a several cases where this message can be used as a shortcut method for adding intersections to the NODELIST In the case where it is known that the entered number is not in the NODELIST and it is desired to add it to the end of the NODELIST select Yes and the intersection will be added to the NODELIST and selected in a single click This can be a very effective way of building a NODELIST on the fly as new intersections or scenarios are needed or as multiple data files are loaded into a single mul
153. buttons in the Adjust Display left side toolbar Once a network has been created the Move Intersection Edit Mode button can be used to relocate any intersection or dummy node By default the link distance for all links connected to the moved node will be modified according to the move made If the move is simply to better match the underlying bitmap and the link distances have already been entered and verified the Adjust NETWORK checkbox in the Setup dialog should be unchecked to prevent the existing distances from being changed Each time the program is first run this option is set to the selected status The Insert Bend Node Edit Mode button can be used to create a dummy node on the link nearest to the click location so the network more precisely reflects curves in the network When creating legs to any intersection use care to meet the standard TEAPAC requirement that each intersection can have only 4 legs and understanding that these legs will be assigned to the four positions North East South and West regardless of their actual orientation If two skewed legs might be interpreted by the program to have an approach angle which assigns them both to the same leg of the intersection initially create the legs with angles are such that they do not conflict then Move the upstream external or bend node to correctly orient the leg visually PREPASSR 13 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Data Review Once data has been entered it s
154. c flow gt Phasing Diagram of TIMINGS Modified Slightly The phasing diagram of the TIMINGS command has been modified slightly to replicate the format of SIGNAL85 94 This is primarily in the form of a more clear North arrow gt Improved Handling of Phasemovs to Avoid Errors In order to avoid the possibility that a short PHASEMOVS definition at one intersection is improperly affected by a longer PHASEMOVS definition at an earlier intersection all six possible phases are always displayed and SAVEd for every intersection In addition if a zero is entered in a list of movements within PHASEMOVS the remainder of that phase s movements are zeroed Furthermore all phases which follow a phase without any movements will also be zeroed These modifications limit the potential for input errors and simplify the PHASEMOVS editing process gt NETWORK Movements Not Set if No Source Node is Provided PREPASSR has always set the default movement numbers on NETWORK entries any time the cursor is placed on a NETWORK entry This has confused some users when the default movement numbers pop up on a NETWORK entry that has no source node In this case the movement numbers would be ignored but for clarity the movement numbers are now always left at zero unless a non zero source node is provided gt EXPORT AUTO Now Works from the Root Directory The design of the AUTO option of EXPORT was previously such that it only worked from a subdirectory other tha
155. censed usage level only allows 12 Action Limit the function and or size of the problem being analyzed to those licensed or upgrade your licensed Usage Level to include the function and or size needed TPC91 ERROR HELP FILE MUST HAVE STRING COUNT IN LINE 1 This error indicates there is a problem with the information in the XXXXX CMD file which supports the running of the TEAPAC program where XXXXX is the name of the program This TEAPAC F 223 Reference information is not user serviceable Action Re install the program from the master program disk TPC92 ERROR TOO MANY CHARS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND STRINGS This error indicates there is a problem with the information in the XXXXX CMD file which supports the running of the TEAPAC program where XXXXX is the name of the program This information is not user serviceable Action Re install the program from the master program disk TEAPAC F 224 Reference APPENDIX G Operating System Messages and Installation Notes Appendix G Topics Certain aspects of program installation and execution will vary among different computer systems This is dependent upon the operating system of the computer rather than the software installed Run time error codes and file specification are two of the more prominent of these aspects In addition control of printed output interactive editing control and program installation are dependent on the operating system This appendix discusses these a
156. centChanges menu or the MESSAGES command for off line reference PREPASSR 52 Reference APPENDIX A Abbreviated Description of Actions and Entries Appendix A Topics Appendix A is designed as a quick reference to the PREPASSR commands and their associated parameter values This appendix is also useful for identifying what specific Group Names exist in the PREPASSR program Table A 1 which commands can be found in each group Table A 2 and an alphabetical list of commands Table A 3 The command information contained in this appendix can be accessed interactively using the HELP command In Table A 1 the column labeled Std Name has an X entered for every group name that is a standard name found in each TEAPAC program The name and meaning of these groups in each TEAPAC program is identical allowing a quick understanding of how commands are organized in each TEAPAC program The column labeled Std Group has an X entered for every group which is comprised of standard TEAPAC commands In these cases not only is the name of the group the same in every TEAPAC program but the names and purposes of the commands in the groups are also identical among TEAPAC programs further enhancing the quick understanding of commands in each TEAPAC program Group names are useful when using a command which requires a list of commands as a parameter value These are the RESET ASK DATA HELPand SAVE commands Group names make it possible to list a
157. ch also serves as the context sensitive Help document Options for obtaining printed bound copies of this document have also been available at an additional cost Now in addition this document is available as a downloadable PDF file which provides the ability to print a copy locally as well as search the entire document for user defined strings PREPASSR Ver 2 02 22NOVO3 Build 16 16JUL04 gt Fix for gt 100 Nodes in NODELIST and SUBSYSTEM Dialogs of 500 Node Version A problem has been fixed which could cause difficulties displaying a node list with more than 100 nodes in the NODELIST and SUBSYSTEM dialogs of the 500 node version of the program PREPASSR_ H 255 Reference gt Automatic Check for Updates Added When Connected to Internet A new feature has been added which allows an automatic check for updates via the internet any time the program is started when an internet connection is present The automatic check can be disabled from the Help menu using the CheckForUpdates option The same menu selectiion can be used to manually check for updates to review details about any available updates to download updates to see update prices if they are not free to request a quote for updates and to order certain updates gt Accelerator Key Definitions Added to Tooltip Help for Dialog Buttons Tooltip help strings for certain dialog box buttons have been updated to include the accelerator keys which can be used in lieu of the buttons
158. ch will become the current distribution type It can be any integer from 0 150 see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered lt Distr gt is the percentage of total trips generated by the site which are distributed to this distribution type and can be 100 to 100 percent Its default value is 0 it must be entered lt Node gt is the external node number through which all traffic for this distribution type enters or exits the study network and can be 0 999 see note below Its default value is 0 it must be entered lt Node Dir gt is the approach of the external intersection which connects the study network to the external road network and can be the keyword NORTH EAST SOUTH or WEST It has no default value it must be entered lt Descr gt is a set of words which describe what type of traffic is defined by this distribution type usually including whether it is inbound or outbound traffic and which point of the compass or primary travel route the external point of the trips are destined and can be any 30 alphabetic or numeric characters Its default value is 30 blanks Notes The PATHDISTRIBUTION command must first be used to define the current distribution type before the PATHASSIGNMENT command can be used to describe travel paths for the current distribution type All PATHDISTRIBUTIONS must be defined before the FINDPATHS command can be used to assist in the definition of PATHASSIGNMENTS lt
159. characters entered on this command will be overlaid over those of the previously entered NOTE command This overlay will begin at the character position identified by the digits of the first two characters which follow the and will end after the last non blank character which is entered See Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual for further explanation and examples of this feature Entries on this command may be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes This option provides the capability to include leading blanks in the entry which is otherwise not possible This option can also be used to enter a single blank as the title line using a or entry thereby blanking out the entire prior contents of the title line The name of the current open file can be inserted anywhere in the title line by placing F at the desired location of the title line The file name can be placed at a specific column location in a title line by using the XX form of a title entry noted above PREPASSR B 124 Reference NSTOPFACTORS NSTOPFACTORS NSTOPFACTORS 12 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter twelve factors for the current intersection used to adjust the number of stops calculations of the EVALUATE report for example to match the number of stops obtained from a network simulation model for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Stops
160. clusive pedestrian phase via the PEDTIME entry If this is used PREPASSR recognizes this entry when displaying the phasing with TIMINGS by showing the word PEDPHASE in the vertical divider line which separates the two vehicle phases which surround the exclusive ped phase In addition the existence of the ped phase is accounted for when calculating offsets for every interval displayed in the TIMINGS report gt Definition of Up to 9 Special Phasings Allowed Prior versions of PREPASSR allowed up to 5 special phasings to be defined by referencing SEQUENCE codes 1 to 5 With the increase in the maximum number of intersections to 500 the number of special phasings allowed has been increased to 9 through use of the SEQUENCE codes 1 to 9 gt Phasing Diagrams in Dialogs use Better Arrow Representations of Movements Arrows shown in dialog boxes depicting turning movements have been improved in design so they are easier on the eye and more clearly depict the movement intended In addition permitted movements in phasing diagrams in dialogs are depicted with dashed lines for added clarity Also arrows have been added to some dialogs for improved clarity gt Preview of Pending TEAPAC Interface Version 6 Changes Interface Version 5 11 A number of generic enhancements which will appear in all TEAPAC programs as TEAPAC Interface Version 6 are being previewed in PREPASSR Version 2 Licensees of this version will be entitled to receive free updates
161. conds or the minimum cycle of an optimization range and can be any integer from 0 to 900 Its default value is 60 seconds lt Maximum Cycle gt is the largest cycle length in seconds which should be tested by a cycle optimization and can be any positive integer equal to or larger than lt Minimum Cycle gt from 0 900 Its default value is 120 seconds lt Cycle Increment gt is the precision to which the specified cycle length range will be optimized i e the increment of cycle length which will be added to lt Minimum Cycle gt until lt Maximum Cycle gt is exceeded and can be any positive integer from 0 900 Its default value is 30 seconds Notes lt Minimum Cycle gt is the cycle length which is used for PLOT and TIMINGS and for PASSER simulations When a cycle range is used for a PASSER optimization the same logic as the SPLIT OFFSET optimization of PREPASSR is used since PASSER must optimize splits in order to vary the cycle length To implement this option the CYCLE SPL OFF option of the OPTIMIZE command must also be used Although this option of PREPASSR makes the cycle evaluation with PASSER convenient it is recommended that this PASSER option only be used to select a system cycle When the cycle is selected a more robust optimization of splits with SIGNAL2000 should be used followed by the use of PASSER only for offset optimization NOSTOP may also be used for powerful cycle optimization for arterials The
162. cribed below and as illustrated in Figure 1 1 Approach Data When approach information is required and four parameter values are to be entered one for each approach data will be entered starting with the north approach followed by the east south and west approaches approach numbers 1 2 3 and 4 When data is required for a specific approach the approach should be specified using the cardinal direction codes North East South and West meaning from the North from the East etc Turning Movement Data When movement information is required and twelve parameter values are to be entered one for each movement data will be entered starting with the right turn movement on the north approach followed by the through movement and left turn movements on the north approach then continuing with the right through and left on the east south and west approaches movement numbers 1 2 3 up to movement 12 When data is required for a specific movement the movement should be specified using numbers 1 through 12 PREPASSR 6 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Approach 1 from North 3 gt Approach 2 from East Approach 4 from West Approach 3 from South Intersection approach and turning movement data should be entered in the order shown in this figure Figure 1 1 Intersection Approach and Turning Movement Conventions Phasing Sequence Codes All TEAPAC programs which require phas
163. ctions of which up to 20 intersections can be directly EXPORTed Usage Level 3 handles up to 500 intersections Smaller systems can also be defined with these large versions of PREPASSR Usage Level 1 of PREPASSR will only allow the definition of up to 12 intersections for a single analysis As many as four approaches can be analyzed for each intersection as long as they generally follow the geometric layout of two crossing two way streets The primary concern here is that the designated left turns conflict with through movements on the opposite approach as in a normal four way intersection since these are what the pre coded sequences address Sixty four phasings can be handled automatically through use of the standard TEAPAC phase sequence numbering scheme described in Chapter 1 Through use of sequence codes less than 0 and the PHASEMOVEMENTS command completely arbitrary phasings can be handled as long as the rules of describing the phasing are followed for the PHASEMOVEMENTS command PREPASSR_ 29 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES The PASSER program is somewhat comprehensive and not all options of the program can be coded directly with PREPASSR When these options are desired the EXPORTed PASSER input file can be modified to include these features using the PASSER input system which is provided with PASSER II This allows PREPASSR to perform the bulk of the PASSER coding effort and the user to exercise the more detailed aspects of the
164. ctory or by the notation to refer to the parent subdirectory of the current logged subdirectory If no CFG files are located by the program the default location for any file name entered will be the current logged sub directory unless a drive or path is entered in front of the actual file name is placed in front of the actual file name the system PATH will be searched for the file See the detailed discussion of program installation and CFG files in Appendix G for further information lt Next Program gt Option of STOP Command Implemented Also New SHELL Option The lt Next Program gt option of STOP has been implemented allowing the definition of the next program to run when the current program is terminated In order for this function to work the current program must be initiated with the TEAPAC Menu System which is described in detail in Appendix G This is an efficient way to go directly from one program to another It allows the PREPASSR H 290 Reference user to run the next program without returning to the operating system and is also used by the automatic export features of some TEAPAC programs If SHELL is entered in the lt Next Program gt field the running program will remain resident in memory and the user will be allowed to enter any single DOS command to be executed When that DOS task is completed DOS will return control to the original program If more than one DOS command is needed the DOS command for SHE
165. cts the user from accidentally creating a new file when an existing file was expected to exist probably identifying a spelling error in the file name If a requested file does not exist and the N Switch is not used the user will be prompted as to whether to allow the program to create the data file anyway This effectively eliminates the need to use the N Switch the program will create a new file if prompted to do so even when N is not used Conversely if a requested file exists and the N Switch is used the user will be prompted as to whether to allow the program to overwrite the contents of the data file anyway even though it was thought to be a new file In either case a user response of Y eliminates the potential error condition and the program continues with the selected action If N or any other response is made the program processes the condition as an error usually with an opportunity to re enter the bad file specification The O switch is used to designate an Otherwise or dOn t care condition If a data file exists for lt File Name gt the file will be used and possibly overwritten If the data file does not exist a new file will be created under this option This option can also be interpreted as the Output option since it is typically invoked only when the file is to be used for output rather than input This mode creates a file if it is needed or uses one that already exists File Access All file access comma
166. cumentation in Appendix E and F is now displayed in the error box on the screen making it easier to look up the error causes and possible responses in the manual The ERROR display is also now blinking to draw more attention to it particularly on monochrome displays Other status flags such as the ACTIVE WAIT cont and more as well as a new acknol flag are also blinking for better visibility and all such status flags are cleared from the display when they have been acknowledged The SAVE message also includes the file number and the name of the file in which the data has been SAVEd Improved Manual Mode Operations The Manual Mode has been substantially enhanced by removing the archaic DOS editing functions and providing full screen editing capabilities virtually identical to those used in the Menu Mode for full screen editing of entries Full screen editing keys that relate to the multi PREPASSR H 294 Reference line and multi screen displays are simply disabled Another feature which has been added to the Manual Mode is a five line memory of the last five non blank Manual Mode commands which have been entered For example if a DESIGN 120 2 command is issued but the results indicate that a VOLUME has not been entered correctly a VOLUME command can be issued then the previous DESIGN 120 2 entry can be recalled simply by pressing the up arrow twice Manual commands which are entered or recalled from memory can now be easily e
167. current data Once satisfied with the accuracy of the input data use the TIMINGS command in the Results menu to execute a PREPASSR analysis Results TIMINGS The TIMINGS command produces a report which summarizes the current timings and calculates the offsets to the beginning of green and beginning of yellow for all phases These calculations can be useful in implementing the timings in the field A complete phase diagram is also displayed to clarify which phase each timing belongs to The PLOT command is another useful command which displays a time space diagram for the selected nodes in the NODELIST As an example of this option type the following Results PLOT 500 The PLOT command generates a time space diagram for the current timings The horizontal axis represents time in percent of cycle and the vertical axis is distance in feet Note that the PLOT command has two parameter values lt Scale gt and lt List of Nodes gt In the above analysis the time space diagram was plotted for all nodes in the node list at a scale of 500 feet per line The EXPORT command is used to create an input data file for the PASSER program The OPTIMIZE command instructs the EXPORT as to what type of optimization is desired Basic gt OPTIMIZE OFFSETS Results EXPORT AUTO YES Note that while the EXPORT is in process the program displays on the screen what is being written into the file The file is ready to be used wit
168. d i e un nested See the detailed discussion of the various possible uses of the REPEAT loops and control files in Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual PREPASSR B 147 Reference REQCLEARANCES REQCLEARANCES REQCLEARANCES 12 lt Required Clearance gt Defaults 12 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the clearance times required for each movement of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Required Clearance gt is the clearance time required for each movement in seconds and can be any number from 0 to 99 9 Its default value is 4 0 Notes Required clearance times are used only by DESIGN to determine how much clearance time is needed to terminate each phase This clearance time includes both yellow and all red clearance ANALYZE and EVALUATE use the clearance times specified on the YELLOWTIMES command regardless of the values on REQCLEARANCES It is important to make sure that YELLOWTIMES and REQCLEARANCES entries are always kept consistent with each other especially when converting Timings by Phase to Timings by Movement and when exporting to third party ring based software PREPASSR B 148 Reference RESET RESET RESET lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to reset the parameters of the specified commands to their default values lt List of Commandss
169. d gt is the the travel speed in miles per hour approaching the node for the approach specified and can be any number from 0 to 65 Its default value is 0 lt Node gt is the upstream node number for the approach specified and can be any node number defined in the system and usually but not necessarily in the specified node list from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 lt Movement gt is the movement number at the specified upstream node which provides traffic flow to the current intersection and can be O or 1 12 Its default value is 0 see discussion below lt Assignment Methods is the method to be used to assign upstream volumes to downstream links and can be DEFAULT FULL or LIMITED Its default value is DEFAULT lt Curvature gt is curvature of the link from the perspective of the driver approaching the intersection and can be NONE RIGHT or LEFT Its default value is NONE lt Manual Distance gt is a flag which identifies if the upstream distance above has been entered manually and is intentionally inconsistent with the network scale and can be NO or YES Its default value is NO Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa PREPASSR B 118
170. d in Chapter 4 or Appendix B of the program documentation Most commands will re prompt for parameter entry after this error After the error is issued the invalid entries will be ignored The parameter list can also be re typed starting at the position where invalid entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed as usual Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the parameter values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode it is recommended that the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TEAPAC F 216 Reference TPC36 WARNING Node xx used in xxxxxxXxxxxxxxxx entry is not in NODELIST When a node number is entered which is not included in the NODELIST certain functions are not likely to perform properly These include PATHDISTRIBUTION PATHASSIGNMENT GENRATION and ASSIGNMENT Other entries such as NETWORK and MASTERNODE permit the entry of node numbers not included in the current NODELIST SUBSYSTEM Action In the cases where the entered node number is expected to be included in the NODELIST either add the intersection to the NODELIST if appropriate or change the entry so it uses an intersection number already in the NODELIST TPC41 WARNING INVALID COMMAND IGNORED This error message indicates that an invalid command u
171. d the SIZE command could never be executed PREPASSR_ B 167 Reference TIMINGS TIMINGS TIMINGS lt List of Nodes gt Defaults lt Nodelist gt Menus Groups RESULTS IMPORT The purpose of this command is to display the phasing and timings defined for each intersection in the list of nodes including the system offset value lt List of Nodes gt is a list of node numbers to be displayed and can be any number in the specified NODELIST or the negative value of any defined ROUTE number Its default value is all nodes in the NODELIST or SUBSYSTEM in the specified order Notes VOLUMES must be defined for each intersection in order that the phasing diagram which is displayed shows the actual movements which move during each phase The NETWORK WIDTHS and SATURATIONFLOWS need not be entered for TIMINGS to operate properly Route numbers can be referenced by use of negative numbers on the TIMINGS command to quickly identify routes for display For example if ROUTE 1 is defined by an appropriate ROUTE command a TIMINGS for this route can be created through the use of the TIMINGS 1 command PREPASSR B 168 Reference TRUCKCOUNTS TRUCKCOUNTS TRUCKCOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Defaults none zeros Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the count of trucks for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection lt Movement or Time gt is
172. d to PASSER in Usage Level 2 and 3 versions of PREPASSR These procedures as well as other important elements of the complete use of the PREPASSR program are discussed in detail in Chapters 3 4 and 5 and should be addressed as soon as you are comfortable with the basic elements discussed in this initial example PREPASSR_ 26 Tutorial CHAPTER 3 Analysis Procedures Chapter 3 Topics Having stepped through the example problem in Chapter 2 it is now possible to discuss in greater detail the actual procedures and entries used to perform analyses using the PREPASSR program This chapter discusses the minimum input requirements to conduct a reasonable analysis as well as practical limitations of the program Then appropriate analysis procedures are explained This chapter is designed to fully explain the operation of the PREPASSR program and provide additional understanding of the example shown in Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Topics Chapter 3 Introduction Input Requirements Analysis Procedures Input Requirements This section discusses the basic input requirements for PREPASSR It begins with a discussion of the minimum input requirements to produce various reports and then discusses the limitations to data input which exist This section is quite important in that it sets the minimum information for valid results as well as the limitations of the program Minimum Input Requirements Input Limitations Minim
173. d to indicate the desire to create a New file but the file named is not found a message to this effect will be issued At this point the user will be given the opportunity to say that the file should be created anyway This action is presented in the form of a warning message but is a valid way of creating new files without using the N switch If the N switch is used but the file named already exists a message to this effect is issued and the user is given an option to use the existing file anyway if desired e The default location for user data files is defined in the dialog opened by the Options Setup menu The Options Setup dialog changes dynamically as the user navigates through the File Open and File SaveAs dialogs and the current contents of the dialog can be saved at any time in the program s CFG file by pressing the Save button in the Options Setup dialog This will cause this saved location to be the default file location the next and subsequent times the program is run until a PREPASSR B 91 Reference FILES FILES new location is saved See the detailed discussion of program installation and CFG files in Appendix G PREPASSR B 92 Reference GENERATION GENERATION GENERATION lt Direction gt lt Generation Rate gt 10 lt Node Dir gt Defaults 0 000 10 lt 0 gt Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC GENERATOR The purpose of this command is to enter the traffic generation rates and access points and access direc
174. dded to LinkTo Menu A pending new TEAPAC program call PRENOSTOP which interfaces the NOSTOP program to the data of other TEAPAC programs such as this program and SIGNAL2000 has been added to the LinkTo menu gt Further Enhancements to Ver 5 1x Interface If a NODELIST entry is read from a Shared file the new NODELIST is appended to the current NODELIST instead of replacing it This effectively allows the merging of separate data files to create a larger system Caution must be used when one file is already open in a program and another file is opened that was not created by the current program since this file will automatically be Open Shared and thus appended if it has a different NODELIST If an INTERSECTION entry is read from a Shared file and is not in the current NODELIST it is automatically appended to the end of the NODELIST As with NODELIST above this makes the Shared function effectively an automatic Merge function Duplicate nodes encountered in a NODELIST entry or an appended NODELIST are ignored The File OpenShared menu item has been changed to File OpenMerge Shared to better indicate the fuction which this type of Open normally performs PREPASSR _ H 257 Reference When a LinkTo function prompts the user to save changed data before the LinkTo is performed and a new path file name is given this path file name is used by the LinkTo function If no file has been provided the LinkTo function performs properly with a linkag
175. de Street FFFFFFFF LLLLLLLL EEEEEEEE PREPASSR D 196 Reference PREPASSR TEAPAC Timings for Intersection xx The Timings for Intersection XX report generated using the TIMINGS command provides a summary of the current phasings and timings This report can be used to summarize the original signal timings used for the PASSER evaluation or the final timings generated by a PASSER optimization The report summarizes the timings in both seconds and percent similar to the PASSER output However it also provides a phase diagram and cumulative splits and offsets calculated for each phase both green and yellow intervals which is not included by the PASSER program Sequence A two digit code representing the phase sequencing of the traffic signal The sequence code is actually two codes the first digit indicates the phasing of the north south movements while the second digit indicates the phasing of the east west movements For additional information see the diagram of sequence codes used by all TEAPAC programs in Chapter 1 Leadlags This indicates whether turning phases lead ahead of or lag behind the through phase in multi phase signal operation The north south Leadlag condition is the first value and the east west is the second value both separated by a slash LD LEAD indicates a leading multi phase condition LG LAG indicates a lagging multi phase condition and NO NONE indicates no leading or lagging condition If NO NONE app
176. decimal number not in the accepted range TPC36 WARNING node number not in NODELIST Command as Parameter Errors TPC41 WARNING INVALID COMMAND IGNORED TPC42 WARNING too many commands listed on this command TPC43 WARNING AMBIGUOUS ENTRY IGNORED Demonstration Errors TPC44 ERROR AUTO Export not allowed for demo TPC45 ERROR only one file can be opened at a time for demo TPC46 ERROR use of printer not allowed for demo TPC47 ERROR writing to disk not allowed for demo TPC48 ERROR allowed input range limited for demo TPC49 ERROR default values cannot be changed for demo TEAPAC F 210 Reference Table F 1 continued Summary of TEAPAC System Error Messages Command Specific Errors TPC51 ERROR GOTO variable does not match current REPEAT TPC52 ERROR ERROR IN PROGRAM SPECIFICATION TPC53 ERROR REPEAT specification is not valid TPC54 ERROR PERIODS allows only 5 distinct time period ranges TPC55 ERROR PERIODS time period 2nd entry occurs before Ist TPC56 ERROR PERIODS time value entered is not a valid time entry TPC57 ERROR PERIODS time periods entered define too many entries TPC58 ERROR PERIODS time periods entered cannot overlap TPCS59 ERROR COUNTS VEHICLE or TRUCK too many entries TPC60 ERROR COUNTS VEHICLE or TRUCK
177. dexed manual on line as Help file Ability to create and run batch script macro type control files Ability to drag a data or control file from Explorer to the running TEAPAC program Free program updates via Internet downloads Complete data file compatibility between old new DOS and Windows versions Complete Y2K compliance Updates for the new TEAPAC2000 Interface can be downloaded from the www StrongConcepts com internet web page at no charge for users who hold an up to date Windows license for PREPASSR These downloads are available to the general public but will be rendered as demos for those who do not qualify for the free update PREPASSR Ver 1 52 27AUG98 gt TEAPAC Interface Ver 3 03 Changes Made A unique new licensing technique has been implemented in the Ver 3 03 Interface which will allow users to download free updates of TEAPAC programs from the Internet without the need for pre arranged passwords or download codes When the demos found at the Strong Concepts homepage are run on the users system the licensed Usage Level will be automatically enabled The licensing also allows either Win16 or Win32 operation from the same license both of which will be available along with the DOS based version of each program on CD ROM distribution The SaveAs function will now report that a selected file name already exists asking if it should be overwritten Also the brief window giving feedback about the successful Save
178. different content for most TEAPAC programs This conflict and impediment for combining all the TEAPAC data into a single file for TEAPAC2004 has been resolved by having a common OUTPUT dialog for all PREPASSR_ H 253 Reference programs which contains the OUTPUT parameters for all TEAPAC programs In the manual mode and control files this involves the addition of a new parameter 1 which is the name of the program for which the following values apply and thus all OUTPUT parameters for all programs are stored in the file and displayed in the dialog gt T2004v6 Wording on Dialogs Used by Multiple Programs Improved The wording on dialogs which are used by multiple programs in TEAPAC2004 have been clarified so that it is more apparent what the relevance is to the current program in which the dialog is found gt T2004v6 NODELIST Entry Protected from Change in Tabular View The only safe place to change the NODELIST after it has been entered is in the Normal View NODELIST dialog so the NODELIST entry in the Tabular View has been greyed and protected from change to avoid unintended changes and possible disastrous results gt T2004v6 Options Setup Uses Browse for Folder not Browse for File The Browse button in the Options Setup dialog now produces a Browse for Folder dialog instead of the File Open dialog so it is more clear what the function will return gt T2004v6 Dialog Actions Re ROUTEs with 9 Nodes Fixed Including Save Cert
179. digits When cumulative counts are being reduced if the difference is negative the counter turned over the 9999 mark to 0000 TURNS automatically adds 10 000 to the negative result PREPASSR_ B 173 Reference VOLADDITIONALS VOLADDITIONALS VOLADDITIONALS lt AddFactor gt 12 lt Additional Volume gt Defaults 1 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the factor and additional volume to be added for each movement at the current intersection lt AddFactor gt is the factor which is multiplied by each lt Additional Volume gt entered to get the total additional volume added to each movement and can be any number from 0 0 to 20 0 Its default value is 0 00 no additional volumes added lt Additional Volume gt is a volume of additional traffic to be added to the entered volumes as adjusted by the lt AddFactor gt and can be any number from 9999 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes Normally lt AddFactor gt will have a value of 0 0 or 1 0 to disable or enable respectively any lt Additional Volumes gt which have been entered without the need to actually change the lt Additional Volume gt entries This feature makes it easy to add and remove additional volumes from an analysis lt AddFactor gt may also be used as a multiplier for the lt Additional Volumes gt for easy testing of incremental values of additional volumes See the discussion in Appendix C Calculati
180. dit menu The PREPASSR program has three basic modes of operation one where an export of input values to PASSER is desired another where phasing and timing diagrams for each intersection is desired and a third where a time space diagram of input conditions is desired The input requirements for these three modes are noticeably different and thus are discussed below in separate sections EXPORT Inputs The EXPORT mode means that a complete set of conditions are given in order for the program to code these inputs for PASSER and produce a complete and valid PASSER model This means that the NODELIST command must be entered for the system to define the intersection numbers which will be used Then for each INTERSECTION the NETWORK VOLUMES WIDTHS SATURATIONFLOWS and SEQUENCES commands must be entered After defining for which INTERSECTION the following inputs will apply the NETWORK command describes the speed and distance relationship of the intersections the VOLUMES describes the demand volumes for each of the 12 possible turning movements and the WIDTHS and SATURATIONFLOWS describes the lane use configuration and capacities of each The SEQUENCES command is used to specify the phasing according to the sequence code method discussed in Chapter 1 If a simulation of given conditions is desired this is indicated with the OPTIMIZE command NONE a simulation is the default and GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES must be given for each phase as well as
181. dited with cursor keys before the ENTER key is pressed using the Menu Mode editing keys including the new keys described above For example the DESIGN 120 2 can be quickly changed to DESIGN 130 2 by recalling it and then editing it before ENTER is pressed The Manual Mode editing line now also displays the status of the INSert mode next to the display of the PRINTR status The F4 key can now be used not only to go to the Menu Mode from the Manual Mode but also to go to the Manual Mode from any display in the Menu Mode If a field entry has been changed immediately prior to pressing the F4 key this is equivalent to first pressing the END key before the F4 key In other words any full screen display entry is made before the Manual Mode is entered Also when going to the Manual Mode in any fashion a message is displayed indicating how to return to the Menu Mode in case the Manual Mode was inadvertently selected New Options for Header Information A number of improvements to the information which is displayed in the screen header block have been made for clearer understanding and representation of the program s status First the PRINTR flag is not displayed in the header block if the display is a result of an action in the Manual Mode except if the ASK command was used so that upon return to the Manual Mode at the end of the action the header block does not display an inaccurate status of the printer The header block also displays the curren
182. dummy nodes eliminating the garbage that could potentially be displayed in its place in the View Summary or Summarise output report gt Plot amp Timings only check for valid data of intersections to be plotted listed The Plot and Timings actions will now only check that data entries appear valid for nodes to be plotted or timings listed rather than all nodes in the defined network This allows portions of a large network to be plotted or timings listed before data for the entire network has been entered gt Widen timing field in TIMINGS report to allow intervals over 99 9 seconds long PREPASSR_ H 234 Reference The display fields for the TIMINGS output report have been increased so that timing intervals with values larger than 99 9 seconds can be displayed properly gt Generic changes made to all Ver 7 81 TEAPAC programs Allow negative percentage on ASSIGNMENT for Passbys and Diverted trips Use Shift while dragging mouse to define development area on network display Dialogs identify need for consistency between Yellowtimes amp ReqClearances Display dummy node dot and node number if it is current node or in Subsystem Note in CrdSysMgmt dialog that NewLinkDist button assumes coords are in feet Able to save from OpenIntoEdit if it was first file opened into program NOTE shows Issue X Not Selected when case selection does not select an Issue File OpenMerge does not allow existing Network data to be overwritten by zeros F
183. e identical to the descriptions provided by the Help Commands menu and the HELP command The descriptions identify the names and number of parameter values along with any default values Appendix B DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AND ENTRIES Appendix B provides complete detail regarding the PREPASSR commands and their associated parameter values All PREPASSR commands are listed in this section Five categories of information are provided for each command 1 Format 2 Function 3 Parameters 4 Group Names and 5 Notes This appendix provides specific details on how to use a PREPASSR command and what if any limitations exist on the associated parameter values The Note category provides useful hints on the use of the command Appendix C ANALYSIS METHODS AND FORMULATIONS Appendix C discusses the methods and formulae used by the PREPASSR program to calculate results Using the procedures discussed in this appendix it is possible to manually recreate the results calculated by PREPASSR PREPASSR 51 Reference Appendix D REPORT DESCRIPTIONS AND EXAMPLES Appendix D describes the reports generated by the PREPASSR program In addition sample output is provided for each type of report generated by the PREPASSR program The elements of each report are described in detail Appendix E ERROR MESSAGES AND TROUBLE SPOTS Appendix E describes program specific error messages of the PREPASSR program the potential cause of such errors and po
184. e PEAKHOURFACTORS entry PHF is then used to estimate the flow rate v during the peak 15 minutes of the hour for which the average hourly volume is entered v V PHF where v analysis flow rate during peak 15 minutes of the hour vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the hour vehicles per hour PHF 15 minute peak hour factor ratio of average flow to peak 15 minute flow If the actual peak 15 minute flow rate vph is known and entered as the VOLUMES entry e g a 15 minute count multiplied by four then the PEAKHOURFACTORS entry should be set to 1 0 so that v V above and the entered VOLUME will become the analysis flow rate In order to facilitate sensitivity and alternative analyses the VOLUMES entry can be modified by two other related entries First the VOLFACTORS entry can be used to multiply each VOLUMES entry by a factor This is simply a multiplicative factor either to inflate or deflate PREPASSR C 181 Reference the entered volume It is entered in such a way that it can also be interpreted as a growth factor if such an interpretation is appropriate First a number of years N is entered which applies to all VOLFACTORS for the intersection then individual factors fy are given for each movement The entry for number of years N is actually the number of times the individual factors fy will be compounded in which case the entered factor fy can be more generally interpreted as a periodic gr
185. e automatically generated each time a new lane width is given on a WIDTHS command The number of lanes generated is defined by the tens digit of the approach width in feet Approach widths of less than ten feet and greater than zero are assumed to have one lane Thus usage of the LANES command is necessary only for those lanes where this assumption of number of lanes is not appropriate This input has no effect on PREPASSR calculations but appears for compatibility with other TEAPAC programs such as SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM PREPASSR B 106 Reference LEADLAGS LEADLAGS LEADLAGS 2 lt Lead Lag Phasing gt Defaults 2 NONE Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION IMPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the order of the phases particularly in multiphase operation of the current intersection lt Lead Lag Phasing gt is the keyword which in multi phase operation specifies whether the exclusive phase s usually turning phase precede s or follow s the through phase and can be any of the following NONE no exclusive turn phase s exist or if they do they LEAD default LEAD exclusive turn phase s precede s the through phase LAG exclusive turn phase s follow s the through phase Notes The first lt Lead Lag Phasing gt is used for the north south movements the second for east west movements In split phase operation NONE or LEAD indicates the north east movement precedes the south w
186. e data In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the INTERSECTION command PPS03 WARNING An INTERSECTION number must be given before this DATA can be listed This warning indicates that a request has been made to display the current DATA values for an INTERSECTION command prior to defining which intersection this data is requested for Action Use the INTERSECTION command to first define the intersection number DATA is desired for then re enter the DATA request In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the INTERSECTION command PPS04 ERROR The number of nodes in the LINKLIST exceeds the maximum of the program XXX This error indicates that when the LINKLIST command was processed to create the links to be simulated the program limit of XXX simulation links was exceeded Action Break up the system into two or more smaller sub systems or don t use the LINKLIST to specify the links you want simulated This error only applies to PRETRANSYT PREPASSR E 202 Reference PPS05 ERROR This INTERSECTION number is not in the NODELIST Re enter or add to NODELIST This error indicates that the INTERSECTION command was executed using a node number that was not in the NODELIST Action If the node number desired is already in the NODELIST re execute the INTERSECTION command using the proper node number If the node number is disturb any of the intersection entries already made t
187. e of LEART and its associated ARTDATA file it appears that LEART ignores the IOSPEC file and always utilizes the ARTDATA file in the main PASSER directory if it exists In order to minimize the potential for using the wrong ARTDATA file the IOSPEC DAT file is now created such that the ARTDATA file is placed in the main PASSER directory gt TEAPAC Interface Ver 3 01 Changes Made Minor changes which are now incorporated into Ver 3 01 of the standard TEAPAC Interface have been implemented in PREPASSR These include the following changes and enhancements In Windows versions of PREPASSR data files can be dragged from other applications like Windows Explorer or File Manager and dropped on the main window of a running copy of WinPREPASSR This is equivalent to using the File Open dialog of the program for the dragged file The maximum size of file names including the path defined in the CFG file has been increased to 64 characters Under the Win32 version of WinPREPASSR the defined paths may now also have embedded blanks although this is not recommended Actual file names should still be 11 characters or less including Win32 versions and any embedded blanks for a SaveAs name will be replaced by the underscore character since embedded blanks are still not permitted in file names Note that if SAVEd files are renamed to include more than 11 characters or embedded blanks the shortened 8 3 file name displayed by the DIR command of the Command
188. e process is aborted upon execution of the next file access command Action Re issue the file access command which was aborted this error will clear all file access or eliminate the situation which requires more than six levels of file access TPC16 WARNING This file name does not exist Create a file by this name No Yes This error message occurs when the requested lt File Name gt on the FILES command does not exist Typically this occurs when the File Switch for a new file was not used and the file cannot be located as specified see Appendix G File Specification For example if no Switch is designated and the file does not currently exist then the warning message will be displayed to indicate that the file will need to be created if it has been specified properly This condition normally occurs if the name of an existing file is misspelled on the FILES command or a request has been made to use a non existent file In either case this message prevents a new file from inadvertently being created if this was not the intention Action The program is prompting the user whether the non existent file should be created as if the N switch had been used By responding Y to this prompt the file name used will be created and the error condition is erased If any other character is pressed then the file name will not be created and the user should re specify the correctly spelled file name TPC17 ERROR Read write error at line x
189. e same TEAPAC program being used created the file and that earlier version saved information in a different manner such that data loss may occur The authoring program s name version and build numbers are listed in the warning message Action The program is prompting the user whether the existing data in the file should be overwritten anyway By responding Y to this prompt the file will be used as specified with the possible loss of prior data values If any other character is pressed then the file named will not be overwritten and the user should re specify a different file name as appropriate and re specify the save operation desired TPC22 WARNING This Save appears inconsistent with prior Advanced file usage Save anyway This message indicates that a save operation has been requested for a file using a normal Windows menu such as File Save where it appears that such a save might be inconsistent with prior advanced file usage techniques applied to this same file Primarily this is detected when the most recent file activity was to a different location in the file or to a different file In such a case a normal Windows save function such as File Save which will go to line 1 of file 1 is anticipated to be an inadvertant save which might not be desired by the user Action This condition is merely a warning to prevent a possible overwrite of data in an advanced use file The program is prompting the user whether the save should be perfor
190. e than a dozen integrated programs are included in TEAPAC all of which use the same basic user interface and procedures to direct the actions of the programs In addition these programs share the same characteristics with regard to data entry conventions and storage format for data files This allows convenient and efficient sharing of information between programs PREPASSR is one of the programs within the TEAPAC program package PREPASSR is designed to aid in the use of the PASSER II arterial signal optimization program PREPASSR is an interactive preprocessor program which is used to prepare input data in a fixed format for the PASSER program Besides allowing easy to understand free format input PREPASSR also provides for error checking prior to executing the PASSER program As a postprocessor for PASSER it also plots time space diagrams of existing and optimized results as well as displays signal timing diagrams that are easy to read for timing implementation in the field In order to illustrate these features an initial example for the PREPASSR program has been created By following the step by step instructions contained in Chapter 2 of this manual you will become familiar with the basic PREPASSR commands and procedures If unfamiliar with the TEAPAC package in general review of the tutorial section Chapters 1 4 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual will increase the speed and effectiveness of learning the PREPASSR program Chapter 1
191. e to be executed is different than the name expected by PREPASSR such as when the version of PASSER differs from the most recent supported version the executable file name to be used can be added at the end of the path entry PREPASSR Trouble Spots A number of common problems occur when people are first using PREPASSR or as they begin to attempt more advanced applications This section provides a limited discussion of these types of problems that have been identified If other such problems occur jot them down in this part of the manual then contact Strong Concepts so that they may be updated in future issues of the manual and immediate solutions or workarounds can be developed for you This approach will also allow for future versions of the program to account for these trouble spots to the degree possible Lane Group WIDTH Designation Phasing SEQUENCE Designations INTERSECTION Command Lane Group WIDTH Designation The WIDTHS command is a powerful command that designates both the width of a lane group as well as its lane usage As such it can be initially confusing but ultimately provides a powerful and easy to use means of identifying this information in a simple and concise manner The first thing to recognize is that if a non zero WIDTH appears in a through lane group slot this WIDTH can be used by any vehicles on the approach The only limitation is that turning vehicles that have designated exclusive turn lane WIDT
192. e to investigate any time periods which follow over saturated periods and thus have initial queue values to see if the delay in these periods exceeds the over saturated time period s If an initial queue cannot be observed where it is known by observation or analysis that a given time period is over saturated it is possible to estimate the initial queue for a given period by assessing the unsatisfied demand of a previous time period This unsatisfied demand is displayed near the bottom of the Level of Service Worksheet as well as the Initial Queue Delay Worksheet and is labelled Final Queue If this method of estimating the initial queue value is used care should be exercised in recognition of the accumulated error which might exist each time an estimated Final Queue value is transferred to the next analysis period as an Initial Queue PREPASSR _ B 103 Reference INTERSECTION INTERSECTION INTERSECTION lt Node Numbers lt Description gt Defaults 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION IMPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the node number and description of the current intersection as defined for the complete signal network lt Node Numbers is a unique intersection number assigned to the intersection and can be any integer from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 no intersection is specified lt Description gt is the information describing the intersection and can be up to 30 alphanumeric charact
193. e to the next rpogram but without any data transfer PREPASSR Ver 2 00 02FEB03 Build 54 05JUN03 gt New Build for Consistency with New SIGNAL2000 and PRESYNCHRO Build 54 has been created for consistent numbering with new builds of SIGNAL2000 and PRESYNCHRO No other changes have been made to the program in this build Build 52 04JUNO3 gt EXPORT AUTO Allows Data Files Located In Paths with Spaces in Name for P2 02 EXPORT AUTO did not communicate properly with PASSER I 02 in Build 50 when user data files were located in folders which had spaces in the path name This condition is now handled properly gt Convert ByPhase to ByMov Uses Reqclearances to Maintain Individual Y AR The Convert button on the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES dialogs has been modified so that when ByPhase timings are converted to ByMovement the REQCLEARANCES values for each movement are used to define the ByMovement clearances rather than using the ByPhase phase clearances This permits individual movements to maintain distinctly different clearance times regardless of how many timnes the Convert button is used To this end entries of ByMovement clearance times in the YELLOWTIMES dialog are always transferred directly to the REQCLEARANCES dialog and REQCLEARANCES entries are transferred directly to the YELLOWTIMES dialog if timings are ByMovement gt Dummy Nodes Are Ignored by TIMINGS Report Any intersection identified as a Dummy node in the INTERS
194. e use of PASSER PREPASSR_ ii Manual ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The PREPASSR program was developed by and is presently supported by and undergoing continued development by Dennis W Strong of Strong Concepts The PREPASSR Tutorial Reference Manual was written by and is presently being enhanced and maintained by Dennis W Strong of Strong Concepts PASSER II is a program which was developed and copyrighted by the Texas Transportation Institute PASSER is a registered trademark of the Texas Transportation Institute PASSER II is currently distributed by the McTrans Center in Gainesville Florida and PC TRANS in Lawrence Kansas This document the PREPASSR Tutorial Reference Manual is provided as a part of the license to use PREPASSR TEAPAC References in this document are made to other documents which are not included with the PREPASSR program and are available from various sources In particular references are made to the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual which is available from Strong Concepts This document applies generically to all TEAPAC programs and describes the details of and advanced usage procedures for the common interface used by all TEAPAC programs Reference is also made to the PASSER II Manual and M O S T Volume 3 available from the McTrans Center and PC TRANS Comments on the usefulness and organization of the program and this document are welcome as continual updates and improvements are being made Please direct your comments to
195. e volumes of stopping buses which stop on each approach of the current intersection UPSTREAMVC 4 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt Enter the v c ratio of the upstream intersection for each approach of the current intersection MOVLABELS 12 lt Movement Label gt Enter abbreviated labels for each movement of the current intersection UTILIZATIONS 12 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt Enter the lane utilization factor for each movement of the current intersection ARRIVALTYPES 12 lt Quality of Progression gt Enter the quality of progression for each movement of the current intersection REQCLEARANCES 12 lt Required Clearance gt Enter the clearance times required for each movement of the current intersection INITIALQUEVE 12 lt Initial Queue Size gt Enter the number of vehicles queued at the intersection at the start of the analysis period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection IDEALSATFLOWS 12 lt Ideal Saturation Flow Rate gt Enter the base ideal saturation flow rate for each movement of the current intersection PREPASSR_ 41 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS FACTORS 12 lt Satflow Adjustment Factor gt Enter satflow adjustment factors for each movement of the current intersection to adjust 2000 Highway Capacity Manual satflow computations DELAYFACTORS 12 lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt Enter factors for each movement of the current intersection used to adjust the de
196. ears for a multi phase sequence this is equivalent to a LD LEAD condition Phasing Diagram The body of the phasing diagram shows the movements which move during each phase Each movement is represented by a group of asterisk characters with an arrow head character which indicates whether the movement is straight through turns right or turns left Cycle Length This is the cycle length in seconds for the individual signal Typically there is only one cycle length for all signals in the system the system cycle however a signal may be double cycled making its cycle length half of the overall system cycle length In the event of a double cycle condition the half cycle value is displayed Phase sec Phase times the sum of the green and yellow intervals for each phase are displayed in both seconds and percent both with one decimal place of accuracy These values are also displayed rounded to the nearest second and percent for implementation on systems which require such rounding If rounding error causes these rounded values not to add up to the cycle length or 100 percent the cumulated error is placed in the phase with the most allocated time Interval sec The individual interval times for the green and clearance intervals in seconds and percent of cycle The clearance interval includes the yellow clearance and any all red for a given phase PREPASSR_ D 197 Reference Cumulative sec The cumulative interval t
197. ected from the Edit menu then the VOLUMES item should be selected and the values entered each followed by TAB then the Execute button In the Manual Mode following the command prompt simply enter the VOLUMES 225 665 165 information followed by a single ENTER key or the OK button The result is the same in either case VOLUMES values are set to the three values listed When an ellipsis appears in this document this indicates that the additional input fields which are displayed in the Visual Mode need not be entered thus using any current default values which are displayed In the Manual Mode the ellipsis is ignored and should not be typed thus retaining any current default values which may exist If an asterisk appears separated from other characters this means to skip over the input field for the asterisk to use retain that field s current default value Parameter Symbols When discussing the use of PREPASSR entries in the documentation or in using HELP in the program descriptions of parameter values to be entered for each command will be shown enclosed by the angle bracket symbols lt and gt A typical command keyword and parameter value HELP line is shown below FILES 5 lt File Name gt In this example FILES is the command keyword or menu selection to be used The 5 indicates that up to five lt File Name gt parameter values may be entered in the Visual Mode or on an input line In the Manual Mode these foll
198. ed This can be used to select a bitmap background file in the data file folder as an alternative to simply typing the file name in the entry field gt V7 00 14 INTERSECTION Dialog Options Added The INTERSECTION dialog which is used to select the current node has been significantly enhanced with several new features as follows A check box enables the inclusion of dummy nodes in the drop down list so dummy nodes can be selected from the dialog and nodes in the drop down list can be ordered in any of three arrangements the order they appear in the NODELIST numeric order by node number or alphabetic order by intersection description PREPASSR_ H 241 Reference On a related note the network display is now updated any time a new current intersection is selected including when it is entered from the Manual Mode when it is entered from file input etc Also when a dummy node is selected as the current node it is always highlighted in the network display even when the zoom level is such that other dummy nodes are not displayed gt V7 00 14 Option Added to Delete All References to Deleted Node When a node is deleted or cut from the network either from the main window network display or from the NODELIST dialog a prompt to verify the deletion is now always issued and the prompt now includes a new option to include the deletion of all other references to the deleted node elsewhere in the network The option to delete all reference
199. eens with a single keystroke combination Ctrl Page Up and Ctrl Page Down When any data input screen is displayed the current intersection can be incremented or decremented up and down the NODELIST by pressing the Page Down or Page Up keys while holding the Control key down Although the INTERSECTION command can still be used to select any intersection in the nodelist this new shortcut is usually faster unless the next intersection desired is a long way up or down the nodelist Caution should be used to not press Ctrl Page Up Down immediately after changing a data value on a screen display because PREPASSR_ H 278 Reference that data value will not be entered First use TAB or ENTER to enter the value then use Ctrl Page Up Down gt New Option on Timings Allows Selection of Nodes to List A new option on the TIMINGS command allows a list of nodes to be entered up to 25 nodes for which timings are to be listed As before if the list is omitted the default list is the entire SUBSYSTEM If the SUBSYSTEM command is not used the default is the complete NODELIST If a negative number is entered as the first and only entry this is interpreted as the route number of a previously entered ROUTE for which TIMINGS are to be listed gt Name of Automatic EXPORT Data Files Changed from TEMPPSR to TMPPSR The name of the temporary data files used by the AUTO option of the EXPORT command have been changed from TEMPPSR to TMPPSR This is an i
200. eference UTILIZATIONS UTILIZATIONS UTILIZATIONS 12 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt Defaults 12 0 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the lane utilization factor for each movement of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Lane Utilization Factor gt allows the specification of non uniform lane usage and can be any number from 0 00 to 1 00 Its default value is 0 00 see below Notes If an input value of 0 00 is made the default this indicates a desire by the user for the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual default values to be used e Specifying a value of 1 00 indicates the desire to evaluate the overall performance of the lane group not the heaviest traveled lane of the lane group Lane utilizations are used to determine the adjusted saturation flow rate for use in the v c and delay calculations as well as queues As such caution should be used in applying lane utilization factors substantially less than 1 00 since in these cases the analysis is only valid for the heaviest traveled lane not the entire lane group and this aspect of the analysis may be overlooked by those looking at the analysis summary PREPASSR B 172 Reference VEHICLECOUNTS VEHICLECOUNTS VEHICLECOUNTS lt Movement or Time gt lt List of Counts gt Defaults none zeros Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the count of veh
201. egative the counter turned over the 9999 mark to 0000 TURNS automatically adds 10 000 to the negative result PREPASSR B 169 Reference TRUCKPERCENTS TRUCKPERCENTS TRUCKPERCENTS 12 lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt Defaults 12 2 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the truck and through bus heavy vehicle traffic percentage for each movement of the current intersection lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt is the percentage of trucks and through buses in each movement volume and can be any number from 0 to 99 9 Its default value is 2 0 Notes This input has no effect on PREPASSR calculations but appears for compatibility with other TEAPAC programs such as SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM PREPASSR B 170 Reference UPSTREAMVC UPSTREAMVC UPSTREAMVC 4 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt Defaults 4 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the v c ratio of the upstream intersection for each approach of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Upstream v c Ratio gt is the v c ratio of the upstream intersection and can be any number from 0 0 to 3 0 Its default value is 0 Notes Note that although many intersections in a network may be entered into SIGNAL2000 the upstream v c is a user entry and is not determined by the program based conditions in other parts of the network PREPASSR B 171 R
202. egments The Setup button can be used to identify the bitmap scale the bitmap and establish an axis origin either before the network is drawn or afterwards for pre existing data files Special display adjustment modes allow quick re orientation to new bitmaps such as when using higher resolution bitmaps for a zoomed in study area versus a regional area bitmap Dummy nodes are automatically created to orient external legs of intersections around the periphery of the study network and internal dummy bend nodes are easily created for better network representation between analysis intersections Proper treatment of all dummy nodes externals and bends are fully integrated into all of the TEAPAC application programs as well as the eleven third party programs to which TEAPAC analyses can be exported Dummy nodes do not count against the maximum number of intersections allowed by each Usage Level Intersections and dummy nodes are easily moved within the network by simply dragging them across the grid or bitmap with the option to freeze the associated link distances or have them adjust automatically as they are moved The network view is easily adjusted with buttons for panning in eight directions zoom in zoom out zoom all to show the entire network and a rubber band selection to outline the desired zoom in area The display of either the bitmap or the network is easily toggled on or off as required and the current intersection for subsequent dia
203. en changed to prevent this overflow The result is that time space diagrams which are longer than a single page will have the necessary page breaks but each successive page will not carry the full headings so the long time space diagram may be viewed with the least disruption from the multiple paging PREPASSR Ver 1 51 05MAR98 gt TEAPAC Interface Ver 3 02 Changes Made Various support files which are used by the program are now closed after their use so that other TEAPAC applications which are running concurrently on the same or other networked computers have less opportunity to conflict with the use of these files In Win32 versions the vertical scroll button of the Output window can now be clicked and dragged to scroll through the output from top to bottom Previously this button s position could only be clicked to change the view of the output In Win32 versions the File Open and File SaveAs dialog boxes now display the last file used in the FileName field as well as the dialog s caption providing an easier way to retrieve and save files with variations of previous file names PREPASSR Ver 1 50 17DEC97 gt First Release of Windows Version of PREPASSR This version of PREPASSR marks the first release of a Windows version of PREPASSR featuring the new Visual Mode of operation PREPASSR for Windows is available in a 16 bit version which runs on Windows 3 x and Windows 95 as well as a 32 bit version which runs on Windows 95 and
204. ently defined This error typically occurs when the FILES command is not used to define a lt File Number gt before referencing its use in a LOAD or SAVE command It may also occur if an incorrect lt File Number gt was specified Action First define the lt File Name gt for the lt File Number gt being referenced with the FILES command then re issue the file access command or re issue the file access command with the correct lt File Number gt TEAPAC F 212 Reference TPC14 ERROR Requested file number xxxxx is currently in use All file access is aborted Each of the five files named on the FILES command can be accessed by several commands however if a file is currently being access by one command such as LOAD that file can not be accessed by another command such as another nested LOAD until the current access is completed This situation can occur when using a control file where one file s commands access another file s commands through use of nested LOADs Action Remove the multiple referencing to a single lt File Number gt or restructure the file access so that one access is completed before the next is begun TPC15 ERROR File access LOAD SAVE etc exceeds 6 levels of nesting All access aborted File access commands such as LOAD and SAVE can only be nested to a depth of six levels If more than six levels of file access are generated this error message will result This situation can inadvertently develop when a fil
205. er Intersection A new command MASTERNODE has been implemented which can be used to identify which node of the NODELIST is the master intersection When this is done PASSER holds the offset of the master intersection fixed while other offsets can be varied around its value The default value is 0 indicating that no master node is identified If the designated master node is not in the SUBSYSTEM and or NODELIST being used it is ignored gt New NODELOCATION Command Added for PRENETSIM Compatibility For compatibility with the need for intersection coordinates in PRENETSIM the standard TEAPAC NODELOCATION inputs have been added to PREPASSR These input values are not PREPASSR_ H 277 Reference used anywhere by PREPASSR but allow improved data file interchangeability between PRETRANSYT PREPASSR and PRENETSIM gt Single Intersection Analysis with PASSER Permitted Error detection logic in PREPASSR_ has been improved to allow a single intersection to be exported to PASSER Previous logic perceived this condition to be an error because no connections to other intersections were found This new feature provides the opportunity to use PASSER for single intersection analysis not available with other single intersection models gt New Default Values for Simulation Period amp Ideal Satflow Rate The default value of the simulation period on the SIMULATION input has been changed from 60 minutes to 15 minutes This is consistent with the
206. er value from 0 to 3000 Its default value is 1900 Notes PREPASSR B 101 Reference IMPORT IMPORT IMPORT lt File AUTO gt lt Display Output gt Defaults AUTO NO Menus Groups RESULTS IMPORT The purpose of this command is to import signal timings from a PASSER II output file which was created by a PREPASSR Export lt File AUTO gt is the name of the PASSER output file to import from and can be any valid file name or the keyword AUTO Its default value is AUTO lt Display Output gt is a keyword which describes if the IMPORTed data is to be displayed during the IMPORT process and can be either NO or YES The default value is NO Notes e When PASSER s results are saved in an output file this output file can be read by IMPORT and the CYCLE length and OFFSETs are set directly into the PREPASSR program for each intersection as if manually entered If the OPTIMIZE command is set to SPLITS OFFSETS or CYCLES when the IMPORT is performed each intersection s GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES are entered as well If lt File AUTO gt is entered as AUTO then the automatic file name TMPPSR P2O used by the automatic EXPORT option is used see EXPORT AUTO may not be abbreviated nor may any file name used start with the four letters A U T O The default filename extension is P2O PREPASSR B 102 Reference INITIALQUEUE INITIALQUEUE INITIALQUEUE 12 lt Initial Queue Size gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIG
207. ered by right clicking on the appropriate intersection including a check of the data already created by the drag and drop network creation The intersections can also be re numbered to the numbers used here with a right click option The first step in using any TEAPAC program is to enter the data required to describe the problem to be solved This is accomplished using commands designated as PARAMETERS commands such as VOLUMES and WIDTHS The Commands option of the Help menu can be used to display help for all commands The Help Commands menu displays all commands along with information on how to use each Note the number of parameters for each command and their associated default values For example the VOLUMES command requires volumes for the twelve 12 possible movements at the intersection Since a lot of commands exist getting HELP for a smaller group might be appropriate The BASIC group consists of only those commands which are essential to solving problems with PREPASSR These commands can be viewed by issuing the following command from the Manual Mode HELP BASIC If help for only one command is needed the HELP command will display the same detailed HLP file information for that command which is produced by the Help buttons in Visual Mode dialogs For example use the following Manual Mode entry to obtain complete help for the NODELIST entry to be made in the next paragraph HELP NODELIST PREPASSR 19 Tutoria
208. eriod encompasses The first number entered for each pair defines the start time entered in 24 hour time notation The second time of each pair defines the end time of the period and must not be less than the first time of the period If the second time is less than the first this error is displayed Action In this case correct the PERIODS entry so that each stop time is no earlier than its associated start time TPC56 ERROR The time that was entered is not a valid time entry Re enter If the time entry of the PERIODS command does not match the count interval entered it is designated as an invalid time entry by this error message For example if 15 minute counts are to be entered every time entry of the PERIODS command must end with 00 15 30 or 45 If 60 minute counts are to be entered each time entry of PERIODS must end with 00 Action Check the count interval used first parameter of PERIODS and make sure the times used on PERIODS match the constraints listed above or round entries to the nearest value that matches the above constraints TPCS57 ERROR The time periods entered have created more than the max of 97 entries For an entire day of counts 24 hours 96 distinct 15 minute time periods exist If cumulative counts are performed 97 count intervals will be needed for these counts This is the maximum number of 15 minute intervals TURNS allows This error is issued if it attempts to create more TEAPAC F 219 Reference t
209. ers Its default value is all blanks Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa e The node number entry made on the INTERSECTION command defines which intersection the following INTERSECTION entry commands will apply to The INTERSECTION command must be issued prior to any other INTERSECTION commands The node number used must be a number already listed in the NODELIST e The common convention used for describing the intersection name is to place the North South street name first followed by the East West name both separated by an ampersand amp Use of this convention is strongly suggested If INTERSECTION 0 is specified and RESET is used the commands which are RESET will be reset for all intersections For example INTERSECTION 0 followed by RESET VOLUMES will reset the VOLUMES to zero for all intersections in the NODELIST e In a Visual Mode dialog that includes INTERSECTION or intersection data the button button Page Up key and Page Down key can be used to in effect dynamically issue an INTERSECTION command for the next and previous intersection in the NODELIST If data values are changed on a screen display the Page key
210. ersection lt Actuated Movements is a keyword describing whether or not the movement is part of an actuated phase as described below NO the movement is not part of an actuated phase default YES the movement is part of an actuated phase Notes Specifying YES for all non zero lane groups indicates a fully actuated signal Specifying NO for all non zero lane groups indicates a pretimed signal Specifying YES for some but not all non zero lane groups indicates a semiactuated signal PREPASSR B 65 Reference ADTFACTOR ADTFACTOR ADTFACTOR lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumes gt Defaults 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter a factor which will be used to estimate 24 hour volumes from partial day s counts lt Factor to Expand Counts to 24 Hour Volumess is a factor which when multiplied by the entire counted traffic will produce a reasonable estimate of 24 hour traffic volumes or average daily traffic ADT It can be any decimal number from 0 0 to 100 0 Its default value is 0 0 Notes The single factor entered on the ADTFACTOR command is used in Usage Level 2 of WARRANTS to multiply the total counted volume of each movement to estimate the 24 hour volume of each movement This 24 Hour Volume Estimates report is produced at the end of the ANALYZE outputs when the default ANALYZE command is used Itis not produced if a specific time range is selected for the
211. ersection s data PPS17 ERROR A cycle length different than 60 sec is not allowed in demo IMPORT aborted The demonstration version of PREPASSR only allows cycle lengths of 60 seconds and a different cycle length was found in the PASSER output file Action Change the PASSER run to a 60 second cycle length or obtain a Full Use licensed copy of PREPASSR PREPASSR E 205 Reference PPS20 ERROR Host program defined by Options Setup not found Install or adjust setup A check is made before the Auto option of EXPORT is performed to make sure the required host program PASSER is present on the system This error indicates that the designated host program cannot be located and the Export is aborted Action The Options Setup menu dialog defines the system path where the host PASSER program is installed Use this menu dialog to verify that the entry is correct Optionally use the Browse button to either verify the path folder named or to find and select the correct folder select the required executable file Press the Save button to save the new configuration The Save button updates the contents of the PREPASSR CFG file for the next time PREPASSR is run If a change is made a corresponding change will likely be required in the TEAPAC CFG file if needed make the change using any available text editor such as NotePad If the host program has not been installed install it and verify the corresponding Options Setup entry If the program fil
212. erstanding the results quite easy These diagrams also include each clearance interval of each phase Because of the speed of the computer and the ease of input an entire day s variation in traffic conditions can be analyzed quickly and accurately This in combination with the capacity analysis output of SIGNAL2000 provides all the information needed to implement the optimum timings in an arterial network Furthermore PREPASSR has the ability to read SIGNAL2000 data files directly eliminating the need to enter any data at all if SIGNAL2000 was used to estimate saturation flows and allowed signal phasings and timings for each signal Since both of these are required inputs of PASSER the use of PREPASSR in conjunction with SIGNAL2000 makes a smooth error free system for complete signal timing optimization PREPASSR can also use data files from PRETSPPD PRETRANSYT PRESYNCHRO and PRENETSIM allowing the interchangeable use of TSPPD PASSER II TRANSYT SYNCHRO and NETSIM CORSIM based on the same data base to take advantage of the benefits each program offers PASSER performs a two way bandwidth optimization for a linear arterial signal system The program can be also used to simulate existing signal system operations to a limited degree Inputs to PASSER depend on a sometimes confusing application of the NEMA phasing definitions but PREPASSR allows inputs in the standard TEAPAC scheme thus eliminating these problems and allowing quick and effectiv
213. es B 160 NOSTOP 49 B 81 NOTE 45 A 56 B 124 B 155 NSTOPFACTORS 42 A 57 B 125 O OFFSET 37 40 A 57 B 102 B 126 B 143 OK button 10 operating system G 225 optimization scheme B 87 B 108 OPTIMIZE 24 31 36 37 A 56 B 81 B 102 B 127 optimizing the signal timings 49 order of the phases 40 B 107 OUTPUT 37 A 56 B 129 Output Control G 230 output report D 185 PASSER2xx Formatted Input D 193 PASSER II Imported Data D 200 Summary of Parameter Values D 187 Time Space Diagram for Cycle XX sec D 195 Timings for Intersection XX D 197 overlapping time periods B 139 OVERLAPS 40 A 57 B 130 B 157 E 207 P Parameter Symbols 11 PARAMETERS Dialogs 35 PREPASSR parking maneuvers 41 B 132 PARKINGSIDES 41 A 57 B 131 B 132 PARKVOLUMES 41 A 57 B 131 B 132 PASSER 24 PASSER compatible input data file 35 B 88 PASSER II ii 49 PATHASSIGNMENT A 57 B 70 B 134 F 222 PATHDISTRIBUTION A 57 B 133 F 222 F 223 PEAKHOURFACTORS 36 39 A 56 B 136 B 159 B 176 peak period analyses 50 pedestrian crossing times B 116 PEDLEVELS 41 A 57 B 137 B 138 PEDTIME 42 A 57 B 137 B 138 percentile queue B 145 performance index B 127 PERIODS 43 A 57 B 139 F 219 F 220 PERMISSIVES 39 A 57 B 141 B 157 E 207 permitted left turns B 122 phase diagram D 197 PHASEMOVEMENTS 40 A 57 B 142 B 157 E 203 E 207 F 222 phasing 36 39 B 157
214. es B 165 SUMMARISE 14 22 44 A 56 B 82 B 167 D 187 Switch G 227 SYNCHRO ii 49 system cycle length B 81 B 113 E 202 T T intersection E 207 TEAPAC 1 TEAPAC Group Names A 57 TEAPAC Interface 10 TEAPAC Menu G 231 TEAPAC Procedures 12 time space diagram 35 B 143 TIMINGS 24 30 31 35 40 A 56 B 80 B 87 B 142 B 153 B 168 D 197 title heading lines 45 B 99 Title Line First 45 B 144 Second 45 B 84 Third 45 B 124 TPCO1 ERROR F 211 TPCO02 ERROR F 212 TPC11 ERROR F 212 TPC12 ERROR F 212 TPC13 ERROR F 212 TPC14 ERROR F 213 TPC15 ERROR F 213 TPC16 WARNING F 213 TPC17 ERROR F 213 TPC18 WARNING F 214 TPC19 ERROR F 214 TPC20 ERROR F 214 TPC21 WARNING F 214 TPC22 WARNING F 215 TPC31 WARNING F 215 TPC32 WARNING F 215 TPC33 WARNING F 216 I I I I TPC34 WARNING F 216 TPC35 WARNING F 216 TPC36 WARNING F 217 TPC41 WARNING F 217 307 Index TPC42 WARNING F 217 TPC43 WARNING F 217 TPC44 ERROR F 217 TPC45 ERROR F 218 TPC46 ERROR F 218 TPC47 ERROR F 218 TPC48 ERROR F 218 TPC49 ERROR F 218 TPC51 ERROR F 218 TPCS52 ERROR F 218 TPCS53 ERROR F 219 TPC54 ERROR F 219 TPCS55 ERROR F 219 TPC56 ERROR F 219 TPC57 ERROR F 219 TPCS58 ERROR F 220 TPCS59 ERROR F 220 TPC60 ERROR F 220 TPC61 WARNING F 221 TPC62 WARNING F 221 TPC63 ERROR F 221 TPC64 WARNING F
215. est movement LAG indicates the south west precedes the north east PREPASSR B 107 Reference LEVELOFSERVICE LEVELOFSERVICE LEVELOFSERVICE lt Target Delay LOS gt lt Max Delay LOS gt lt Delay Incr gt lt Target v c gt lt Max v c gt lt v c Incr gt Defaults 35 C 80 E 5 90 100 5 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the range of delay or level of service and v c which should be tested by a DESIGN optimization and GOVERCS for the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Target Delay LOS gt is the desired or target delay or level of service of operation of the critical movements and can be any integer delay from 0 to 300 seconds or a level of service grade A B C D or E Its default value is 35 seconds of delay LOS C lt Max Delay LOS gt is the worst amount of delay or level of service to be considered before a v c optimization is attempted and can be any integer delay from 0 to 300 seconds or a level of service grade A B C D or E Its default value is 80 seconds of delay LOS E lt Delay Incr gt is the increment of delay which should be used to reach the lt Max Delay LOS gt if the lt Target Delay LOS gt cannot be achieved by a DESIGN and can be any integer delay from 1 to 100 seconds Its default value is 5 seconds lt Target v c gt is the desired or target v c of operation of the critical movements and can be any integer v c fr
216. ever that the default lost time used previously for LOSTTIMES was 3 seconds so a slight difference in lost time modeling will occur PREPASSR B 86 Reference EXCESS EXCESS EXCESS lt List of Priority Movement Numbers gt Defaults 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the movements to which the TIMINGS command will assign available excess portions of the cycle length for the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt List of Priority Movement Numberss gt is the movement numbers for the movements which should receive available excess time and can be 0 12 Its default value is 0 no priority movements Notes For DESIGN the lt Target Delay LOS gt entry of the LEVELOFSERVICE command sets the target delay or level of service which is to be achieved for all critical movements of the intersection If this target level is achieved with excess time still available at the intersection then the excess time is assigned to the phases according to the entries on the EXCESS command If no EXCESS entries have been made time is allocated proportionally to all phases However if EXCESS is used this provides a means to designate a worst case delay LOS performance level for all critical movements and to assign all additional time to the priority movements of the EXCESS command This is the preferred optimization scheme for the DESIGN function of SIGNAL2000 see Appendix C for
217. ewhere on the network Then files on the network drive can be referenced in a TEAPAC program by simply using the D drive The Command Prompt SUBST command can also be used to map any folder or sub folder to a virtual drive not just map a drive as above This is a particularly convenient way to get around the 180 character limit imposed by TEAPAC on the drive path designation File Name nnnnn This element is the actual file name of the data file and should be descriptive of the information contained within the file The file name including any file extension or switch see below cannot exceed a maximum of 70 characters Upper lower case characters and spaces are allowed Since SCENARIO Condition files and certain file switch options can add as many as 6 characters to file names designated by users it is recommended that user file names not exceed a limit of 64 characters to avoid potential problems when these tools are used There are some special symbols which may not be used such as colons dots and slashes which are used as separators between the lt File Name gt elements In order to minimize potential problems in naming files it is recommended that only letters and digits be used in the disk file name File Extension eee As many as three characters may be used to describe the file extension Typically the file extension describes the format of a data file rather than the actual contents In TEAPAC programs if a file ex
218. f maintaining a consistency between the YellowTimes and ReqClearances entries This consistency is especially important when the entry format is Converted from By Phase to By Movement and when Exporting to ring based software gt Correct offsets displayed in time space diagram for exclusive pedestrian phase When an intersection included an exclusive pedestrian phase as defined by the PedTime entry it was possible that the offsets and or phases displayed in the time space diagram of a Plot would not be correct This possibility has been eliminated gt No attempt to Export Plot or Timings if no real nodes have been selected Any attempt by the program to perform an Export Plot or Timings directive will now be aborted in the event that no real nodes have been selected for the desired action thus avoiding a potential crash due to lack of adequate data to perform the selected action gt Error message for improperly connected node has detailed help text Error 15 which is issued when a node is detected that is not properly connected to the rest of the network now includes a reference to the Help text for the message which gives details about potential causes and resolutions In particular diagonal connections between nodes which have not been created properly are described in detail gt Include manual distance status for dummy nodes in View Summary SUMMARISE The status of a link s Network distance entry is now displayed properly for
219. fault value is 5 0 seconds Notes Use of MINIMUMS is only important if PASSER will be allowed to optimize the split times at each intersection This includes a CYCLE SPLIT OFFSET optimization In this case MINIMUMS must be entered very carefully to control the limits to which PASSER will be allowed to go when optimizing the splits See notes below When allowing PASSER to optimize splits MINIMUMS are useful in establishing minimum pedestrian crossing times as well as operational minimums To consider a minimum pedestrian constraint usually setting the minimum green time for the through movement adjacent to the pedestrian crossing will properly constrain the optimum timings For example pedestrians crossing the east leg would typically use the same green time as the through movement on the south approach so the minimum of the south through movement should be set to consider these pedestrians e Yellow and all red clearance times should not be included in the minimum green time entries The minimums which are used by PASSER must include clearance time In PREPASSR the MINIMUMS only apply to green periods Thus since clearance times in PASSER are defined by the input lost times the minimums created by an EXPORT for PASSER are the sum of a given MINIMUM and the two LOSTTIMES values for PREPASSR PREPASSR B 116 Reference MOVLABELS MOVLABELS MOVLABELS 12 lt Movement Label gt Defaults 4 RT TH LT Menus Groups PARAME
220. ference NODELOCATION NODELOCATION NODELOCATION lt X Y Coordinates gt Defaults 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the X and Y coordinates of the current intersection lt X Y Coordinates gt is the X and Y coordinates of the intersection and can be any common coordinate system value as an integer from 9999 to 32767 Its default value is 0 0 Notes This is one of several entries including NODELIST SUBSYSTEM INTERSECTION NODELOCATION and NETWORK which can be made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa e This input has no effect on PREPASSR calculations but appears for compatibility with other TEAPAC programs such as PRENETSIM and SITE PREPASSR_ B 123 Reference NOTE NOTE NOTE lt Third Title Line gt Defaults 80 blanks Menus Groups TITLES The purpose of this command is to enter the third line of information contained in the title of each report lt Third Title Line gt is the third of three lines of information generally used to note further conditions identifying the situation being analyzed displayed at the top of every output report and can be up to 80 characters of information Its default value is 80 blanks Notes If the first character of the NOTE parameter is a plus sign the
221. file created by the automatic export respectively If the file being exported already exists and the STACK option is not used the existing file is now deleted before the export so that none of its preceding contents remain at the end of the new file In addition the file which is exported is closed after the export This allows the exported file to be used by another program e g PASSER while PREPASSR is still resident in memory such as in multi tasking operating systems like Windows gt Large Systems Can Now Be SAVEd amp EXPORTed from the Menu Mode Previously systems with more than 12 nodes Usage Level 2 versions of PREPASSR needed to be SAVEd from the Manual Mode in order for the NODELIST and or SUBSYSTEM to be saved with more than 12 intersections The Manual Mode was also needed for the AUTO option of EXPORT since a SAVE is performed in the background for this case This limitation has now been removed allowing SAVE and EXPORT to be performed from either the Menu Mode or the Manual Mode as desired by the user The complete NODELIST and or SUBSYSTEM command of greater than 12 intersections must still be entered from the Manual Mode only since only a single input line is available to enter these values from the Menu Mode gt New IMPORT Error Messages Help Understand Import Problems Several possible and typical errors which may be encountered when importing data from PASSER output files are now identified with a new PREPASSR err
222. first be selected with the PATHDISTRIBUTION entry before the input value is entered If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which type to assign the entry value to Action If you know the distribution type you intend to be using enter it in the error dialog and select Yes In this case the PATHDISTRIBUTION command will be issued for you for that type If you do not know the type you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the PATHDISTRIBUTION command to select a type and re enter the input value TEAPAC F 222 Reference for that selection In the Tabular View make sure the Execute button is used to execute the PATHDISTRIBUTION command TPC69 WARNING A PATHDISTRIBUTION type must be given before this DATA can be listed This message indicates that a PATHDISTRIBUTION type number has not been selected prior to the request to list a DATA value When a data value is to be listed with DATA for a specific distribution type that type must first be selected with the PATHDISTRIBUTION entry before the value can be listed If this has not occurred the program doesn t know which type s data to list Action If you know the distribution type you intend to be using enter it in the error dialog and select Yes In this case the PATHDISTRIBUTION command will be issued for you for that type If you do not know the type you wish to use or are uncertain select No then use the PATHDISTRIBUTION command to select a type and re enter
223. first intersection at the left of the diagram The intersection numbers are shown in the bottom row of numbers while the row of numbers directly below the axis shows the cumulative distance from the first intersection Speed Slope Guide Lines The top of the time space diagram shows diagonal lines which approximately represent the slope of the speed profiles between intersections These lines can be used as guides to estimate the travel profiles of vehicles traveling through the system by copying these slopes into the body of the time space diagram usually beginning at the start of green at each intersection If paper or screen width is a problem these speed slope lines may optionally be displayed within the body of the time space diagram but are not intended to represent the actual flow profiles when this is the case Time Space Plot The body of the diagram shows each phase of each signal s operation both main street and side street through the duration of the three cycles These phases are displayed using different characters to represent each phase as described in the Legend of Phase Symbols Legend of Phase Symbols Darker characters F L and E are used to represent periods of the cycle when main street flow is entirely blocked by cross street phases Lighter characters blank and are used to represent periods when main street flow is permitted in varying degrees The following describes the meaning of each of the symbols used
224. g optimized offsets splits and cycle lengths Import AUTO should be used to import results of an Export AUTO gt Seamless Integration with SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT PRENETSIM PRESYNCHRO and PRETSPPD The option to enter and manage SIGNAL2000 data which is not required by PREPASSR has been added to PREPASSR with the new Edit SIGNAL2000 menu which now makes PREPASSR data files completely compatible with SIGNAL2000 This allows a seamless exchange of information between PREPASSR and SIGNAL2000 Version 2 as well as the other TEAPAC preprocessors To this end a new LinkTo menu has been created in PREPASSR that allows immediate transfer of control to SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM as well as the two new TEAPAC programs PRESYNCHRO and PRETSPPD This transfer of control includes closing the current data file with a prompt to save unsaved data and passing that file to the new program This permits immediate use of SIGNAL2000 or any of the other preprocessor functions with virtually no overhead of data file or program management This is due primarily to the new multi intersection feature added to SIGNAL2000 Version 2 and the presence of all SIGNAL2000 data in PREPASSR gt Maximum Network Size Increased to 500 Intersections with Improved Management Tools The maximum size of a PREPASSR network has been increased from 100 to 500 intersections with the addition of a new Usage Level 3 All Usage Levels use a new NODELIST dialog to manage the list of
225. g output reports clearer and easier to read The general aspects of the two major enhancement areas visual input and visual output are described below followed by the many other supporting enhancements that go along with the Visual TEAPAC upgrade When combined with the unparalleled 1 file 1 click 500 intersection completely seamless data sharing introduced with each of the 13 TEAPAC2004 Version 6 programs Visual TEAPAC provides an unmatched experience of fully integrated visual traffic engineering and traffic planning software Read on for the details gt Visual TEAPAC Graphical Input and Display of Analysis Network All TEAPAC programs except NOSTOP and TUTOR now provide a drag and drop user interface as a way to create and or display the study network in the main window of the program The network can be drawn schematically or to precise scale with the aid of an underlying grid or a bitmap can be displayed under the network to make drawing easy and or display of the network more meaningful The bitmap file can be an aerial photograph a street map as built drawings or any other such display which would be helpful and this bitmap is exported to third party program such as CORSIM and TRANSYT as permitted PREPASSR_ H 243 Reference Streets can be drawn by clicking on the grid or scaled bitmap and dragging across the extent of the street section creating analysis intersections where the new street segment crosses existing street s
226. g the Pan amp Zoom buttons allows the user to move around the network as necessary If a bitmap file bmp of appropriate resolution exists for the study area for example an aerial photograph or map that bitmap can first be identified and calibrated with the Setup button on the left side toolbar The file must be in the same folder that the data file will reside s in If the data file already exists and the bitmap has the same primary file name then entering as the bitmap file name will connect the two files automatically Like data files bitmap file names should not have more than 8 characters or have any spaces in the name When creating a network from scratch it is best to first calibrate the bitmap scale by entering a known distance and the number of pixels in the bitmap that represent that distance The Click button to the right of the bitmap distance entry can be a convenient way to establish the pixel distance For example if the distance between two intersections on the bitmap is known type that distance in the known distance field and use the mouse to click and drag a box with opposite corners located at those two intersections A base point for the coordinate system can also be established with the translational relationship entries found in the top portion of the dialog Once a network has been created its shift and scaling can be modified by changing the same Setup dialog entries or equivalently with the Anchor and Stretch
227. gative or zero Its default value is the next line of the file lt File Numbers is the order number of the desired file on the FILES command and can be any integer from 1 to 5 Its default value is the next file in the file list lt LOAD Type gt is a keyword describing whether all commands from the file should be processed or if some or all commands should be ignored and can be any keyword described below PROCESS process all commands default SHARE ignore unrecognized commands e g share a data file from another program IGNORE ignore all commands in the file up to the next RETURN e g skip a data block lt Blocks gt is the number of data blocks in the file which should be SHAREd or IGNOREd and can be any positive integer from 1 to 999 Its default value is 1 Notes Upon initiation of a LOAD command commands will be obtained from the specified file starting at the specified line number and continuing with successive line numbers until a RETURN command is encountered SAVE automatically places a RETURN command at the end of SAVEd information for future LOADs The next line default is defined as the line number following the line of the file which was last accessed This is usually the line number which follows the last information LOADed When a FILES command is given the next line for the specified file is automatically set equal to one The next line can be changed by use of the NEXTLINES command
228. gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes The File New menu does a RESET for ALL commands When a RESET PARAMETERS command is given the NEWPAGE YES condition is automatically set This can be subsequently disabled by the NEWPAGE NO command e RESET is not executed when it is encountered during a LOAD which uses the SHARE option PREPASSR B 149 Reference RETURN RETURN RETURN Defaults Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to return to the source of input which was being used when the last LOAD command was encountered It has no parameters Notes The RETURN command will cause control the source of input to be changed from its current location a file to the source of the last LOAD command If the last LOAD was from a file control is given to the line which follows the LOAD command which caused a source change If the previous LOAD command was read from the keyboard control will return to the keyboard If an end of file is encountered control is returned to the keyboard in a similar fashion to a RETURN command Control is always returned to the keyboard in these cases however as this is considered an abnormal condition PREPASSR B 150 Reference RIGHTTURNONREDS RIGHTTURNONREDS RIGHTTURNON
229. h gt Defaults 4 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the grade of each approach of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Grade of Approach gt is the grade of the approach in percent either positive or negative and can be any number from 10 to 10 Its default value is 0 Notes Approaches that run uphill into the intersection have a positive grade for this input Downhill approaches have a negative grade PREPASSR B 95 Reference GREENTIMES GREENTIMES GREENTIMES 6 lt Phase Green Time gt Defaults 6 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION IMPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the duration of green for each of the phases of a specified phase sequence or optionally for each of the movements of the current intersection lt Phase Green Time gt is the duration of green for the phase or movement given in either seconds or seconds second and can be any number from 0 to 900 Its default value is 0 0 seconds Notes If the list of GREENTIMES is preceded by the keyword Movmt then each of the entered values will be interpreted as timings for individual through and left turn movements clockwise around the intersection If not or the optional keyword Phase is used each value is for the phases defined by the SEQUENCE code When entering or viewing controller timings a Convert button appears on the GREENT
230. h the PASSER program and if PASSER is referenced properly in the Options Setup menu of PREPASSR the AUTO option selected above will launch PASSER automatically with the created file open and ready to Run two advice dialogs will require affirmative responses followed by pushing the Run button PREPASSR 24 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Evaluation One powerful aspect of TEAPAC software is the capability to quickly test multiple scenarios or conditions in an interactive environment For example to manually input the offsets generated by a run of the PASSER program simply use the following command entries Intersection INTERSECTION 13 Intersection OFFSET 0 65 2 Intersection INTERSECTION 14 Intersection OFFSET 0 88 2 Intersection INTERSECTION 15 Intersection OFFSET 0 02 2 PASSER optimized results are always output to a disk file so IMPORT can read this file to import the optimized timings directly into PREPASSR without the need for the manual inputs illustrated above For example to import the optimum timings from the example EXPORT AUTO run above type the following Results IMPORT AUTO YES Now the optimum timings and time space diagram can be reviewed with the TIMINGS and PLOT commands Results TIMINGS Results PLOT 500 Compare the new time space diagram to the original diagram Note that in the first diagram the offsets were zero and no progression
231. han 97 count intervals based on the time period start and stop times entered Action Make sure that the start and stop times entered for the time periods do not overlap cover more than a single 24 hour period or in any other fashion attempt to generate more than 97 distinct count intervals Non overlapping count periods for a single day will always fit into this limit without error if defined properly on the PERIODS command Attempts to combine several days counts for a single intersection should be avoided with this error message being a common result of such an attempt TPC58 ERROR The time periods entered cannot overlap Re enter without overlap Each of the time periods defined on the PERIODS command are not allowed to overlap in any way If the start time is the same as or precedes any other stop time or if a stop time is the same as or follows any other start time this error will be displayed Action Check that the time periods entered do not overlap in any way If they do they must be entered as two separate problems to TURNS and cannot be combined TPC59 ERROR The extra inputs for this movement entry have been ignored Check for error This error is generated by either the VEHICLECOUNTS or TRUCKCOUNTS command when too many entries have been entered in the Manual Mode If entries are being made for a given movement number there cannot be more count entries following the movement number than there are number of count intervals
232. hase module present actuated or non actuated for each movement of the current intersection MINIMUMS 12 lt Minimum Green Time gt Enter the minimum green time requirements for each of the twelve movements at the current intersection STARTUPLOST 12 lt Startup Lost Time gt Enter the length of the lost time at the beginning of a movement s green period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection ENDGAIN 12 lt End Gain Time gt Enter the length of time that vehicles effectively extend the green period into the yellow and all red period for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection STORAGE 12 lt Storage Distance gt Enter the amount of storage distance for queued vehicles for each of the twelve movements of the current intersection SATURATIONFLOWS 12 lt Stream Saturation Flow gt Enter the maximum capacity for each lane group of the current intersection SEQUENCES lt Sequence Code gt Enter the desired and allowed phasings of the traffic signal of the current intersection according to the codes defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 PERMISSIVES 4 lt Permissive Left gt Enter an option for each approach identifying the permissability of left turning traffic to turn on a through phase following or preceding a protected left turn phase of the current intersection PREPASSR 39 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS OVERLAPS 4 lt Right Turn Overlap gt Enter how right
233. hat the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TEAPAC F 215 Reference TPC33 WARNING This parameter is not a valid numeric entry Re enter with a proper number This error message indicates that alphabetic or special characters were entered for a parameter which must be a numeric value Most commands will re prompt for parameter re entry after this error After this error is received the invalid entries will be ignored The parameter list can also be re typed starting at the position where the invalid entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the parameter values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode it is recommended that the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TPC34 WARNING This integer number is not in the accepted range xxxxx to xxxxx Re enter it This input is not in the accepted range xxxxxxxxxx tO Xxxxxxxxxx Re enter When a parameter value is entered which lies outside the allowable range of values this error message is displayed If the input entry accepts decimal places TPC35 is displayed If input entries are rounded to the nearest integer value TPC34 is displayed The appropriate ranges
234. he TURNS peak period analyses can be saved directly to the data file which can then be read by both SIGNAL2000 and PREPASSR for these purposes Note also that these VOLUMES can be easily factored by using the individual VOLFACTORS entries as well as the global entry of VOLFACTORS when intersection 0 all intersections is selected The SITE program can be used in exactly the same manner as TURNS creating a set of projected VOLADDITIONALS in the file allowing a duplicate analysis to be performed on projected volumes as well as existing volumes Note also that these VOLADDITIONALS can be easily factored by using the individual VOLADDITIONALS factor entry as well as the global entry of the factor when intersection 0 all intersections is selected Another use of the factor including its global entry is to disable the VOLADDITIONALS by using a factor of 0 PREPASSR 50 Tutorial APPENDICES Reference Manual The following appendices form the PREPASSR Reference Manual This manual is designed to provide detailed information regarding various aspects of the PREPASSR program The information in the appendices is ordered such that easy reference access is possible Each of the appendices is described briefly below Appendix A ABBREVIATED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AND ENTRIES Appendix A lists all PREPASSR commands by group name This appendix is designed for quick reference regarding group names and command hierarchy The single line descriptions ar
235. he current intersection VOLUMES 12 lt Design Hour Volume gt Enter the turning and through movement volumes for each of the movements at the current intersection VOLFACTORS lt Years gt 12 lt Volume Adjustment Factor gt Enter number of times to compound and each multiplier used for each movement to adjust the volume data entered by the VOLUMES command at the current intersection VOLADDITIONALS lt AddFactor gt 12 lt Additional Volume gt Enter the factor and additional volume to be added for each movement of the current intersection WIDTHS 12 lt Lane Group Width gt Enter the width of the lane group for each movement at the current intersection LANES 12 lt Number of Lanes gt PREPASSR 38 _ Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Enter the number of lanes which are assigned for use by each of the twelve movements at the current intersection GROUPTYPES 12 lt Lane Group Type gt Enter the special lane group type for each possible lane group such as dual optional lanes free flow lanes and sign controlled lanes for the current intersection TRUCKPERCENTS 12 lt Truck Through Bus Percentage gt Enter the truck and through bus heavy vehicle traffic percentage for each movement of the current intersection PEAKHOURFACTORS 12 lt Peak Hour Factor gt Enter the peak hour factor for each movement of the current intersection ACTUATIONS 12 lt Actuated Movement gt Enter the type of p
236. he cursor was inadvertently moved off the active command line thereby losing the entered information A check has now been added which prevents the user from moving off of an active command line after changes to it have been made A message to this effect is now displayed also offering the ESCape key as a way to abort the active command if the change was unintentional Another bothersome trait of the Menu Mode was that the last entry on a command line was not right justified after it was entered since the cursor moved to the next line before the justification occurred This gave the inaccurate impression that the entry had not been completed properly This condition has been corrected so that before the cursor leaves a line of a full screen display the line is shown in its completed and formatted form This is also true after the ESCape key and other abortive type actions are taken Five new cursor editing keys have been added to the full screen displays which allow improved text editing and cursor control A will move the cursor forward to the start of the next word of the current field F will move the cursor backward to the start of the previous word of the field T will delete the current word of the field and Y will delete the remainder of the field starting at the current cursor position These keys will operate in this fashion in any field of a full screen display but are particularly useful when editing the text of TITLES and I
237. he intersection If not or the optional keyword Phase is used each value is for the phases defined by the SEQUENCE code When entering or viewing controller timings a Convert button appears on the YELLOWTIMES dialog which allows the user to select the style of entry or view either By Phase which is the traditional HCM method or By Movement which is more similar to the way timings are used on NEMA and other dual ring controllers If any timings are present they will be converted to the other format at the same time including YELLOWTIMES if the GREENTIMES dialog is displayed and vice versa When timings are Converted the conversion will also include reviewing the allowed SEQUENCES list and moving the appropriate sequence code to the top of the list according to the timings present It is important to make sure that YELLOWTIMES and REQCLEARANCES entries are always kept consistent with each other especially when converting Timings by Phase to Timings by Movement and when exporting to third party ring based software e By Movement timings are not allowed when special phasings represented by negative SEQUENCE codes are used If entering YELLOWTIMES by phase they must be entered in the order of the phases as specified in the SEQUENCES and LEADLAGS commands All red time should be included in the YELLOWTIMES command PREPASSR B 178 Reference YELLOWTIMES YELLOWTIMES If all YELLOWTIMES are entered in seconds
238. he procedure Action commands can be executed by first selecting the Results Menu This contains all of the action commands which are specific to PREPASSR If the parameter values need to be changed first they should be entered in the dialog then the Execute button is pressed to execute the selected function In the Manual Mode the action command need only be typed at the command prompt followed by any desired parameter values to control the action then the ENTER key or OK button Evaluation After executing an action function s the results contained in the report s must be evaluated for reasonableness and to determine if subsequent analyses are required Additional analyses may be necessary for a variety of reasons One of the most common reasons for further analyses is to test adjustments to the input conditions These could be in the form of simulated before and after studies or testing multiple scenarios Another type of evaluation might be a sensitivity analysis to refine initial results or identify how a specific parameter value impacts the overall results In any of these cases the methods described above for data entry review and analysis should be used PREPASSR 14 Tutorial CHAPTER 2 Initial Example Chapter 2 Topics In order to illustrate some of the basic commands and procedures essential to using the PREPASSR program as well as to provide some experience using them and observing the program s responses an example p
239. hen re execute the desired INTERSECTION command The Manual Mode may be needed to append the new node number to the NODELIST if more than 12 entries will result See the special Notes section of the NODELIST command for an explanation PPS06 WARNING The SEQUENCE code for this INTERSECTION must be 1 thru 5 to use PHASEMOVS This warning indicates that the PHASEMOVEMENTS command was executed for an intersection whose SEQUENCES code was not in the range of 1 through 5 Action The SEQUENCE code for the intersection must first be set to a number in the range of 1 through 5 before the PHASEMOVS command can be executed PPS07 ERROR Too many links are required for this network Merge links or split network This error indicates that the internal program limit for the number of links which can be modeled has been exceeded when the internal link diagram was being constructed Action Break up the system into two or more smaller sub systems or specify fewer lane groups non zero WIDTHS to describe your system By merging lane groups fewer links will be generated This error only applies to PRETRANSYT PPS08 ERROR GREENS amp YELLOWS must add up to demo limit of 60 seconds Re enter In a demonstration version of PREPASSR only 60 second cycle lengths can be modeled This error indicates that this limitation has been exceeded Action Correct the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES so that they add up to the demo limit of 60 seconds or purchase a
240. hich is displayed at the top of the error message window The notes that follow the message here indicate where to look for conditions that may have caused the message and how to correct these conditions Messages designated as WARNINGS may not cause computations to stop while those designated as ERRORS will terminate all computations Errors and Warnings PPSO1 ERROR PPSO2 WARNING PPSO3 WARNING PPS04 ERROR PREPASSR E 201 Reference PPS05 ERROR PPS06 WARNING PPSO7 ERROR PPS08 ERROR PPSO9 ERROR PPS10 ERROR PPS11 ERROR PPS12 ERROR PPS13 ERROR PPS14 ERROR PPS15 ERROR PPS16 WARNING PPS17 ERROR PPS20 ERROR PPS01 ERROR The system cycle length has not been entered Enter CYCLE before continuing This error indicates that one of the RESULTS commands has been executed prior to the entry of a valid system cycle length Only IMPORT can be executed without a system cycle length entered Action Use the CYCLES command to enter a valid system cycle length PPS02 WARNING An INTERSECTION number must be given before this input can be made This warning indicates that an attempt has been made to enter data values for an INTERSECTION command prior to defining which intersection this data belongs to Action Use the INTERSECTION command to first define the intersection number data will be entered for then re enter th
241. hould be checked for accuracy and correctness In the Visual Mode or when using the ASK command for input this process is direct and immediate since all of the current values of the entered commands are continuously displayed The View Summary menu is also a quick way to see all current data entries In the Manual Mode the TEAPAC commands DATA and SUMMARISE are used for data review These commands display the current parameter values contained in the program If no data has been entered for a command its current values will be the default RESET values If incorrect data is detected it may be corrected using either of the data entry techniques described above In the Manual Mode the ASK command is frequently a good way to check data integrity since it displays all values and also allows immediate re entry in the dialog box display if an error is found Analysis The third step in program execution is to perform an analysis using the current parameter values When satisfied with the accuracy of the program data it is possible to use one or more of the commands in the Results Menu RESULTS commands to perform an analysis All TEAPAC programs have one or more RESULTS commands which cause the program to act on the current data These commands typically produce a report which displays the results of the analysis Since more than one analysis may be required to generate the desired results several RESULTS commands may be used at this step in t
242. hour vehicles per hour Vada entered VOLADDITIONAL additional volume faaa entered VOLADDITIONAL adjustment factor Thus in the most general form the demand volumes used for an analysis are determined using the following formula y V fy xk N F Vada a fada PHF where v analysis flow rate during peak 15 minutes of the hour vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the hour vehicles per hour fy entered VOLFACTOR adjustment factor for each N periods N entered VOLFACTOR number of periods to compound the fy factor Vaa entered VOLADDITIONAL additional volume faaa entered VOLADDITIONAL adjustment factor PREPASSR_ C 182 Reference PHF 15 minute peak hour factor ratio of average flow to peak 15 minute flow The TURNS and WARRANTS programs of TEAPAC can determine peak hour or peak 15 minute volumes from entered traffic count data using the ANALYZE function In these programs entered VOLUMES and VOLADDITIONALS are ignored by ANALYZE and the results of the peak analysis are placed in the VOLUMES entries automatically VWOLFACTORS are applied to the traffic count data as growth or seasonal adjustment factors thus the resulting automatic VOLUMES entries have these same VOLFACTORS removed so that the calculation of analysis volumes from the general formula above will result in the same peak volumes determined by the ANALYZE function For example if count data is analyzed with a VOLFACTORS growth factor
243. iagonal connections E 205 DIAGRAMS B 80 direct linkage to and from PASSER B 88 DISCLAIMER iv disk data file G 226 disk drive G 227 Disk File Output G 231 disutility index B 127 divide by zero G 226 Drive Path Designation G 227 dual optional lanes 39 B 98 duration of green 37 40 B 96 E ECHO 45 A 56 B 85 echo condition flag 45 B 85 ellipsis 11 end of file F 213 F 214 ENDGAIN 39 A 57 B 86 B 162 error codes G 226 ERROR MESSAGES O S G 225 PREPASSR E 201 TEAPAC F 209 error number F 209 ESCape key F 213 EVALUATE 42 B 80 B 125 B 145 B 148 Example Data Entries 11 Example Problem 15 EXCESS 40 A 57 B 87 B 108 excess time B 87 exclusive pedestrian phase 42 B 138 exclusive turning lanes B 177 Execute button 10 Exiting the Program 26 304 Index EXPORT 24 31 35 A 56 B 88 D 193 E 204 EXPORT mode 28 extra entries F 215 F F3 key 10 F4 key 10 FACTORS 42 A 57 B 90 File Access G 228 File Extension G 227 File Name G 227 G 228 file name specification G 226 File Number B 91 F 212 F 213 G 230 file path specification F 214 file path name length limit G 227 File Specification G 226 FILES 26 45 A 56 B 91 B 111 B 121 B 155 F 212 F 213 F 214 G 228 G 230 Final Queue B 103 FINDPATHS B 134 formatted summary 44 B 167 free flow lanes 39 B 98 full use license F 222 fully actuated signal B 65 G GENERATION A 57
244. iagrams clockwise 90 degrees for phase types of East West movements Use PERMISSIVES to allow left turns shown with symbols Use OVERLAPS to allow right turns shown with symbols where exclusive right turn lanes exist Use LEADLAGS to reverse the order of a phase type Phase types are combined for both directions to create a sequence code E g SEQUENCE 53 is a Dual Lead North Overlap 5 for the North South movements followed by a West Lead 3 for the East West movements Figure 1 2 Phasing Codes for PREPASSR Version Number PREPASSR 9 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION The version number x yz and date describe what revision of the program is being used Minor revisions of the program increment the z part of the version number with more significant changes affecting the y part of the version number The version number itself x changes when major program changes are made The date reflects when the given version of the program was introduced The version number and date of the program is displayed using the Help About menu It is also displayed in each printed report title This information should match the title page of any printed program documentation or the Help Version menu of the on screen documentation If this is not the case check by using the Help RecentChanges menu for addenda which explain changes which have been implemented since your documentation was prepared These addenda should be printed and inserted in Appendix
245. ial assignment situations and is not normally used for typical site traffic assignment situations lt Type gt is the number of the distribution type being assigned and can be 1 150 see note below It has no default value it must be entered lt Intersection gt is the number of the intersection to which traffic is being assigned as defined on the INTERSECTION command and can be 1 999 see note below It has no default value it must be entered lt Movement gt is the movement number to which the traffic is being assigned and can be any integer from 0 to 12 as described below 1 12 one of the turning movements O designates that a list of assignments for all 12 movements will follow It has no default value it must be entered lt Assignment Factor gt is the percentage of the traffic of the distribution type being assigned that is assigned to the specified movement and can be 0 100 percent Its default value is 0 Notes The purpose of this command is to give the greatest degree of freedom in assigning traffic for a given distribution type to a given intersection When this technique is used SITE cannot check that the entered values are consistent with upstream and downstream assignments as is the case when using the PATHASSIGNMENT command As such ASSIGNMENT should only be used in those rare instances when the PATHASSIGNMENT command cannot achieve the desired special purpose assignment It can also be used when
246. ibility only lt Stopping Bus Volume gt is the hourly volume of local buses which stop at the bus stop designated for the approach and can be any integer from 0 to 250 Its default value is 0 no stopping bus volume Notes PREPASSR_ B 74 Reference CALCULATE CALCULATE CALCULATE lt Algebraic Expression gt Defaults none Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to perform a calculation for the given expression and optionally assign the integer result to a user variable lt Algebraic Expressions is an expression in the form of an algebraic formula or equation and can be any valid expression containing numeric constants user variables and valid operators as described below It has no default value it must be entered Notes The expression entered must be of the form of a normal algebraic expression using any of the four operators and addition subtraction multiplication and division This means that each operator must have two operands one on either side of the operator An operand may be either a numeric constant or one of the 26 1 character user variables A Z User variables must have had values assigned to them by a previous CALCULATE command or with a REPEAT command A minus sign may also be used as a single operand operator to reverse the sign of the following constant or variable Expressions are evaluated from left to right except that multiplication and division operations always
247. icles for a count interval or movement number at the current intersection lt Movement or Time gt is the movement number or the beginning time of the time interval for the counts to be entered and can be any of the following 1 12 Movement number or 0 2400 Beginning time This parameter has no default value and must be entered each time the VEHICLECOUNTS command is used lt List of Counts gt is the list of counted vehicles for the specified movement number or time interval and can be any number from 999 to 9999 Its default value is 0 e g it must be entered Notes Movement numbers begin with the north leg right turn and proceed clockwise around the intersection If a movement number is given as the first parameter the counts should be for that movement only one for each interval in each of the periods If a time is given twelve counts for each of the movements at that time should follow Use of the movement number option is limited to the Manual Mode only If the truck COUNTTYPE is INCLUDED all counted vehicles should be included in these entries including any trucks specified by the TRUCKCOUNTS command If the truck COUNTTYPE is SEPARATE VEHICLECOUNTS should be all vehicles except trucks which will be entered only on the TRUCKCOUNTS command Vehicle counts may not exceed 9999 Input should always be no more than four digits If cumulative counts are made with five digit counters only enter the last four
248. ile SaveAs to an existing file name with Scenario conditions doesn t hang File SaveAs shows file type of current file amp better file type descriptions PREPASSR Ver 2 80 25APR07 Build 00 08JUN07 gt Long File Names and Longer Path Names Implemented Plus New File Format All aspects of TEAPAC data file storage including SCENARIO condition files have been extended so that file names can have as many as 70 characters in their names and file path names can have as many as 180 characters both including upper or lower case characters and spaces Since SCENARIO condition files and certain file switch options can add as many as 6 characters to file names it is best if user entered names are no more than 64 characters A new higher capacity data file format with a new file extension tpc has been introduced which will be used by default for all new files created by all TEAPAC programs This format is text based like the old for format so it is still easy to see what is in a file as well as write such files from other programs but with a look to the future this format has line length maximums of 256 characters per line 254 useable instead of the more limiting maximums of the for format which had maximums of 128 characters per line 80 useable The old format can still be read and written simply by continuing to use the for extension but users are encouraged to convert files to the new format simply by saving for file with the new tpc
249. ily for the basic housekeeping chores needed for program manipulation such as on screen help data manipulation file handling output labeling printer control and control file actions The last two sub groups contain commands specific to the PREPASSR program The first RESULTS consists of active commands which produce specific PREPASSR results The other PARAMETERS consists of all of the commands which can be used to enter the data values which describe the scenarios to be analyzed by the RESULTS commands The PARAMETERS group has another standard TEAPAC group name as its sub set This is the BASIC group which consists of those important and necessary PARAMETERS commands needed as a minimum to describe the data for an analysis In the PREPASSR program since the PARAMETERS group is quite large it is further sub divided into additional special groups as described below Special PREPASSR Group Names The PREPASSR program contains seven special group names five of which are subsets of the PARAMETERS group The subset groups are SYSTEM INTERSECTION SIGNAL2000 TURNS WARRANTS and SITE The SYSTEM commands are used to enter those parameters which set up the network to be studied while the INTERSECTION commands are used to input those parameters which affect each individual intersection The SIGNAL2000 TURNS WARRANTS and SITE commands are used to enter those parameters which are needed only by SIGNAL2000 TUR
250. ime at the beginning of green indications for each lane group at the intersection End Gain Time The number of seconds of end gain time at the end of green indications for each lane group at the intersection Storage The distance in feet for each lane group of the intersection in which stored vehicles can wait without impacting other lane groups of the intersection or system PREPASSR D 188 Reference Phasing Order A two digit code representing the basic phasing of the traffic signal is followed by the order codes For multi phase signal operation the order indicates whether turning phases lead ahead of or lag behind the through phase The first entry is for the north south phases the second is for the east west phases Permissives Denotes whether left turns are allowed to move on a permitted through phase following an exclusive left turn phase If the phasing is single phase for the left turn the movement is permitted regardless of the permissives setting RT Overlaps Denotes whether right turns are allowed to overlap into adjacent left turn phases when an exclusive right turn lane exists Greentimes The green time in seconds for each signal phase in the order of the designated Sequence and Leadlag entries Numbers less than 1 00 represent proportions of the system cycle time in seconds second Yellowtimes The yellow time in seconds for each signal phase in the order of the designated Sequence and Leadlag entries Cycle
251. imes calculated starting at phase 1 for the beginning of each green and clearance interval in seconds and percent of cycle The clearance interval includes the yellow clearance and any all red for a given phase Offset sec The cumulative splits from above for the beginning of each green and clearance interval but calculated with the intersection s system offset applied to all phases both in seconds and percent of cycle The following is an example of the Timings for Intersection XX text only report using the PREPASSR program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum PREPASSR TI BAPAC Ver 2 71 07 MacArthur amp Pershing Timings for Intersection Sq 12 Phase 1 Phase 2 Phase 3 LD x kK a a z x k KKKK KKKK J lt k x kD ck KKK ckKKK l v Kk KK FEFE a v KKKK Vv North lt k ok kD KKKKD x k KkKKK x kK Vv Cyc 60 Green Clear Greent tClear Green Clear Phs sec 26 0 26 11 0 11 23 0 23 43 3 44 18 3 18 38 3 38 Green Clear Green Clear Green Clear Int sec 23 0 3 0 8 0 3 0 20 0 3 0 38 3 S0 1323 320 33 3 5 0 Cum sec 0 0 23 0 26 0 34 0 37 0 57 0 0 0 38 3 43 3 56 7 61 7 95 0 Off sec 13 0 36 0 39 0 47 0 50 0 10 0 21 7 60 0
252. in a control file so that the set of commands which follow will be repeated a finite number of times GOTO lt Destination gt Divert the input stream within a file by providing the next location to be LOADed from that file CALCULATE lt Algebraic Expression gt Perform a calculation for the given expression and optionally assign the integer result to a user variable PREPASSR 46 Tutorial CHAPTER 5 Advanced Procedures Chapter 5 Topics Chapters 1 through 4 covered the basic methods and commands required to use the PREPASSR program to solve most problems which will be encountered The advanced procedures discussed in this chapter can greatly increase efficiency in solving problems with PREPASSR as well as provide insights into how to use PREPASSR to solve unusual problems Before beginning this section it is necessary to have a good understanding of the material covered in the previous chapters as well as in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual If this is not the case please review this material prior to continuing Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual can also be used to discover advanced procedures which can be used by PREPASSR as well as all TEAPAC programs Chapter 5 Topics Chapter 5 Introduction Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs A major element in the design of TEAPAC programs is the ability to share both input and output data amongst a
253. in it Extra phases can be eliminated by entering a movement number 0 as the first movement in the phase This erases all following movement numbers for that phase and any phases which follow e The TIMINGS command can and should be used to review the phasing designated by PHASEMOVEMENTS before further analysis PREPASSR B 142 Reference PLOT PLOT PLOT lt Scale gt lt List of Nodes gt Defaults 0 lt Nodelist gt Menus Groups RESULTS IMPORT The purpose of this command is to plot a time space diagram for the nodes specified lt Scale gt is the scale of the plot in feet per line of output and can be any integer from 0 to 10000 Its default value is 0 feet per line automatic scale to fit the PLOT on one page lt List of Nodes gt is the list of node numbers to be plotted and can be a list of any node numbers in the NODELIST or the negative value of any defined ROUTE number Its default value is all nodes in the NODELIST or SUBSYSTEM in the specified order Notes The NETWORK GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and OFFSET commands must be specified for each node which is to be PLOTted e The output on a printer is normally six lines per inch When determining the scale to be used for the time space diagram this print pitch should be taken into account For example if a 600 feet per inch is desired on such a printer a PLOT scale of 100 600 6 feet per line of output should be used Similar computations can be made for other co
254. in note 1 above Versions of the SIGNAL TEAPAC program prior to SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 etc permitted the use of certain keywords to represent typical ped volume conditions To permit upwards compatibility of data files from these earlier programs SIGNAL2000 will convert these keywords in the same manner as the earlier programs using the following relationships between the number of conflicting pedestrians and the keyword used LOW 50 MODERATE 200 and HIGH 400 These numeric values will be the values saved if this data is subsequently saved by SIGNAL2000 If an exclusive pedestrian phase is defined with the PEDTIME entry PEDLEVELS should be set to zero since there should be no pedestrian interference with vehicular traffic during vehicle phases PREPASSR_ B 137 Reference PEDTIME PEDTIME PEDTIME lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Time gt lt Phase Numbers Defaults 0 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETER SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the time for an exclusive pedestrian scramble phase for the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Time gt is the length of time in seconds to be allocated to an exclusive pedestrian phase all red for vehicles and can be any number from 0 to 900 and less than the cycle length for the phasing Its default value is 0 0 lt Phase Numbers is the number of the phase which the exclusive pedestrian phase follows and can be a
255. indow the problem would manifest itself with upstream connections to the wrong node and or incorrect distances Creation of most T intersections were not affected by this problem If an old TEAPAC data file saved from a program prior to Visual TEAPAC was opened using a LinkTo drag to or from a command line a crash could result when an attempt was made by the program to update the Nodelist format to the new save format This problem has been resolved Build 21 27JUL06 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS Build 07 11LNOVO5 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt Check for Problematic Offset Entries When Producing Time Space Diagram Problematic offset entries that might crash a time space diagram plot are detected before they cause a crash gt V7 00 21 Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs PREPASSR_ H 238 Reference A number of generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 releases of Visual TEAPAC and are collectively included as Ver 7 00 Build 21 These are documented below and use heading lines that begin with V7 00 21 In addition minor program specific changes have been made as summarized here and detailed in the program s own specific list of updates and changes Ver 7 00 Build 21 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses gt V7 00 21 New Coordinate System Management Features A new set of options to help manage the net
256. ing Sequence Codes Version Number Input Modes Example Data Entries Parameter Symbols Definition of Terms Important terms which are used throughout the documentation are defined in Table 1 2 It is helpful to be familiar with these terms prior to using the tutorial reference manual PREPASSR 4 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Table 1 2 Definition of Terms Program Control Menu PREPASSR starts up in the Normal View of the Visual Mode by first displaying the Main Menu From this menu all program options can be selected and executed including the Tabular View and the Manual Mode Menu Line Item A Menu Line Item is one of the options displayed in any drop down menu or in a lower level menu It can be selected and executed to display a dialog box to enter data or execute a function Dialog Box When a Menu Line Item is selected or the ASK command is used a dialog box is displayed In this display data entries can be easily entered and changed and calculations can be initiated by simple cursor and or mouse movements Command A Command is the keyword used to identify a dialog box and is the first word of an Input Line which identifies the kind of action to be performed by the program These actions are either to enter data or to perform analyses Parameter Values Parameter Values are data entries found in a dialog box or which follow a Command on an Input Line These values define the da
257. ing information for an intersection use the same basic phasing codes on the SEQUENCES entry to represent complex phasing schemes with simple two digit codes The first digit represents the type of phasing for the north south movements while the second digit represents the type of phasing for the east west movements The phase codes allowed for north south and east west are identical the east west codes simply being the north south code rotated clockwise 90 degrees This basic phasing code can be augmented by entries to change the order of the basic sequence code LEADLAGS by adding permitted left turns before or after exclusive left turn phases PERMISSIVES and by adding right turns which PREPASSR 7 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION overlap into the other direction s phases OVERLAPS Figure 1 2 illustrates each of the eight basic phase types with an example of how they are combined to create a SEQUENCE phase code PREPASSR_ 8 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Sequence 1 Sequence 4 Dual ae aes 2 abbey S x gt lt lt v Sequence 5 Dual Lead North Overlap zk A zk A k kK kA x gt lt x gt lt x k gt lt vV ZE v l Sequence 6 Dual Lead South Overlap gt Sequence 8 Lead Lag i tN x lt gt lt Rotate d
258. inputs they represent including the basic commands All the details about each command dialog can be found alphabetically in Appendix B Commands to Enter Basic Data Commands to Enter System Data Commands to Enter Intersection Data Commands to Enter Additional Intersection Data Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data Commands to Enter Basic Data The following are the commands which are used to enter the basic data to describe the problem to be solved PREPASSR_ 35 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS NODELIST 100 lt Node Number gt OPTIMIZE lt Optimization Type gt lt Step Size List gt Enter the type of optimization to be performed by PASSER INTERSECTION lt Node Numbers lt Description gt Enter the node number of the current intersection and an optional description as defined in the network NETWORK lt Direction gt lt Distance gt lt Speed gt lt Node gt 4 lt Movement gt lt Assignment Method gt lt Curvature gt lt Manual Distance gt Enter the current intersection s relative location in the system network including spatial and speed parameters VOLUMES 12 lt Design Hour Volume gt Enter the turning and through movement volumes for each of the movements at the current intersection WIDTHS 12 lt Lane Group Width gt Enter the width of the lane group for each movement at the current intersection PEAKHOU
259. ion Added from Menu The DOS Shell option which has been available with the STOP command is now also available when using the Quit selection in the Program Control Menu The user is now prompted with Exit to DOS No Yes Shell If S is pressed the user will be prompted for a DOS command which will be executed then the TEAPAC program will resume operation where it left off with no loss of input data As before the DOS program to be run while using the Shell option must be small enough to fit in memory while the TEAPAC program is still in memory or a DOS error will occur This is a useful option for example for executing a DIR command to determine the name of a file to use for a subsequent SAVE V2 L2 0 1INOV91 Clearer Messages Response for File Open Errors Users have frequently been confused by the file related error messages previously issued by TEAPAC programs This has been particularly true when a named file did not exist as well as when a file designated as a new file by using the N switch already existed The messages which are displayed under these two conditions have been clarified as have the action responses which the user may take as a result of these conditions When a named file does not exist the user is given the opportunity to re specify its name or to create a file with that name When a new file already exists the user is given the opportunity to use the existing file anyway or to re specify its name New
260. ion of the Coordinate System Management dialog mentioned above is invoked automatically any time a data file is Opened or Saved or any time NETWORK or NODELOCATION information is changed either via drag and drop actions or direct keyboard entry thereby giving immediate feedback when a network definition problem could be corrupting an analysis The Analyze function is also invoked prior to other program functions which make significant use of the spatial arrangement of the network such as Exporting in PRENETSIM PRESYNCHRO and PRETSPPD and FindPaths in SITE gt V7 00 21 Frequency of Automatic Update Check Can Be Set By User A new user entry can now be made which controls the number of days between automatic checks for program updates The entry can be found in the Help Check_For_Newer_Updates menu dialog With this new feature the maximum frequency of automatic checks is once per day not every time the program is run Automatic checks can be disabled by entering a frequency of 0 days but this is not recommended checking for updates every 10 30 days is recommended gt V7 00 21 Improved Initial Zoom All View for Large Coordinate Range The initial Zoom All display for a network when a file is opened has been improved for all networks especially those with a wide range of coordinates such that the zoom level used is more appropriate for all combinations of networks and display resolutions gt V7 00 21 Improved Network Editing Features
261. is line number is displayed in the dialog box of the file access command Another use of the default line number is for access of SAVEd scenarios in the same order they were SAVEd For example the first scenario from above can be LOADed starting at line 1 and analyzed then the next scenario can be LOADed starting at the default line number of 51 again without remembering what it is Another line number that is remembered by the program is the last line that was used for the file by any file access command This line number is designated by using line 0 of the file For example if information from the second scenario above was LOADed starting at line 51 and the analysis determined that are error in the input existed it could be corrected and re SAVEd using line number 0 Since the previous file access command LOAD started at line 51 whether by default or actual input the following SAVE 0 command will start at line 51 again effectively re SAVing the information over the previous information with the corrections In this sense a TEAPAC G 229 Reference repeated series of LOAD and SAVE 0 commands will LOAD the next information from the file then re SAVE any changes made before LOADing the next information File Numbers The file numbers used in file access commands such as SAVE and LOAD refer to the position in which the file name desired exists on the current FILES command The FILES command can carry up to five files simultaneously a
262. is now available in the main window The option to Save output to a text file now allows the user to name a file A more informative message is issued if a file to open is already in use Better message if attempt to Open a non TEAPAC file TEAPAC programs can now be installed in a folder with spaces in path name A new option exists to automatically close subsequent warnings and errors stays in effect until control returned to user for stacked files and control files Files can now be dragged to a desktop icon to launch the program uses the dragged file All keywords now display using title case instead of all caps All dialog boxes have been enhanced with a more modern look using depressed input fields Protect the Options Setup fields which should not be changed except by re installing Browse buttons have been added for the data and host path entries to simplify changes The current data file path from Options Setup is shown in the FILES dialog Reading data from a file during control file execution doesn t set flag so won t get prompted with message to save data from a control file Better closure of main window if control file halts program same function improved if control file dragged to main window halts prog Hourglass mouse cursor displays while printing PREPASSR Ver 1 54 15JAN00 Build 14 gt New Print Module for 32 bit Windows A new TEAPAC print module TEAPACPR exe has been created for 32 bit Windows platforms Windows 95 Windows 98 Window
263. ision PREPASSR _ B 152 Reference ROUTE ROUTE ROUTE lt Route gt _ lt List of Artery Nodes gt Defaults Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM EXPORT The purpose of this command is to enter a list of node numbers which represent the intersections on the artery for the given route number lt Route gt is the number of the route which is defined by the following list of artery nodes and can be any integer from 1 to 8 It has no default value and must be entered lt List of Artery Nodes gt is a list of up to 25 node numbers in the current NODELIST SUBSYSTEM whose order defines the artery route It can be any node number in the NODELIST SUBS YSTEM from 0 to 999 It has no default value and must be entered Notes For compatibility with PRETRANSYT the definition of routes should follow the specific rules presented in the TRANSYT manual For example a route may be l way or 2 way but may not be partially 1 way and partially 2 way None of these checks are performed by PREPASSR to validate the route definition The user must retain final responsibility for the proper definitions of routes for use by PRETRANSYT Route numbers can be referenced by use of negative numbers on the SUBSYSTEM PLOT and TIMINGS commands to quickly identify routes for analysis For example if ROUTE 1 is defined by an appropriate ROUTE command a subsystem analysis for only this route can be created through the use of the SUBSYSTEM 1 command thi
264. itions are PREPASSR_ H 245 Reference reported in abbreviated form at the end of a Summary of Parameter Values produced for all intersections Dummy external nodes are omitted from the PASSER Export in order to minimize the number of intersections sent to PASSER which has a maximum of 20 intersections and links with bend nodes and or unsignalized intersections are merged into a single link for the same reason PREPASSR output reports which are significantly enhanced by the new color graphics results produced by Visual TEAPAC include all phasing displays clearly showing permitted movements either in HCM by phase style or ring based by movement style and the full color time space diagram which shows all phases and clearance intervals directional offsets and band widths PREPASSR Ver 2 61 23MAY05 Build 12 30SEP05 gt Field Width Error Detection Modified for More Useful Performance A new error check was recently introduced to warn a user that too many characters for an input field had been entered and that the entry would be truncated The aggressive response to this condition ignoring the entry entirely has been toned back now accepting the truncated input with a similar warning This reduces the potential for the need to re type an entry which may be perfectly fine in its truncated form or require only minor editing to correct instead of complete re entry The new error check has also been eliminated for any entries of the GR
265. itted in which case the time for each clearance interval in PASSER will be set to the sum of the LOSTTIMES values On a related note if a zero time for an overlap phase is used this is permitted by PREPASSR although 1 second is used for PASSER since PASSER will not allow a zero time phase In the event that an overlap phase s green and yellow times are both zero the clearance time is set to the minimum value of 1 second rather than the LOSTTIMES values gt Operation Changes Made for Better Program Responses A number of operational changes in the program s execution have been made for better responses to certain situations The field separator between the INTERSECTION number and description is now always displayed except when the cursor is in the number field Extra SEQUENCE codes which SIGNAL85 may have placed in a data file are ignored if the file is being LOADed with the SHARE option Only the first SEQUENCE code is accepted If no NODELIST exists no EXPORT is attempted This option can be used to establish the name of the export file for subsequent EXPORT commands particularly if they are in a REPEAT loop where each EXPORT is to be stacked one after the other The PLOT and TIMINGS commands no longer require that SATFLOWS have been entered in order to execute The ESCape key is checked more frequently during repeated error displays WIDTHS inputs are now maintained at the same accuracy as SIGNAL85 for better compa
266. l Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Now let s enter the information needed to describe the problem The first entry should be the list of valid node numbers for the system NODELIST Basic gt NODELIST 13 1415 This information sets up the system data while the entries below describe the conditions at each individual intersection Note that the INTERSECTION command identifies which intersection the data that follows applies to In the Tabular View INTERSECTION is an active command which needs to be executed with the Execute button in order to change the dialog box values to the new intersection Also when entering the movement parameters PREPASSR expects the data to be entered starting with the North approach right turns and proceeding clockwise around the intersection as shown below See Chapter 1 Conventions for more detail Enter the following information for intersection 13 Basic gt INTERSECTION 13 MONROE Intersection NODELOCATION 00 As an efficiency aid one can move to the next dialog box in sequence as shown in the Edit menu with the Next button instead of using the menu each time Thus instead of pressing the OK button after the INTERSECTION entry above and using the Edit menu to select NETWORK simply press the Next button Basic gt NETWORK EAST 2130 35 14 Basic gt VOLUMES 122 216 80 79 722 187 212 310 198 139 660 134 Basic gt WIDTHS 0240 02412 02412 02412 Basic gt SATFLOWS 0 24100 0 2771 1433 0 2337
267. lay calculations for example to match delays obtained from a network simulation model NSTOPFACTORS 12 lt Stops Adjustment Factor gt Enter twelve factors used to adjust the number of stops calculations of the EVALUATE report of the current intersection for example to match the number of stops obtained from a network simulation model CRITICALS 6 lt Critical Movement Number gt Enter the movement which is critical for each phase of the phase sequence of operation of the current intersection PEDTIME lt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Time gt lt Phase Number gt Enter the time for an exclusive pedestrian scramble phase of the current intersection Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data The following are commands which can be used to describe traffic generator data for each intersection being analyzed but whose data values are not used by PREPASSR Their inclusion in the program is to provide seamless data file compatibility with the SITE program in particular and all TEAPAC programs in general SITESIZE lt of Distribution Types gt lt of Inbound Types gt Enter the number of distribution types to be used to describe the inbound and outbound traffic generation ROUND lt Precision of Totals gt Enter the precision to be used in computing the results BASE lt Generation Base gt lt X Y Coord LL gt lt X Y Coord UR gt Enter the base development size for generating trips as it relates to the generation rates used for
268. le less than or equal to 32767 positive negative or zero Its default value is the next line of the file lt File Numbers is the order number of the desired file on the FILES command and can be any integer from 1 to 5 Its default value is the next file in the file list lt List of Commands gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all non active commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes The next line default is defined as the line number following the line of the file which was last accessed This is usually the line number which follows the last information LOADed or SAVEd When a FILES command is given the next line for the specified file is automatically set equal to one The next line can be changed by use of the NEXTLINES command The next file default is defined as the file whose number is one greater than the file number currently in use The keyboard should be considered file 0 for this purpose Thus the default file number for a SAVE from the keyboard is file 1 If a SAVE command is encountered in file 1 its next file default is file 2 etc If lt Line Number gt is entered as 0 the SAVE will start at the last line The last line is defined as the last point in the file where file access was previously initiated For example LOAD 10 followed later by SAVE 0 will
269. lidity and reasonableness Following a successful run with PASSER the same data can be EXPORTed to PASSER preceded by the OPTIMIZE command to describe what PASSER will be allowed to optimize only offsets both splits and offsets or the cycle and splits and offsets When PASSER finishes the resultant timings can be IMPORTed into PREPASSR to define the final timings and interactive time space diagrams can be PLOTted to observe the results on screen or on the printer The TIMINGS command can again be used to document in a clear manner what the final timings are From this point it is common to speculate what would happen if certain changes to the timings are made which are intuitively better than those produced by PASSER This is typically the result of looking at the time space diagrams and speculating small changes in offsets which appear to improve the progression of traffic which PASSER doesn t really consider These changes can be made easily within PREPASSR and re PLOTted with PREPASSR to observe the apparent results When a satisfactory change has been entered these inputs can again be exported to PASSER for evaluation so that these timings can be compared to PASSER s optimized timings In addition the PASSER optimized timings can be sent to SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT PRETSPPD or PRENETSIM for further assessment or optimization by these programs Using this technique a final set of timings can be arrived at in a quick and definitive fashion
270. ll not be referenced anywhere in that release of the manual PREPASSR B 114 Reference METROAREA METROAREA METROAREA lt Location gt Defaults NON CBD Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the location of the intersection within the metropolitan area of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Location gt is a keyword describing the location of the intersection within the metropolitan area and can be any of the following CBD central business district NON CBD any area other than CBD default Notes Entry of any keyword other than CBD will generate a NON CBD entry since this is the only area location distinction made by the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual computations The other keywords are allowed for compatibility with previous versions of SIGNAL2000 SIGNAL97 SIGNAL94 SIGNAL85 and SIGNAL Only the CBD and NON CBD keywords are SAVEd in a data file PREPASSR B 115 Reference MINIMUMS MINIMUMS MINIMUMS 12 lt Minimum Green Time gt Defaults 12 5 0 Groups Menus PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the minimum green time requirements for each of the twelve movements at the current intersection lt Minimum Green Time gt is the number of seconds which as a minimum must be received by the movement in order to satisfy requirements of safety and driver reaction and can be any number from 0 to 99 9 Its de
271. llowing list of movements and can be 0 6 There is no default for lt Phase Number gt it must be entered lt List of Movements gt is the movement number occurring during the specified phase and can be 12 through 12 Its default value is 0 Notes This is used for phasings that are not included in the standard sequence codes The use of negative SEQUENCES codes in the range of 1 through 9 is required for the PHASEMOVEMENTS command to define the phasing e Movements must receive only one constant green indication during each cycle Negative movement numbers should be used only to indicate permissive lefts following or preceding exclusive left phases Negative movement numbers should not be used if the only phase the movement is allowed is permitted opposed If the SHARE option of the LOAD command encounters a PHASEMOVEMENTS command in a data file when the SEQUENCE code is not in the range of 1 through 5 it is ignored without an error This accounts for the way SIGNAL2000 saves data since SIGNAL2000 is the likely source of the data being SHAREd Ignoring the PHASEMOVEMENTS command prevents getting an error message because of this different saving technique In this case the current data values of the PHASEMOVEMENTS command remain unchanged The order of input of phases for PHASEMOVEMENTS is not important The number of phases in the final phasing is determined by the last phase which has a non zero number of movements
272. log as shown in the sample format below COMMAND lt Parameter Value gt 5 lt Another Parameter gt Parameter values which are enclosed by angle brackets lt and gt indicate that the bracketed description is to be replaced by a parameter value as described If a command requires more than one parameter value of the same type this is represented by an asterisk preceded by the number of entries expected or allowed In the example above as many as five of lt Another Parameter gt can be entered This command header is then followed by a summary which describes the main purpose of the command Details of the command s usage are found in Appendix B Remember that each PREPASSR command has been classified into one or more groups which share functional similarities Appendix A provides a tabular summary of all commands assigned to each command group Appendix B provides a detailed table of information for each command listed in alphabetical order Appendices A and B can be used as reference documents when questions arise regarding any given group or command Refer to Chapter 4 TEAPAC Command Structure in the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual for a detailed discussion of group names and their uses Chapter 4 Topics Chapter 4 Introduction RESULTS Dialogs PARAMETERS Dialogs Common TEAPAC Dialogs PREPASSR _ 34 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS RESULTS Dialogs RESULTS commands are
273. log data entry or analysis is made by simply clicking the intersection Intersections can also be selected by a right click which opens a popup menu with all the data entry and data analysis dialogs immediately available either in Normal View or Tabular View use F3 to toggle the view The popup menu also allows the renumbering or deletion of the selected node Dragging a rubber band selection box around a set of intersections can be used to define or add to with Ctrl key a subsystem of intersections for subsequent analysis The on screen shortest path FindPath assignment function of the SITE program is now performed in color directly on the main window graphics network display including the bitmap background providing helpful visual cues while performing the assignment process The on screen Startup Help button provides immediate assistance for all of the functions described above Visit www StrongConcepts com for examples of the new graphical input front end now found in Visual TEAPAC gt Visual TEAPAC Enhanced Graphical Output Reporting All TEAPAC programs now feature enhanced graphical output reporting for all results produced Output reports now make full use of color and graphics drawing for arrows phasing diagrams permitted movements time space diagrams intersection diagrams cycle optimization graphs daily count variation graphs etc All reports are printable on any color or black amp white printer supported by Windows i
274. low the and will end after the last non blank character which is entered See Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual for further explanation and examples of this feature Entries on this command may be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes This option provides the capability to include leading blanks in the entry which is otherwise not possible This option can also be used to enter a single blank as the title line using a or entry thereby blanking out the entire prior contents of the title line e The name of the current open file can be inserted anywhere in the title line by placing F at the desired location of the title line The file name can be placed at a specific column location in a title line by using the XX form of a title entry noted above PREPASSR _ B 84 Reference ECHO ECHO ECHO lt Input Output Echo Condition gt Defaults NO Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to enter the echo condition flag indicating whether or not command information should be displayed after being input from or output to a file lt Input Output Echo Condition gt is a keyword describing whether or not file input and output should be echoed and can be either of the keywords described below NO File I O will not be echoed default YES File I O will be echoed Notes When data is LOADed from or SAVEd to data files listings of the actual data lines being transferred can be obtained
275. lse in the network are also updated making renumbering a snap gt T2004v6 Save Remembers Selected Intersection Type for Subsequent Open When data files are saved a directive is placed at the end of the file which remembers the current intersection and current distribution type so that these positions can be reset when the file is subsequently re opened by either the same program or any other TEAPAC program gt T2004v6 Error Message Help Leaves Dialogs Open so Errant Entries Can Be Seen When Help for an error or warning message is displayed the dialog entry which caused the error or warning is now left open so the entered values can be inspected in relation to the help advise given Also a note is provided in the message to use the Refresh button to see the dialog with the actual current values which are likely to not reflect the entry attempted which caused the error or warning gt T2004v6 Errors Contain Cancel Button to Abort File Open or Control File When errors or warnings are issued as a result of reading a data file a Cancel button is now provided which allows the user to abort continued attempts to read the file This is now a convenient way to halt attempted processing of a file which is clearly not what was intended or for power users a way to kill a control file which has gone off the deep end gt T2004v6 OUTPUT Dialog Contains Entries for All Programs The OUTPUT dialog is a common dialog name which has had
276. lt Inbound Types gt 12 lt Startup Lost Time sec gt lt Program Name gt 12 lt Storage Distance feet gt 100 lt Node of Subsystem gt vph gt lt Node List gt lt Movement gt lt Time gt lt List of Counts gt 12 lt Truck Thru Bus Percentage gt 4 lt Upstream v c Ratio gt 12 lt Lane Utilization Factor gt lt Movement gt lt Time gt lt List of Counts gt lt Factor gt 12 lt Additional Volume gt lt Years gt 12 lt Count Adjustment Factor gt 12 lt Design Hour Volume veh hr gt 12 lt Lane Group Width feet gt 6 lt Phase Yellow Time sec or sec sec gt PREPASSR_ A 60 Reference Defaults 12 1 00 0 0 1 NONE 15 0 PPS 202 4 YES 4 NONI 4 20 0 0 E S W gt lt Desc gt Count Interval gt 5 lt lt Start Time gt lt Stop Time gt gt ft gt 12 0 90 4 0 0 0 0 Ss 4 NO 0 nodelist blanks 90 25 40 1 1 1 12 4 0 PARAM 4 0 2520 12 0 nxt nxt 0 60 15 1 TI 0 0 KZS 20 P 12 0 100 0 nodelist 0 12 2 0 4 0 0 T2 0 2 0 0 1 0 12 0 12 1 00 12 0 12 0 6 0 0 APPENDIX B Detailed Description of Actions and Entries Appendix B Topics Appendix B provides detailed information on each PREPASSR command and any associated parameter values The commands are listed in alphabetical order This appendix includes the 22 basic TEAPAC commands as well as the unique PREPASSR commands Five specific categories of
277. ltiple LOADS Allowed with SHARE Option without RESET Execution RESET is not executed when multiple SHAREd LOADS are executed this is most useful for programs like SITE PREPASSR PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM when they LOAD a complete set of SIGNAL85 intersection data from a single file with a single LOAD command e g LOAD 1 1 SHARE 20 Version Level Number of Program Listed in All Printed Output The program s Version Level number is now included as a part of all printed report titles to make it clear what version of the program generated the results Improvements to CALCULATE Command A bug is fixed in assigning CALCULATE results to variables in a full screen display CALCULATE results are displayed in a bigger format which accommodates all possible integer results and better overflow error checking is performed New Editing Keys and On line Help Update Using Ctrl END has the same effect as using the END key on line help screens have been updated with this and other changes such as Ctrl ENTER Improved Error Checking and Processing An invalid command in the SAVE list now generates a more reasonable response by terminating all file access before the SAVE is aborted An invalid command in the ASK list now aborts the ASK function rather than proceeding without the invalid entry Error messages listed as WARNINGS in the documentation are now labeled as WARNINGS in the screen displays Improved Drive Subdirectory and DOS Environ
278. ly input the optimized timings from a PASSER 2 output file The PASSER 2 Imported Data report can be used to verify the data values which were extracted from the PASSER output Pin Settings Found This message indicates that a valid PASSER II output file was found with the necessary Pin Settings report included If no such output is found an error message to this effect is reported instead PSR Greens amp Yellows This message indicates whether the green times and yellow times found in the Pin Settings report are included in or excluded from the IMPORT process This is controlled by the type of OPTIMIZation selected PASSER II Imported Data The actual data values which are found in the Pin Settings report are listed in the form of the PREPASSR command which is used to input these data values into PREPASSR This includes INTERSECTION OFFSET CYCLES GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES The following is an example of the PASSER 2 Imported Data text only report using the PREPASSR program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum PREPASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 PASSER II Imported Data Pin Settings Found in IMPORT File PSR Greens amp Yellows are Included in IMPORT
279. m a network simulation model for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Delay Adjustment Factor gt is the factor to adjust delay calculated for each movement and can be any number from 0 01 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes If delay values have been simulated with a network model such as TRANSYT 7F or NETSIM CORSIM which does a better job of modeling delay between coordinated signals than the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual allows DELAYFACTORS may be used to force the calculations of delay in SIGNAL2000 to the same values For example if SIGNAL2000 calculates delay of 20 seconds but TRANS YT7F estimates 16 seconds use a DELAYFACTOR of 0 80 PREPASSR B 83 Reference DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION lt Second Title Line gt Defaults 80 blanks Menus Groups TITLES The purpose of this command is to enter the second line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed lt Second Title Line gt is the second of three lines of information displayed at the top of every output report and can be up to 80 characters of alphabetic or numeric information Its default value is 80 blanks Notes If the first character of the DESCRIPTION parameter is a plus sign the characters entered on this command will be overlaid over those of the previously entered DESCRIPTION command This overlay will begin at the character position identified by the digits of the first two characters which fol
280. m the keyboard and the next line number is always the default line number the entire default LOAD command can be used making the LOADing as easy as possible Output Control Within a TEAPAC program it is possible to redirect output display on the screen to other output devices The most common use of this function is to direct output to the printer however it is also possible to direct output to disk files This section discusses the methods of redirecting output to these devices Printer Control Disk File Output Printer Control Any of the results generated by a TEAPAC program will appear in a Results window from which they can be printed The Results window has a File menu from which the Print command can be selected This will direct the program output in the Results window to the default printer The Ctrl P key may also be used as a shortcut key to print the Results window From the main menu TEAPAC G 230 Reference the File Print Ctrl P selection will print a copy of the last output seen in the Results window This last output can be viewed with the View LastOutput menu command The PrintSetup options of these File menus can be used to select specific printers as well as printer options like number of copies print to file print both sides etc prior to issuing the File Print command The SetupAndPrint option performs both functions with a single menu selection The default printer can be set outside of the TEAP
281. made or might be altered when using the drag and drop network creation editing functions in the main window Entries made from a dialog will change the values created in the main window and vice versa The SUBSYSTEM command allows a subset of the complete NODELIST to be exported to PASSER in Usage Level 2 versions of PREPASSR This means that the entire network up to 500 signals may be LOADed into PREPASSR then only the pertinent signals are exported to PASSER This allows for extremely efficient testing of various potential subsystem boundaries Single intersection analysis with PASSER may also be executed using SUBSYSTEM to select only one signal Like the NODELIST command the entry of a 0 node in the SUBSYSTEM list will terminate the SUBSYSTEM list of nodes and zero out any subsequent nodes in the list In Usage Level 2 versions of PREPASSR the SUBSYSTEM can be as many as 100 nodes in length In Usage Level 3 SUBSYSTEM can be as many as 500 nodes in length Before using more than 20 nodes in the SUBSYSTEM make sure that the PASSER version to be used can support more than 20 nodes The current distribution version of PASSER supports only 20 nodes When in the menu mode or using the ASK command to enter the SUBSYSTEM command only 12 intersections can be entered If a subsystem of more than 12 intersections must be entered use the Manual Mode to make the original entry or any future edits using ampersands amp to contin
282. mation about a bitmap file and its scaling this information is ignored in deference to the bitmap scaling information currently in effect in the program The help PREPASSR_ H 242 Reference strings for this function have also been updated and the function is initialized more completely each time it is used to avoid overlap with responses to previous error situations gt V7 00 14 Help File Formatting Restored to Previous Style The numbering of the indented paragraphs in the Notes section of Appendix B of the Help file has been restored as appeared previously gt V7 00 14 Minor Cleanups and Fixes Implemented A number of mostly internal cleanups and fixes have been implemented for more reliable operation of Visual TEAPAC programs Most of these will not be noticeable to users but a couple will resolve certain problems a few users have experienced For example opening an old TEAPAC data file which does not contain valid NODELOCATION entries for each intersection will not crash and moving a bend node under certain conditions will not cause the program to close prematurely Build 07 11INOV05 gt Visual TEAPAC A Whole New Way of Seeing TEAPAC All 13 modules of the TEAPAC suite of programs have been upgraded to the Visual TEAPAC Version 7 interface Primarily this means each program sports a much more visual input and output system to make entering and viewing data for the analysis network much easier and to make the resultin
283. mbinations of scales and print pitches The lt Scale gt of the diagram can also be adjusted in many cases so that the entire time space diagram will fit into the available screen display or on one page of output the default e The time space diagram will display approximate speed slope lines in the right margin of the time space diagram If the width of the output device screen or printer is not adequate to display these lines they can be relocated into the body of the time space diagram by inputting a negative lt Scale gt entry For example inputting 100 would display the same time space diagram as the default but the speed slope lines would be within the time space diagram rather than in the right margin Caution should be used in this case however that the position of the speed slope lines is not perceived to represent traffic flow profiles This interpretation is one best achieved only by a qualified analyst Route numbers can be referenced by use of negative numbers on the PLOT command to quickly identify routes for analysis For example if ROUTE 1 is defined by an appropriate ROUTE command a PLOT for this route can be created through the use of the PLOT 1 command lt List of Nodes gt is limited to 25 intersections in Usage Level 2 and limited to 12 intersections in Usage Level 1 PREPASSR B 143 Reference PROJECT PROJECT PROJECT lt First Title Line gt Defaults 80 blanks Menus Groups TITLES The purpo
284. med or not at the user s discretion If the save is desired select Yes if not or there is any uncertainty select No to abort the save TPC31 WARNING This keywordis not recognizable Look at HELP for its allowed values This error message indicates that an invalid parameter value was detected Generally this indicates that an invalid character string was entered as a parameter value Action Re enter the appropriate parameter value or values to correct the invalid entry or press the ENTER key to ignore the invalid entry and leave the previous parameter value TPC32 WARNING More parameters were found than were expected The extras have been ignored This message is displayed when more parameter values are entered for a particular command than the program will accept This usually indicates a miscount of input often a parameter value was entered twice Most commands will re prompt for a correct parameter list after this error After this error any extra entries will be ignored The parameter list can also be re typed starting at the position where a duplicate or unwanted entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed as usual Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the parameter values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode where this error will most likely occur it is recommended t
285. ment the TEAPAC2004 version of PREPASSR has been released as Ver 2 60 The highlights of the changes since its prior release include the following Completely seamless one click one file exchange of all input and results with SIGNAL2000 all other PRE processors SITE TURNS and WARRANTS including calculations of HCM satflows optimized timings peak period turn counts and estimated site traffic New volume adjustment inputs to allow factoring volumes and adding additional volumes on a movement by movement basis New sensitivity controls for global testing of factored volumes additive volumes factored satflows minimums clearances etc PREPASSR_ H 249 Reference Complete implementation of the enhanced TEAPAC2004 Ver 6 user interface as described below gt New Volume Adjustment Inputs Provide Sensitivity Analysis Flexibility A new input called VOLFACTORS has been added that allows a volume adjustment factor to be provided for each individual movement of each intersection Each volume entry is multiplied by this factor with the option of further providing a number of years the factor should first be compounded This feature provides the ability to easily test various traffic growth factor scenarios as well as sensitivity analysis for the base volume entry Another new input called VOLADDITIONALS has been added that allows a volume adjustment value to be provided for each individual movement of each intersection Each volume ent
286. ment Support Disk drives A through Z are now supported rather than A through P Dynamic program linkages such as to and from HCS can now be performed from the root directory in addition to any subdirectory A bigger DOS environment can be scanned when searching for the system PATH now 1024 bytes rather than 512 PREPASSR_ H 284 Reference Helpful Prompt when Entering Manual Mode Directly from Opening Screen Pressing ESC at the opening screen to enter the Manual Mode generates the Use F4 for Menu Mode message in the event the Manual Mode was not intended Demo Time out Period Decreased for Faster Demos The time out period between demo screens is reduced from 10 sec to 7 sec PREPASSR V1 L3 0 01MAY92 gt PASSER2 90 Explicitly Supported in Addition to PASSER2 87 The latest PASSER2 90 version of PASSER is now explicitly supported and is the default version for the EXPORT process even though the data files of both latest versions of PASSER2 87 and 90 are nominally compatible gt New Offset only Optimization and Simulation Options Implemented It is now possible using PREPASSR to constrain PASSER so that it will only change the offsets during its optimization process leaving the splits which were entered into PREPASSR unchanged This is done with the new OFFSETS option of the OPTIMIZE command This option is a good way to prevent PASSER from creating greentimes which are too short and create too much delay for mino
287. ments are discussed in detail below Drive Path Designation d path File Name nnnnn File Extension eee Switch s TEAPAC G 226 Reference Drive Path Designation d path The drive path designation indicates which disk drive and or system path should be used to find an existing lt File Name gt or to place a new lt File Name gt Typically drive path designations are letters such as C for the local hard drive folder or sub folder names enclosed in back slashes network paths starting with double back slashes or a combination of these designations The length of the drive path designation cannot exceed a maximum of 180 characters and upper lower case characters and spaces are allowed If no drive path designation is provided the default drive path comes from the third entry displayed in the dialog of the Options Setup menu This location comes from the program s CFG file on program startup a file whose contents can be altered with the Save button of the Options Setup dialog The Options Setup dialog changes dynamically as the user navigates through the File Open and File SaveAs dialogs A common feature of Windows can be used to direct TEAPAC data files to another drive path This is the Map Network Drive function This process substitutes a network drive location for a drive designation For example on a typical system with an A B and C drive a MAPped D drive can be created pointing to a network drive els
288. more predictable use under the new Visual TEAPAC methods gt V7 00 21 New Manual Distance Option Added to NETWORK Dialog Entry A new option can be selected in the NETWORK dialog individually for any given link of the network that indicates that the distance entered for that link is intentionally inconsistent with the network coordinate system and apparent network scale Links which have this option selected are specifically excluded from the computation of the average coordinate system scale used and reported in the network Analysis function described above Although not recommended selecting this option allows a link s distance to be inconsistent with the coordinate system without adversely affecting the management and checking of the rest of the network In addition to this option the NETWORK dialog also shows the calculated link distance based on the coordinate system and the average coordinate system scale if not equal to 1 0 and if this calculated distance is outside of the allowed error specified in the Coordinate System Management dialog it is displayed in red The Manual Distance option status is also shown in all data summaries which include NETWORK data and new distances which are required due to PREPASSR_ H 239 Reference any network editing are now always based on the coordinate distance unless a link is previously marked for Manual Distance gt V7 00 21 Automatic Network Relationship Checks Made The new Analyze funct
289. n be SAVEd starting at line 51 of the file If it also takes 50 lines as reported by the SAVE command this information will be stored in lines 51 100 In order to retrieve this information line 51 should be used as the starting line number of the LOAD command If the first scenario is desired again simply LOAD starting at line again Any number of scenarios or conditions may be SAVEd and LOADed to and from a file simply by knowing at which line number the information starts When SAVing information it is important to either re SAVE starting at the same line number as previously used or to SAVE starting at the next available line number of the file When re SAVing information make sure the same information is SAVEd as previously used so that it takes up the same number of lines used previously If more lines are used they will overwrite the beginning of the next information if it exists and if less lines are used they will not erase the end of the previously SAVEd information After any file access is completed such as a LOAD or a SAVE the default line number for that file remains at the next line of the file until another file access command is executed or another file is opened For example after the first SAVE above taking 50 lines of the file the default line number for the next file access command will be line 51 If another scenario is to be SAVEd the default line number may be used without remembering what it is For File 1 th
290. n for use in the determination of the Delay Adjustment Factor and can take on values in the ranges described below 0 lt Value lt 6 indicates the actual Arrival Type 7 lt Value lt 300 indicates the value entered is the percentage of platoon ratio RP 100 lt Value lt 1 indicates the value entered is the negative of the percentage of all vehicles in the movement arriving during the green phase PVG Its default value is 3 for all movements Notes ARRIVALTYPES is used for computing the Progression Adjustment Factor according to Exhibit 16 12 of the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual For RP values less than or equal to 6 use Arrival Type 1 If the value is entered as either PVG or RP the program will determine the arrival type based on the method outlined in the 2000 Highway Capacity Manual Values 1 through 6 are defined as in Exhibit 16 11 of the manual An ARRIVALTYPE value other than 3 may be used for a movement with ACTUATIONS set to something other than NO but only where it is clear that the coordinated movement is truly actuated when it is also coordinated Note that although many intersections in a network may be entered into SIGNAL2000 the arrival type is a user entry and is not determined by the program based on flows from other intersections in the network PREPASSR _ B 68 Reference ASK ASK ASK lt List of Commands gt Defaults PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose
291. n the root directory e g C It was intended that the user would be logged to a data subdirectory when the option was used This artificial limitation has been removed now allowing EXPORT AUTO to be executed when the user is logged to the root directory as well as any other subdirectory Another change made to EXPORT AUTO is the deletion of the IOSPEC DAT file which is created during the process helping to make sure this file is not inadvertently used by another independent run of PASSER gt Lost Time Now Entered with a Single Value Consistent with SIGNAL85 94 The LOSTTIME entry is now made with a single value instead of the Start Lag and End Lag which was previously used This is now consistent with the way lost time is handled and SAVEd with SIGNAL85 94 making the sharing of SIGNAL85 94 data files more consistent If two PREPASSR_ H 281 Reference LOSTTIME entries are input as would be the case when LOADing an old PREPASSR data file the two entered values are added together and placed in the single input position for the new LOSTTIME entry This keeps PREPASSR upwards compatible with old data files The allowed input range has also been limited to values from 0 0 to 30 0 gt PLOT Command No Longer Requires the Input of the Starting Main Direction For the PLOT command the main street direction input for the first link of the time space diagram is no longer a required input The main street direction is determined automatically by
292. n the system node list above Demand Volumes The design hour volumes in vehicles per hour at the intersection for each of the twelve possible movements at the intersection Peak Hour Factors The peak hour factors for each of the twelve possible movements at the intersection Truck Percentages The percentage of heavy vehicles in the traffic stream for each of the twelve possible movements at the intersection Right Turn on Red The volume of right turn on red maneuvers made per hour for each right turn at the intersection Approach Widths The widths of pavement available for each of the twelve movements at the intersection If no exclusive turn lane exists a width of zero is shown for the turn movement Number of Lanes The number of lanes included in the above width for each lane group at the intersection Lane Group Type The type of lane group designated for each lane group above including Normal FreeFlow DualOptional Stop controlled or Yield controlled Saturation Flow The maximum release flow rate in vehicles per hour of green for each lane group of the intersection Each non zero width requires a non zero saturation flow rate Minimum Green The minimum green time in seconds required for safe passage of each of the twelve movements Actuated Movements A NO or YES flag which indicates whether each movement of the intersection is part of an actuated phase Startup Lost Time The number of seconds of startup lost t
293. name cannot be located as specified Re enter a different name This error message has been superseded by TPC16 and TPC18 TPC12 ERROR File number xxxxx is not in the range of 0 to 5 All file access is aborted TEAPAC programs can access from one to five data files at a given time These five files are specified by the use of the FILES command Each file is numbered from one to five in the order they are entered with the FILES command Commands such as LOAD and SAVE direct the program to these files by giving the lt File Number gt of the file to be used This error will occur if the lt File Number gt parameter value used is not between and 5 inclusive Other file access commands such as OUTPUT use the lt File Number gt parameter in a similar fashion Action Re specify the command which is referencing an improper lt File Number gt with the correct lt File Number gt TPC13 ERROR File number xxxxx is not defined by the FILES command File access aborted TEAPAC programs can access from one to five data files at a given time These five files are specified by the use of the FILES command Each file is numbered from one to five in the order they are entered with the FILES command Commands such as LOAD and SAVE direct the program to these files by giving the lt File Number gt of the file to be used This error will occur if the lt File Number gt parameter of a command references a position of the FILES command which is not curr
294. nation of 64 distinct phasings can be precisely represented with a single two digit number This phasing can also be communicated quickly and succinctly to other users Note also that the phasings specified by the sequence code can be altered slightly by the addition of permissive left turns as defined by the PERMISSIVES command by a change in phase order as defined by the LEADLAGS command and by the addition of overlapping right turns based on the existence of exclusive right turn lanes OVERLAPS Also if SEQUENCES code 1 through 5 is specified the phasing can be defined arbitrarily by proper use of the PHASEMOVEMENTS command INTERSECTION Command In the Tabular View the INTERSECTION command is an active command which requires use of the Execute button to execute it When selecting a new intersection number from the NODELIST to use on the INTERSECTION command so that information can be entered or reviewed for that intersection first enter the new node number then use the Execute button to execute the INTERSECTION command The dialog box will now show the current values for the new intersection The first time the INTERSECTION command is issued for an intersection the description can also be entered before the Execute button is used When subsequent entries of the INTERSECTION command are made without the description the previously entered description is retrieved PREPASSR E 207 Reference APPENDIX F TEAPAC System Error Message
295. nce A new message has been created which warns a user when calculated and or imported values will be lost when the program is closed or File New is used This provides a check against inadvertently losing data results which could otherwise be saved in a file for future use or use by another program The existence of unsaved calculated and or imported values is indicated in the window caption with an asterisk in the same fashion as changed user entry values In the case of PREPASSR the protected values are any imported CYCLES GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and or OFFSETS A similar message is now issued when File Open or Reset Parameters is used when edited calculated and or imported values have not been saved gt Edit Window Contents Can Be Printed Including Line Numbers The contents of the TED Edit window either within TED or the built in edit window in any TEAPAC program can now be printed using the normal print menu or toolbar buttons including line numbers gt Global Entry of Additional Sequence Codes Now Includes All Extra Codes The entry of additional sequence codes for intersection 0 to be assigned to all intersections has been expanded so that all extra sequence codes will be assigned to all intersections not just the first extra sequence code This allows added flexibility when using this global entry feature for SEQUENCES gt VOLADDITIONALS Values Now Allowed to be Negative The entry or computed values for VOLADDITIONA
296. ncidental change dictated by the graphics file naming conventions required by NETSIM but is important to users who will use these temporary files after the automatic EXPORT A specific case in point is when these output files are to be printed with PASSER or renamed so they are retained and not over written by subsequent automatic EXPORTS gt Minor Adjustments Made to Summarise Report Changes to the SUMMARISE report have been made to incorporate the new command inputs as well as other minor adjustments gt Bug Fixed for Certain Entries in Line Three of PREPASSR CFG File In earlier versions of PREPASSR under certain conditions edits made to line three of the PREPASSR CFG file may not perform properly This line defines the subdirectory where user data files are to be stored Such symptoms have only been observed during the IMPORT phase of an automatic EXPORT This bug has been fixed gt New PASSER File Name Conventions and Support Programs Used All default file naming by PREPASSR now follows the latest conventions of PASSER Specifically the default file extension for PASSER input files created by EXPORT is now PIN and the default file extension for PASSER output files created by EXPORT and used by IMPORT is now POF gt New Export File Options and File Handling PREPASSR H 279 Reference AUTO is now the default option for both EXPORT and IMPORT This new default generates an automatic run of PASSER and IMPORTs results from the
297. ncluding PDF writers Any graphics output page can be copied to the clipboard as a bitmap so it can be pasted into other applications The prior version s text PREPASSR_ H 244 Reference only results are still viewable alone or in parallel with the graphical results and selected text can be copied to the clipboard or saved to a text file for subsequent use as before In Visual TEAPAC you are no longer limited to the old archaic hard to read character graphics which was used when TEAPAC was originally created what did your computer look like 30 years ago All output reports use shades of color from the desktop theme style setting to highlight the results including report titles report sub sections column headings and alternating output lines The proportionally spaced sans serif Tahoma font is used for easier readability including right justified numeric results in columns Viewing options include zoom in zoom out zoom all to see an entire page rubber band selection to zoom in drag the page to scroll and click to re center Text strings can be searched for within one or many pages of results and multi page results can be quickly scanned with controls to advance to the next or previous page the next or previous report or the beginning or end of all results Visit www StrongConcepts com for examples of the new graphical output back end now found in Visual TEAPAC gt Other Generic Enhancements Found in All Visual TEAPAC Programs
298. nctions as an automatic plugin for all other Visual TEAPAC programs so that each program automatically understands the SCENARIO file structure which has been created and at no additional cost see below SCENARIO can easily define both single issue and multi issue conditions and any data dialog can be assigned or re assigned to any defined issue for as many as five independent mutually exclusive Issues 25 Conditions can be defined for each Issue For example a very common and simple single issue scenario would be having multiple volume conditions for one or more intersections for which capacity analysis intersection design and or signal timing optimization would be needed Other examples of a single issue analysis could be multiple years of traffic count data for TURNS or WARRANTS or multiple years or zones of land use for SITE s projected traffic estimation Multi issue scenarios could be combinations of any of these where the variation of one variable is independent of the others Another example of a multi issue scenario could be where one Issue is changing volumes based on the time of day and or day of week while the other Issue is independently changing intersection geometrics which depend on differing funding possibilities gt SCENARIO Support in All Visual TEAPAC Programs All Visual TEAPAC programs have been updated so that support for multi issue data files created by SCENARIO is automatic and seamless The SCENARIO program serves
299. nd the file number assigned to each is the position of the file name in the FILES list For example if existing conditions for an analysis are stacked sequentially in a file called EXIST and optimized conditions are to be stored in a file called OPTIM each could be open at the same time by using the FILES EXIST OPTIM command Since EXIST is the first file in the file list it will then be referred to as file number 1 by subsequent file access commands OPTIM is the second file name in the list so subsequent file access commands will use file number 2 for optimized conditions For example using this situation each scenario of existing conditions would be retrieved by using the command LOAD 1 and each set of optimized conditions would be SAVEd by using the command SAVE 2 If the optimized conditions are to be retrieved while the same FILES command is in effect the first scenario would be retrieved by a LOAD 1 2 command and subsequent scenarios would be retrieved by LOAD 2 commands The file number used only applies to the current FILES list in effect and need not be the same every time the files are used For example if the above optimized scenarios are to be retrieved on another day and the existing conditions are of no concern the FILES OPTIM command can be used to define OPTIM as file number 1 then the optimized scenarios can be retrieved with LOAD 1 commands Furthermore since file number 1 is the default file number when executed fro
300. nds in TEAPAC programs such as LOAD and SAVE use line numbers and file numbers to describe where the file access is to take place For example the syntax of the LOAD command is LOAD lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt In order to LOAD the proper information from the data file the proper lt Line Number gt and lt File Number gt must be specified The lt File Number gt describes which of the defined FILES are to be used while the lt Line Number gt describes where in the file to start the access Each of these parameters are discussed below The File Open Save SaveAs dialogs always work with line number 1 of file number 1 the following discussion only applies to the Advanced Files LOAD and SAVE options Line Numbers TEAPAC G 228 Reference File Numbers Line Numbers The line number of the file describes where in the file the access should begin If a new file has been opened to SAVE information the line number should be line to start at the beginning of the file When this information is to be retrieved line 1 should be used for the LOAD command If only one set of information is to be stored in the file line 1 should always be used for every SAVE and LOAD performed This is equivalent to the standard Windows functions of File Open Save SaveAs Information may be stacked in files sequentially For example if the data for an analysis is SAVEd starting at line 1 of a file and takes up 50 lines of the file another scenario ca
301. nformation needed to coordinate the PREPASSR offsets with those used by PASSER is coded into the PHASER DAT file as required by PASSER All user inputs for offsets are converted to the offset to the beginning of the first arterial phase which is what is is coded into PHASER DAT The following is an example of the PASSER2xx Formatted Input text only report using the PREPASSR program sample data The normal full color graphics version of the report contains the same results formatted with superior layout fonts and graphics it is not included here to keep the size of the downloadable program demo update help pdf files to a minimum PREPASSR D 193 Reference PREPASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 PASSER202 Formatted Input 0 a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 1Signal StudyArterial System Retiming 092104 301 60 60 0O 0110402000001301 13 MacArthu 1 o 0 0 0 0 0000201006441N 3900 14 Main amp P 2213035213035 0 0020001005222N 3900 15 Water amp 3 53035 53035 0 0020001002252N 4560 1 208 887 220 465 149 890 0 580 1143325251433241014482771 02337 1 8 8 0 8 0 8 2 654 689 01341 01440 0 226062634 05296 03041 0 0 2 8 8 0 8 0 8 0 3 0 637 0 0 323 867 0 653 3 02486 0 013003387 04402 3 0 8 0 0 8 8 0 8 P1900 152 04 0A0 90T6 519 532 552 078 061750 4 50000000 2 50000000 0 00000 Oo 00 PHASER DAT Offset Reference File 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1234567890123456789012345678901234567890123
302. nization of the user s desktop which matches the immediate needs of his her analysis This can be particularly helpful in highly multi tasked environments on ultra high resolution screens and on systems with dual monitors gt New Refresh Button for Normal and Tabular Views of Visual Mode A new Refresh button has been placed on virtually every dialog box for the purpose of refreshing the dialog with the current values in each entry cell in the event there is any confusion about whether a given entry has been accepted This is particularly helpful after certain errors have been encountered or in a Tabular View display where one entry may change another entries values without changing the display eg when a WIDTH entry changes a LANES entry in a different place of the dialog It can also be used to reset an action dialog s entries to the defaults after first being changed by the user gt Warning of Possible Incompatible Advanced File Usage Advanced users of multiple files and or multiple data sets in a single file are warned if a normal simple Windows file command such as File Save is used that appears inconsistent with the prior advanced file usage for the currently opened files This is intended to prevent inadvertent saving of data on top of unintended places in advanced usage files gt Help Available for Errors and Warnings from Manual Mode The Help button has been enabled in error and warning boxes which are issued as a result of ac
303. nputs for OPTIMIZE which are used by PRETRANSYT are ignored by PREPASSR The SIMULATION command contains a parameter which describes the number of minutes to be analyzed by PASSER Its default value is 60 minutes and can be set as low as 15 minutes for a peak analysis The other possible inputs for SIMULATION which are used by PRETRANSYT are ignored by PREPASSR The display of these other inputs have been removed from the SUMMARISE report The LOSTTIMES command can now be used to define how much lost time exists at the start and end of each phase These two numbers are added together for PASSER to represent the total lost time for each phase The defaults of 4 seconds at the start and 0 seconds at the end of each phase add up to the normal default in PASSER of 4 seconds per phase gt Export to PASSER Can Now Be Stacked in Single PASSER Input File The output of the EXPORT command can now be stacked behind a previous EXPORT to the same file used by the previous EXPORT so that multiple runs of PASSER can be made from a single input data file This function is performed by using the default value for the lt PASSER File Name gt input on the EXPORT command after having previously used a specified file name for an EXPORT gt New and Improved Menu Group Name Definitions Two new menu group names have been created for ease of use of the Special Inputs and Procedures menu The EXPORT menu group includes all of the commands which are commonly u
304. nter Intersection Data 38 Commands to Enter System Data 37 Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data 43 Commands to Enter Traffic Generator Data 42 Commands to Label Output 44 common problems E 206 Common TEAPAC Dialogs 44 compound growth 38 B 175 COMPUTE B 152 CONDITIONS 43 A 57 B 77 F 222 CONTENTS v Conventions 4 Input Order 6 coordinated offset 37 40 B 126 coordinates 38 B 72 B 123 Copyright iv CORSIM ii count interval 43 B 139 count intervals F 219 count period 43 B 139 COUNTTYPE 43 A 57 B 79 B 169 B 173 CRITICALS 42 A 57 B 80 CROSS REFERENCE OF COMMANDS AND GROUPS A 56 cumulative count B 139 cumulative entries B 79 current parameter values 44 B 82 cycle optimization range 36 40 B 81 CYCLES 36 40 A 57 B 81 B 102 B 127 E 202 D DATA 14 22 44 A 53 A 56 B 82 B 167 E 202 F 217 Data Entry 18 data entry command 35 data file path G 227 PREPASSR Data Review 22 debugging B 85 default extension G 227 default next line 46 B 121 default printer G 230 default values 27 44 B 149 Definition of Terms 4 Definitions Command 5 Command Level Prompt 5 Default Value 5 Dialog Box 5 File 5 Group Name 5 Input Line 5 Menu Line Item 5 Parameter Values 5 Program Control Menu 5 Delay Adjustment Factor B 68 DELAYFACTORS 42 A 57 B 83 DESCRIPTION 45 A 56 B 84 B 155 DESIGN 40 B 80 B 87 B 108 B 148 development size 42 B 72 d
305. ntersection which can be used to input peak hour factors for each movement of the intersection The entered value which can be in the range of 0 50 to 1 00 is used to convert entered VOLUMES into the volumes to be used by the PASSER analysis These converted volumes are technically interpreted as the flow rate in vehicles per hour during the peak fifteen minute period If the peak fifteen minute flow rate is entered on the VOLUMES command or if the entered VOLUMES are meant to represent the average hour PEAKHOURFACTORS of 1 0 should be used The default PEAKHOURFACTORS values are 0 9 consistent with SIGNAL85 94 and the Highway Capacity Manual gt New ACTUATIONS Command Can Be Used to Defined Actuated Movements A new command ACTUATIONS has been implemented for each intersection which can be used to input the actuated status of each movement of the intersection The entered value can be either NO or YES and is used to set the actuated flag within PASSER The default value of ACTUATIONS is NO gt New OVERLAPS Command Can Be Used to Define Right Turn Phasing A new command OVERLAPS has been implemented for each intersection which can be used to determine if any of the right turns of the intersection are allowed to overlap into adjacent left turn phases The entered value can be either NO or YES and defaults to YES A NO entry prevents a right turn from overlapping into adjacent phases gt New MASTERNODE Command Allows Definition of a Mast
306. ntimes 23 00 8 00 20 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Permissives Ys Ys Ys Ys Yellowtimes 3 00 3 00 3 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 RT Overlaps Ys Ys Ys Ys Cycle s 60 60 30 Offset 0 65 to start of Phase 2 NETWORK DATA SSS SS Dist Spd Node Movements Asg Crv Man X Coord Y Coord N Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No 0 0 E Approach 2130 35 14 5 9s 1 0 Def No No S Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No W Approach 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Def No No PREPASSR D 190 Reference PR Gl PASSR TEAPAC Ver 2 71 07 Summary of Parameter Values INTERSECTION 14 Main amp Pershing AOVEMENT DATA North Bast South West Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Rt Th Lt Demand Volumes 150 813 244 0 1296 589 0 0 0 386 620 0 Peak Hr Factors 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 0 90 Truck Percents 250 26 0 02 60 2260 2510 255 0 20 24 0 2 0 220 20 2 4 0 Rt Turn on Red 0 0 0 0 Approach Widths 0 0 48 0 0 0 0 0 24 0 24 0 O70 O20 2020 22 0240 0 0 Number of Lanes 0 4 0 0 2 2 0 0 0 1 2 0 Lane Group Type Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Norm Saturation Flow 0 5296 0 0 3041 2606 0 0 O 1448 2634 0 Minimum Green 940 5 0 75 0 B20 50s 5 50 B20 5507 75 0 B70 9 D0 3 3 0 Actuated Movmts No No No No No No No No No No No No Startup Lost 220 2510 2 0 230 20 20 220 24 0 230 220 2 0 2 20 End Gain Ze0F 230 220 ZH0K 2 E 230 20r 207 62250 ZO 22 200 230 Storage 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SIGNAL CONTROL
307. nts particularly on a movement by movement basis since this calculation may not be statistically stable especially for low volume movements PREPASSR B 136 Reference PEDLEVELS PEDLEVELS PEDLEVELS 4 lt Pedestrian Interference gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the level of pedestrian interference for right turns on each approach of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Pedestrian Interference gt is the volume of conflicting pedestrians in peds per hour for right turns on the approach and can be any integer from 0 to 5000 Its default value is 0 Notes Entries for pedestrian interference should be made for the approach from which the conflicting right turn is made For example pedestrians crossing the east leg of the intersection interfere with right turns made from the south approach so the lt Pedestrian Interference gt value for that right turn should be input for the south approach e Under certain phasing conditions pedestrian interference can also affect the left turns coming from the opposite approach than the right turns described in note 1 above For example pedestrians crossing the east leg of the intersection may also interfere with left turns made from the north approach The lt Pedestrian Interference gt value for this left turn should be input for the opposite south approach as in the case of the right turns
308. ny TEAPAC programs which can make valid use of the data All TEAPAC application programs except NOSTOP use the same single data file which contains all data entries used by all programs This includes intersection traffic and geometric data network data traffic count data and traffic generator data whether or not this data is specifically germaine to the purpose of the specific program being used at the time This means that all of this data can be shared amongst all TEAPAC programs by simply opening the one data file into the program desired and saving the data as appropriate before moving to another program The easiest way to accomplish this is by using the LinkTo menu which automatically closes the current program and opens the selected program with the same data file In the case where data changes within one program as a result of an analysis and these changes are needed for use in another program the user need only save the changes in the file before opening the file in the next program The LinkTo menu provides a simple way to transfer control PREPASSR _ 47 Tutorial Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES of the file to that next program after saving by simply selecting the next program Examples of circumstances where this exchange of results might occur are illustrated below In SIGNAL2000 e Computed HCM compliant SATURATIONFLOWS can be transferred to TEAPAC PREprocessors for use by PASSER TRANSYT CORSIM SYNCHRO or TSPPD e HCM
309. ny number from 0 to 6 and less than or equal to the number of phases in the sequence of operation Its default value is 0 for no exclusive ped phase or position in phasing is not important placed at end of phasing Notes If an exclusive pedestrian phase is defined with the PEDTIME entry PEDLEVELS should be set to zero since there should be no pedestrian interference with vehicular traffic during vehicle phases PEDTIME can also be used to hold aside time for any sort of interruption in the cycle not just a ped phase For example legs of the intersection not included in the four legs of the analysis or certain types of pre emption PREPASSR _ B 138 Reference PERIODS PERIODS PERIODS lt Count Interval gt _5 lt lt Start Time gt lt Stop Time gt gt Defaults 15 5 lt gt Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter the count interval and the beginning and ending times for each count period for which subsequent data will be entered at the current intersection lt Count Interval gt is the interval in minutes between each count entry and can be either 15 or 60 minutes Its default value is 15 minutes lt Start Time gt is the time for each count period when the count was started on a 24 hour clock and can be any valid time between 0 2400 hours It has no default value and at least one lt Start Time gt must be entered lt Stop Time gt is the time for each count peri
310. o guard against the possibility of over writing stacked data sets in a file due to the additional space required by the new entries for each scenario saved GROUPTYPE can be used to define special lane group conditions such as DualOptional lanes FreeFlow lanes and Stop controlled lanes The default is Normal It is not used by PREPASSR LANES can be used to define the number of lanes found in each lane group defined by a non zero WIDTH entry Its default value is deduced from the WIDTHS entry using the tens digit of the WIDTH entry It is not used by PREPASSR STORAGE can be used to define the distance in feet available for the storage of vehicles for a given lane group This is the space available before queued vehicles in this particular lane group will start to interfere with the performance of other lane groups The default is 0 It is not used by PREPASSR TRUCKPERCENTS can be used to define the truck activity in each lane group as a percentage of total traffic Its default value is 2 consistent with the Highway Capacity Manual and SIGNAL2000 It is not used by PREPASSR RIGHTTURNONREDS can be used to indicate that RTOR is permitted on a given approach Its default value is 0 indicating RTOR is not permitted consistent with the Highway Capacity Manual and SIGNAL2000 It is not used by PREPASSR PREPASSR_ H 263 Reference STARTUPLOST can be used to define an explicit amount of startup lost time for each individual movement of each
311. od are in fact perfectly valid timings for dual ring controllers as long as the negative value of the overlap phase greentime does not exceed the yellowtime of that same phase This permits a wider range of timings to be represented by the traditional By Phase HCM methodology By Movement timings are not allowed when special phasings represented by negative SEQUENCE codes are used gt More Generic and Consistent Definition of Cycle Lengths PREPASSR_ H 260 Reference For the compatibility with SIGNAL2000 described above as well as future compatibility with other traffic modeling software cycle lengths are now defined individually for each intersection of the network instead of providing the one cycle length for the system offered previously by PREPASSR When a system cycle length is required the cycle defined for the intersection indicated as the MASTERNODE is used In the case where a MASTERNODE has not been defined the first node of the NODELIST is assumed to be the masternode This change in cycle length definition will still accommodate the old style of system cycle definition which might be encountered when opening or LOADing an old PREPASSR data file by assigning this system cycle to each intersection defined in the NODELIST read from the file gt Exclusive Pedestrian Phase Considered from New PEDTIME Entry The new SIGNAL2000 data support which has been added as described above includes the possible definition of an ex
312. od when the count was stopped on a 24 hour clock and can be any valid time between 0 2400 hours It has no default value and at least one lt Stop Time gt must be entered Notes As many as five pairs of start and stop times can be given after the lt Count Interval gt for various periods which were counted during the same day If counts are already reduced e g not cumulative from interval to interval one count will exist for each interval counted For example one hour of 15 minute counts will have four intervals say with a start time of 1600 hours and an end time of 1645 hours If counts are cumulative an additional interval will exist for each period counted e g 1600 to 1700 hours for the above example All times are for the interval starting at the time stated If reduced counts are being entered these time entries are the start time of each interval counted If cumulative counts are being entered the times entered are the actual times each count number is recorded For example a cumulative count from 4 00 P M to 5 00 P M would record the first count at 1600 then again at 1615 1630 1645 and at the end of the count at 1700 e If counts for a location are made on separate days it is suggested that they be input and summarized as separate runs of the program even if their time periods do not overlap It is not possible to SUMMARISE TABULATE or ANALYZE overlapping time periods for different days two runs a
313. of allowable values shown in the error message are usually constants however they may be controlled by other input parameters on other commands Further information on input limits can be found in Chapter 4 or Appendix B of the program documentation Most commands will re prompt for parameter entry after this error After the error is issued the invalid entries will be ignored The parameter list can also be re typed starting at the position where invalid entry was typed Null entries may be used to skip over to that position in the input All other correct parameter entries for the command are accepted and processed as usual Action Re enter those parameter values necessary to edit the parameter values into the desired set of values In the Manual Mode it is recommended that the DATA or ASK command be used to verify that the final accepted parameter values are those which were desired TPC35 WARNING This decimal number is not in the accepted range xxx xx to xxx xx Re enter When a parameter value is entered which lies outside the allowable range of values this error message is displayed If the input entry accepts decimal places TPC35 is displayed If input entries are rounded to the nearest integer value TPC34 is displayed The appropriate ranges of allowable values shown in the error message are usually constants however they may be controlled by other input parameters on other commands Further information on input limits can be foun
314. of 10 fy 1 10 and N 1 and results in a peak volume of 110 vph the corresponding VOLUMES entry will be set to 100 vph so that the VOLFACTORS entry will inflate the VOLUME to 110 for analysis PEAKHOURFACTORS are also set according to the specification of the TURNS or WARRANTS OUTPUT dialog as are TRUCKPERCENTS VOLADDITIONALS entries are unaffected by the ANALYZE results The SITE program of TEAPAC can estimate future volumes due to the impact of certain specified development scenarios In this program the VOLUMES entries are used as the background traffic for the complete scenario assessment by the COMPUTE function including the effect VOLFACTORS has on these background VOLUMES VOLADDITIONALS however have no effect on the computations and the results of the scenario computations are placed in the VOLADDITIONALS entries automatically with the contribution of VOLUMES and VOLFACTORS removed so that the calculation of analysis volumes from the general formula above will result in the same volume scenario determined by the COMPUTE function For example if a counted movement VOLUME is 100 and the background traffic growth VOLFACTOR entry is 1 10 fy 1 10 and N 1 resulting in 110 vph projecterd background traffic and the computed total traffic for that movement under a given development scenario is 250 vph the VOLADDITIONAL entry will be 140 vph with faqa 1 0 so that the computed analysis volume for subsequent analyses will result in
315. of a new file is misspelled on the FILES command or the intended new file name has already been used In either case this message prevents the existing file from inadvertently being overwritten if this was not the intention Action The program is prompting the user whether the existent file should be used anyway as if the N switch had not been used By responding Y to this prompt the file will be used as specified and the error condition is erased If any other character is pressed then the file named will not be overwritten and the user should re specify the correctly spelled or different file name TPC19 ERROR Failed attempt to read past end of file x at line xxxxx File access aborted This message indicates that an end of file marker was read in a data file during a read operation typically LOAD The program will abruptly halt the file access with this message at that point and return to the command input mode Normally this situation will not occur since the program should return from file access via the occurrence of a RETURN command in the data file Action Verify that the file access location is correct and that a RETURN command exists at the end of the file s information Then re issue the file access command if appropriate TPC20 ERROR Invalid path file Path exceeds 180 chars or name of file exceeds 70 chars This message indicates that an attempt was made to name or open a file whose file path or file name specification
316. of this command is to produce a dialog box display for each of the listed commands lt List of Commands gt is a set of commands and or group names and can be any valid commands or group names of the program Its default value is PARAMETERS all nonactive commands for entry of parameters related to the analysis procedures Notes The ASK command will prompt the user for entry of parameter values for each of the commands in the list An input dialog for each command Normal View or the entire list Tabular View will be initiated showing the current DATA values and a line of HELP at the bottom of the dialog e When a correctable error is detected in the parameter list of any command entered from the Manual Mode the ASK command is automatically performed for that command in order to allow re entry of the parameter s in error ASK may only be used from the Manual Mode Itis a powerful way to review current data values and to allow any necessary changes to be made simultaneously It can also be used to create custom input and action sequence displays PREPASSR B 69 Reference ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT ASSIGNMENT lt Type gt lt Intersection gt 12 lt lt Movement gt lt Assignment Factor gt gt Defaults 12 lt 0 0 gt Menus Groups PARAMETERS SITE The purpose of this command is to enter the percentage of a distribution type to be assigned to the movements at an intersection This is only used to define spec
317. ogram detects a data file from a different TEAPAC program or is unable to determine the source of the data file e The lt Blocks gt indicates how many successive LOADs should be done using the current SHARE or IGNORE option as a result of the single LOAD command that was issued This option does not apply to the PROCESS keyword PREPASSR B 112 Reference MASTERNODE MASTERNODE MASTERNODE lt Master Node gt Defaults 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM EXPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the node number of the intersection which is the master node location for the system lt Master Node gt is the node number of the intersection which acts as the master location for the system and can be any valid node number from 0 to 999 Its default value is 0 no master node defined Notes The system cycle length for coordinated systems will be equal to lt Minimum Cycle gt for the intersection referenced by MASTERNODE If MASTERNODE is 0 lt Minimum Cycle gt for the first node in the NODELIST will be used as the system cycle The node number entered need not be the actual location of the master controller This entry simply indicates that the offset which is entered for the master intersection will not be changed by TRANSYT or PASSER during the optimization process If the node number given is not included in the current NODELIST SUBSYSTEM the master node input for TRANSYT or PASSER will be omitted
318. om 0 to 300 percent Its default value is 90 percent v c 0 90 lt Max v c gt is the worst amount of v c to be considered before an optimization is abandoned and a solution is forced and can be any integer v c from 0 to 300 percent Its default value is 100 percent v c 1 00 lt v c Incr gt is the increment of v c which should be used to reach the lt Max v c gt if the lt Target v c gt cannot be achieved by a DESIGN Its default value is 5 percent Notes For DESIGN the lt Target Delay LOS gt entry of the LEVELOFSERVICE command sets the target delay or level of service which is to be achieved for all critical movements of the intersection If this target level is achieved with excess time still available at the intersection then the excess time is assigned to the phases according to the entries on the EXCESS command If no EXCESS entries have been made time is allocated proportionally to all phases However if EXCESS is used this provides a means to designate a worst case delay LOS performance level for all critical movements and to assign all additional time to the priority movements of the EXCESS command This is the preferred optimization scheme for the DESIGN function of SIGNAL2000 see Appendix C for more details PREPASSR B 108 Reference LEVELOFSERVICE LEVELOFSERVICE The lt Max Delay LOS gt must be a worse level or the same level as the lt Target Delay LOS gt e If lt Target Delay LOS gt is set to ze
319. ommand This error indicates an attempt has been made to use the CONDITIONS command Action Purchase a full use license of TURNS to eliminate this artificial constraint This message will not be issued in a full use licensed version of TURNS TPC67 ERROR Path list must start end with valid external access node numbers Re enter When entering a PATHASSIGNMENT command for the current PATHDISTRIBUTION type of traffic the path list must either start or end with a valid external node number and conversely must then end or start with a valid access node Action For inbound distribution types the first node of the path list must be the same as the external node number appearing on the current PATHDISTRIBUTION command and the last node must be one of the inbound access nodes on the inbound GENERATION command Conversely for outbound distribution types the first node of the path list must be one of the outbound access nodes on the outbound GENERATION command and the last node must be the same as the external node number appearing on the current PATHDISTRIBUTION command Check what condition is not being met and adjust as appropriate TPC68 WARNING A PATHDISTRIBUTION type must be given before this input can be made This message indicates that a PATHDISTRIBUTION type number has not been selected prior to the entry of a data value When an input value is entered that is intended to pertain to a specific distribution type that type must
320. on of Volumes for a complete discussion of how VOLUMES VOLFACTORS VOLADDITIONALS and PEAKHOURFACTORS are used to generate analysis volumes for various types of analyses within TEAPAC PREPASSR B 174 Reference VOLFACTORS VOLFACTORS VOLFACTORS lt Years gt _12 lt Adjustment Factor gt Defaults 1 12 1 00 Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter number of times to compound and each multiplier used for each movement to adjust the volume or count data entered at the current intersection lt Years gt is the number of times years to compound each multiplier and can be any positive integer from 1 to 99 Its default value is 1 no compounding lt Adjustment Factor gt is a multiplier used to adjust the movement volumes or counts input to the program and can be any number from 0 0 to 9 99 Its default value is 1 00 no adjustment Notes If a number greater than one is entered for the lt Years gt the lt Adjustment Factor gt will be taken as an annual growth factor for entered traffic volumes or counts applied for each of the years entered For example if the growth rate is 2 percent per year over 3 years a VOLFACTORS 3 1 02 entry would be made to effect a 1 0612 adjustment to entered volumes or counts 1 02 x 1 02 x 1 02 The use of VOLFACTORS will adjust all volumes displayed in the output reports by the specified factors It will not change the volume or count values en
321. on the approach and can be any of the following NONE no parking default LEFT parking on the left side RIGHT parking on the right side BOTH parking on both sides Notes PARKVOLUMES must be used in conjunction with PARKINGSIDES to define the number of parking maneuvers each hour The default PARKVOLUMES is 20 but if PARKINGSIDES is NONE PARKVOLUMES is ignored e Parking conditions only apply to the lane group to which they are adjacent PREPASSR_ B 131 Reference PARKVOLUMES PARKVOLUMES PARKVOLUMES _4 lt Parking Volume gt Defaults 4 20 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the number of parking maneuvers per hour on each side of each approach of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Parking Volume gt is the number of parking maneuvers per hour and can be any integer from 0 to 180 Its default value is 20 Notes PARKVOLUMES must be used in conjunction with PARKINGSIDES to define the number of parking maneuvers each hour The number entered is for one side of the approach only If parking exists on both sides of a 1 way approach the average number of maneuvers on each side should be entered If one lane group is adjacent to both sides of parking the number entered will be doubled to calculate the parking adjustment factor e The default PARK VOLUMES is 20 but if PARKINGSIDES is NONE PARKVOLUMES is ignored PREPASSR_ B 132
322. ons output labeling program operation permanent data storage and program execution These common TEAPAC commands are summarized in this section All the detail about these commands is found alphabetically in Appendix B of this manual with the other commands of the program discussed previously as well as in Appendix B of all other TEAPAC program manuals Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data Commands to Label Output Commands to Control Operation Of Program Commands to Access Data Stored In Files Commands to Control Program Execution Commands to Aid Interactive Input of Data The commands described below have functions related to the interactive use of the program These commands control on screen help functions as well as provide the means to review program data Many of these commands act on a set of commands as their parameter values MESSAGES lt Level of Messages gt Display messages concerning changes made to the program since the last printing of the tutorial reference manual HELP lt List of Commands gt Display the command names parameter descriptions and default values for each command listed ASK lt List of Commands gt Produce a dialog box display for each of the listed commands RESET lt List of Commands gt Reset the parameters of the specified commands to their default values DATA lt List of Commands gt Display the current parameter values for the specified commands
323. or SaveAs function has been lengthened from 3 to 5 seconds The default location of user data files has been changed from to the installed TEAPAC folder location usually C TEAPAC for more consistency with normal Windows operations A new option for DOS TEAPAC programs in line five of the CFG file allows the entry of HPLJx to indicate that the printer attached to LPTx is a Hewlett Packard LaserJet compatible printer This complements the LPTx option added in the Ver 3 01 interface so that required PREPASSR_ H 272 Reference HPLJ printer codes are sent to the printer for each page and are no longer required as a separate effort by the user This is most significant in shared and networked printer environments Note that when LPTx is used the F6 key functions only when the printer is attached to LPT1 or PRN When the amp character is used in the Manual Mode of a Windows program the next prompt received has been modified to include the amp character to indicate that the entry to be made is a continuation of the previous entry not a new command entry This now behaves similarly to the DOS Manual Mode in this regard gt Problem Fixed for Long Time space Diagrams from Windows Versions Time space diagrams from the PLOT command which were longer than a single page may have caused printer overflow problems for certain printers when running any of the Windows versions of the program The line counting strategy used has be
324. or message to identify these conditions These are listed below 0 file read error usually due to a bad diskette no import 2 pin settings not found in PASSER output file no import 3 node number in import file is not in the node list import aborted gt Improved Escape From Multiple Errors And Output Reports Checking for the ESCAPE key during multiple error occurrences and certain multi page reports has been substantially improved resulting in quicker response to the ESCAPE key when used to abort these circumstances This is particularly helpful on faster computer systems which process so quickly that it has been difficult for the user to press ESCAPE before the computer has already checked for it gt Embedded Speed Lines Re enabled For Time space PLOT The earlier option to display speed lines within the time space diagram of the PLOT command has been re enabled This option was inadvertently disabled in an earlier version when the input limit for the scale entry was set to a range of O to 10 000 The input range is now 9999 to PREPASSR H 280 Reference 10 000 with the negative inputs indicating the desire to display the speed lines within the body of the time space diagram not in the margin This option may help the user identify traffic flow in the diagram when it is displayed directly on screen In either case the user must translate the slope of the displayed speed lines into the diagram so they represent meaningful traffi
325. orer to open it has been fixed Build 14 20APR06 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS Build 07 1LNOVO5 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt V7 00 14 Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs A number of generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 release of Visual TEAPAC and are collectively included as Ver 7 00 Build 14 These are documented below and use heading lines that begin with V7 00 14 Ver 7 00 Build 14 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses gt V7 00 14 Color Selection Added to Options Menu The Options menu now provides a Colors option for selecting colors which are used when generating formatted output reports and the main window network display Any selections made are retained and used during future program sessions Most of the default colors for formatted output reports are taken from the user s desktop color scheme DisplayProperties Appearance so changing the color scheme will automatically change the output colors used when the defaults are selected All colors selected including actual selections and defaults are displayed in the Color management dialog produced by the Options colors menu selection gt V7 00 14 Browse Button Added to Select a Bitmap File A browse button has been added to the Network Display and Edit Management dialog which is displayed when the Setup button of the main window is press
326. orm a heirarchical command structure as outlined in Table A 1 Group names are either common names used in all TEAPAC programs or special names used by the PREPASSR program as described in the following sections Table A 2 provides a cross reference between each of the commands and the group names Abbreviated group names appear across the top of the table and commands along the left side PREPASSR_ A 54 Reference An X in the table indicates that the command to the left is included in the group name above This table allows a quick view of the relationship between group names and commands Common TEAPAC Group Names Special PREPASSR Group Names PREPASSR A 55 Reference Table A 2 Cross Reference of Commands and Groups Groups ALL INF DAT TIT CON RES PAR BAS SYS INT SIG TUR SIT EXP IMP x x ELP ESET UMMARISE ES TLINES xx KKK MK KK e ECT RIPTION Of xx KK KKM KM e NE H C R G R x lt E KO K K K KS iOZHWHGUHAHGCGPOGOHE S S HTTURNONR UMES LFACTORS DDITIONALS HS ZPZZHVPOONORWUZHWH PTYPES KPERCEN HOURFACT K KKK KM MK KK KKK KX MK KKK KK KK KK KK KK KX KK KKK XX XK KX S x KKK KK MK KK KK KM KK MX KK KK KK S e xx KKK KKK KK KK KX e PREPASSR A 56 Reference
327. ormally lt Last Line gt is 3 less than lt Lines Pg gt to allow a 1 2 inch margin e Every time a lt Line Pg gt entry is made lt Last Line gt is re calculated as 3 lines less than lt Lines Pg gt This usually provides a 1 2 margin at the bottom of each page of output As a result unless a different bottom margin is desired lt Last Line gt need not be entered Use of lt Lines Pg gt and lt Last Line gt are primarily for the purposes of batch operations or any commands which generate multiple pages of output e If the lt Page gt entry is greater than zero this number will used to label the page number of the next printed page of output Every time this occurs the lt Page gt is incremented so that the next printed page will be automatically numbered with the page number If lt Page gt is zero no page number will be displayed on the printed output If lt Page gt is 1 the date and time will also be omitted from the the output PREPASSR _ B 105 Reference LANES LANES LANES 12 lt Number of Lanes gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC MOVEMENT The purpose of this command is to enter the number of lanes which are assigned for use by each of the twelve movements at the current intersection lt Number of Lanes gt is the number of lanes which are allocated for use by each movement and can be any integer from 0 to 10 Its default value is 0 Notes Values for this command ar
328. ose of this command is to enter the movement which is critical for each phase of the phase sequence of operation of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Critical Movement Number gt is the movement number designating the movement which controls the design of the signal phase and can be 0 12 Its default value is 0 no critical movement Notes Designation of a critical movement in any phase will result in that movement appearing with asterisks in the phase movement diagram This is normally used to represent movements which were used to control a DESIGN This diagram appears as part of the DIAGRAMS ANALYZE EVALUATE and QUEUECALCS reports If a movement is designated as critical in any phase the line for that movement in the ANALYZE report is flagged with an asterisk in the LOS column e The TIMINGS command automatically implements a CRITICAL command for the phases of the specified sequence which have been DESIGNed PREPASSR B 80 Reference CYCLES CYCLES CYCLES lt Minimum Cycle gt lt Maximum Cycle gt lt Cycle Increment gt Defaults 40 140 5 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION EXPORT IMPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the cycle length for the current intersection to be used for PASSER s simulation or optimization as well as a time space plot or timing diagram as well as a possible cycle optimization range lt Minimum Cycle gt is the length of the cycle in se
329. osed PREPASSR V1 L1 0 21JUL90 gt Original Release of PREPASSR This is the original release of PREPASSR a TEAPAC program designed to construct PASSER2 87 data files using the normal TEAPAC commands data files and user interface The program is patterned directly from the PRETRANSYT program V2 12 0 and will thus read both PRETRANSYT and SIGNAL85 data files directly With regard to the NODELIST command the menu system can only be used for the 12 node version of PREPASSR to enter the entire NODELIST In the 100 node version as many nodes as will fit on the full screen display can be entered usually around 20 intersections but future editing will only display the first 12 If more intersections are needed than this will allow they must be entered in the Manual Mode using ampersands amp to continue the long command lines to the subsequent entry line The ASK NODELIST command should not be used when more than 12 intersections have already been entered on the NODELIST command PREPASSR H 299 Reference INDEX This index provides an alphabetical list of keywords commands and subjects covered in the PREPASSR Tutorial Reference Manual This includes references made in both the Tutorial and Reference sections of the manual Tutorial Manual references are indicated by page numbers alone while Reference Manual locations are indicated by the Appendix letter preceding the page number of that appendix Entries in the index which are in
330. ounts gt is a keyword which defines the type of truck count data which will be entered on the VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands and can be any of the following INCLUDED VEHICLECOUNTS data includes truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS command default SEPARATE VEHICLECOUNT data does not include truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS command lt Count Description gt is a 40 character description of the count that was conducted to include such things as the date weather count station etc The default value is all blanks Notes If entered data is declared CUMULATIVE the data entered is the cumulation of traffic counted from the start of the survey starting at an arbitrary value sometimes 0 The actual volume will be the subtraction of successive cumulative entries For REDUCED counts the data entered is the actual volume counted for the count interval When truck counts are INCLUDED the truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS commands are also included in the VEHICLECOUNT data values and no adjustments are made by the program When truck counts are declared SEPARATE the truck counts entered with the TRUCKCOUNTS commands are not included in the VEHICLECOUNTS data values so must be added to VEHICLECOUNTS by the program to get total traffic numbers PREPASSR B 79 Reference CRITICALS CRITICALS CRITICALS 6 lt Critical Movement Number gt Defaults 6 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purp
331. ow a typed FILES command each separated by at least one blank The number preceding the asterisk five in this example indicates the number of parameter values that may be entered on an input line for the command In some cases all parameter values must be entered while in others only some are required If all values are not entered the ones not entered will remain unchanged This same HELP line is provided at the bottom of each dialog box for immediate on screen HELP for the command line currently selected in the display The F1 key or the Help button can PREPASSR 11 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION be used to bring up the associated part of the on screen manual The TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual gives extensive detail on how to enter parameter values in either the Visual or Manual Mode Review of TEAPAC Procedures Before beginning the example problem in Chapter 2 it is worthwhile to review the basic procedures of running TEAPAC programs There are four basic steps of an analysis using a TEAPAC program Data Entry Data Review Analysis and Evaluation This section briefly describes each step of this procedure which is used by all the TEAPAC programs Additional detail can be found in Chapter 3 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual Data Entry Data Review Analysis Evaluation Data Entry The first step in using any TEAPAC program is to enter the data required to describe the problem This is normally accomplished using the
332. owth factor and the number of years N can be interpreted as the number of periods which the growth factor fy is compounded V V fy N where V factored average hourly volume for analysis vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the hour vehicles per hour fy entered VOLFACTOR adjustment factor for each N periods N entered VOLFACTOR number of periods to compound the fy factor If a simple inflation or deflation factor is all that is required the number of years should be entered as N 1 in which case V V fy above A second volume adjustment entry can be made via the VOLADDITIONALS dialog This is an additive value above and beyond the adjustment described above for VOLFACTORS First a factor faqa is entered which applies to all additional volumes for the intersection then individual additional volumes Vaaa are given for each movement In its simplest form the factor entered is either 0 zero or 1 one to either exclude or include the additional volumes given repectively This makes it easy to leave the additional volume entries but remove and or re include them in the analysis with a single factor entry In its broadest application the entered factor faqa can be used to inflate or deflate the additional volume entries Vada by the factor entered V V Vaga fada where V adjusted average hourly volume for analysis vehicles per hour V entered average hourly VOLUME during the
333. ported file to be launched directly into the host program without the need to name the file and manually run the host program and open the exported file Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TEAPAC F 217 Reference TPC45 ERROR This demonstration version permits use of only one file Others are ignored For a demonstration program the use of multiple files simultaneously is disabled Normally this option allows up to five data files to be open simultaneously for easy access to data in all files using the advanced file handling techniques of TEAPAC Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC46 ERROR This demonstration version does not permit use of printer Request ignored For a demonstration program the ability to print results is disabled Normally this option allows the contents of any output window to be directed to any printer accessible from your computer Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC47 ERROR This demonstration version does not permit use of the AUTO option of EXPORT For a demonstration program writing information to a disk file is disabled Normally input data and results can be saved to disk files at locations accessible from your computer Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC48 ERROR This value is limited to the range allowed by this demonstra
334. precede addition and subtraction This order of precedence can be altered by surrounding parts of the expression which should be evaluated first with parentheses If the result of the calculation is to be saved as the value of a user variable A Z the single character variable name should precede the expression and be separated from the expression with an equal sign representing a normal algebraic equation The value assigned to the variable will be rounded to the nearest integer as described below All internal calculations for the expression are made using 32 bit decimal arithmetic The result is displayed in a format with four decimal places that can handle numbers less than 10 billion 1 x 10 10 and greater than 1 billion 1 x 10 9 Regardless of the number of digits shown in the result only 6 7 digits of accuracy exist any other digits that are shown may be random e When a result is assigned to a user variable the result is rounded to the nearest integer value Results assigned to user variables must be less than or equal to 32 767 and greater than or equal to 32 768 PREPASSR_ B 75 Reference CALCULATE CALCULATE e If a variable is used in a calculation before its value has been assigned by a CALCULATE or REPEAT command its value will be zero PREPASSR_ B 76 Reference CONDITIONS CONDITIONS CONDITIONS lt Major Direction gt lt N S Lanes gt lt E W Lanes gt lt High Speed gt lt Low Population gt l
335. prevailing analysis concepts in the Highway Capacity Manual which dictates an analysis period of 15 minutes as well as the new PEAKHOURFACTORS inputs which are now allowed in PREPASSR The ideal satflow rate coded into PASSER s embedded data has also been updated from 1800 to 1900 for compatibility with the pending 1994 update to the Highway Capacity Manual gt Multiple Loads from SIGNAL85 Files Allowed with Share Option A new feature of the SHARE option of LOAD now allows consecutive sets of SIGNAL85 94 intersection data to be LOADed from one file with a single command For example if 20 intersections of SIGNAL85 94 data are SAVEd one after the other in a single file the command LOAD 1 1 SHARE 20 would read all of these data sets into PREPASSR The only entry required prior to the LOAD would be a NODELIST command to identify the node numbers to be read from the SIGNAL85 94 file Previously the RESET command in each of the SIGNAL85 94 data sets was executed if the SHARE number was greater than one thereby erasing the NODELIST and any previous intersection input This new option allows the simple entry of many sets of stacked data sets in a file to be quickly LOADed without the need for a control file or the repetitive entry of many individual LOAD command gt New Shortcut Way to Move Between Intersection Input Screens A new feature added with the V2 L2 3 TEAPAC Interface described below is the ability to move between intersection input scr
336. program Analysis Procedures When using PREPASSR it is important to understand the fundamentals of how the data entries and actions are used together in order to get results in an efficient and accurate manner In the example in Chapter 2 certain processes produced specific results In this section these steps are reviewed and discussed in detail to provide a more complete understanding of the program functions First the basic analysis procedures are outlined then more specialized procedures are described Chapter 5 describes unique ways that these basic and special procedures can be combined to solve unusual problems with PREPASSR Basic Analysis Procedures Special Analysis Procedures Printing and Saving PASSER Results Basic Analysis Procedures In performing any of the functions of PREPASSR the basic method of using the program is to enter the parameters which describe the signalized system conditions as described in the Input Requirements above then follow this with the either the EXPORT TIMINGS or PLOT commands These entries and actions are done with the Edit and Results menus respectively If properly installed the AUTO option of EXPORT can be used to link directly to PASSER The Results menu allows the direct IMPORT of PASSER s results and manipulation of the commonly changed values which follow a PASSER run such as OFFSETS as well as either the TIMINGS or PLOT commands In the Manual Mode all the same ste
337. program will respond with either an opportunity to re enter a parameter value or in the Manual Mode the possible need to re enter an entire new command line in order to fix the error If a new parameter value is all that is needed to correct the problem the program will prompt for this using the appropriate dialog TEAPAC F 209 Reference Table F 1 Summary of TEAPAC System Error Messages Command Entry Errors TPCO1 ERROR command is not recognizable TPCO2 ERROR abbreviation for more than one command File Errors TPC11 ERROR file name cannot be located as specified TPC12 ERROR file number is not in the range of 0 to 5 TPC13 ERROR file number is not defined by FILES command TPC14 ERROR requested file number is currently in use TPC15 ERROR file access exceeds 6 levels of nesting TPC16 WARNING file name does not exist create TPC17 ERROR read write error at line xxxxx in file x TPC18 WARNING file name already exists overwrite TPC19 ERROR failed attempt to read past end of file x TPC20 ERROR path file name exceeds size limits TPC21 WARNING data written by XXXXX Vv vv bb may be lost overwrite TPC22 WARNING possible inconsistent usage of advanced data file Parameter Errors TPC31 WARNING keyword is not recognizable TPC32 WARNING more parameters found than were expected TPC33 WARNING parameter is not a valid numeric entry TPC34 WARNING integer number not in the accepted range TPC35 WARNING
338. ps can be performed by simply entering the commands desired with their appropriate parameter values The end of Chapter 3 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual describes how the ASK command can be used in the Manual Mode to further enhance the process of performing iterative tabulations and analyses especially when using the special group names described in Appendix A of this document Special Analysis Procedures PREPASSR can also be used in a sequential manner for the typical steps of a signal timing effort If existing timings for a network are known it is usually desirable to evaluate these timings prior to a PASSER optimization then optimize the network so the before and after conditions can be compared This is done easily using PREPASSR as described below PREPASSR 30 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES First all of the known timing and phasing information should be entered for each intersection along with the basic geometric demand and capacity information as described in the Minimum Requirements section above Then the PLOT command can be issued to draw a time space diagram of these existing conditions The TIMINGS command can also be issued to document the complete timing and phasing information which was entered Then the EXPORT command is used to create a simulation run of PASSER using the SIMULATION command to detail the simulation parameters This run of PASSER can also be used to check the resultant PASSER model for va
339. put to the printer Transmit the printed information to Strong Concepts so that the problem can be duplicated and resolved As a convenient alternate send the data file to Strong Concepts via email as an attachment with an appropriate description of the problem and where to look for the anomaly in the output if appropriate File Specification There are four descriptive elements used by a TEAPAC program to define and access a disk data file The elements are 1 the name of the disk drive and path to be used 2 the actual disk file name 3 the file name extension and 4 a switch option When these elements are combined they constitute a file name specification which usually appears in the form of lt File Name gt in the documentation and help files lt File Name gt d path nnnnn eee s It is important to note that a colon must separate the name of the disk drive and the rest of the file specification back slashes must be used to define a specific path on the drive or the network the file path a dot must separate the actual file name and the file name extension and a slash must separate the switch option from the other elements The name of the disk drive path actual file name and file extension elements are identical to the file specification conventions of Windows The fourth element the switch option is a unique element of the TEAPAC program package used to control an aspect of data file creation Each of the four ele
340. r movements which are not part of the arterial flow this is a common problem observed with PASSER s optimization process Further if the splits in PREPASSR came from SIGNAL85 s optimization process thus reflecting an optimization of the critical movement level of service the results from PASSER will still guarantee this HCM level of service performance To accomplish this the sum of the greens and yellows for each movement are passed to PASSER as the minimums for the optimization Since PASSER will only accept these minimums in even seconds and the sum of the minimums must not exceed the cycle length the greens and yellows are truncated not rounded when exported to PASSER The same process is done for the new simulation option when the NONE option of OPTIMIZE is used gt PHASER DAT File Included in Export with Consistent Offsets The creation of the PHASER DAT file is now included during the EXPORT process and the offsets which are exported to PASSER are consistent with this PHASER DAT file The PHASER DAT file includes the required two sets of offset pointer information both indicating that the offsets provided are to the beginning of the first occurring arterial phase These are the offsets which are then exported to PASSER for simulation and subsequently returned by PASSER after an optimization When the PASSER results are imported back into PREPASSR either manually or automatically see new IMPORT option below the TIMINGS command PRE
341. ram METROAREA lt Location gt Enter the location of the current intersection within the metropolitan area LEVELOFSERVICE lt Target Delay LOS gt lt Max Delay LOS gt lt Delay Incr gt lt Target v c gt lt Max v c gt lt v c Incr gt Enter the range of delay or level of service and v c which should be tested by a DESIGN optimization and GOVERCS for the current intersection EXCESS lt List of Priority Movement Numbers gt Enter the movements to which the TIMINGS command will assign available excess portions of the cycle length for the current intersection APPLABELS 4 lt Approach Label gt PREPASSR_ 40 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Enter labels for each approach of the current intersection GRADES 4 lt Grade of Approach gt Enter the grade of each approach of the current intersection PEDLEVELS 4 lt Pedestrian Interference gt Enter the level of pedestrian interference for right turns on each approach of the current intersection BIKEVOLUMES 4 lt Conflicting Bicycles gt Enter the volume of conflicting bicycles for right turns on each approach of the current intersection PARKINGSIDES 4 lt Parking Location gt Enter parking conditions on each approach of the current intersection PARKVOLUMES 4 lt Parking Volume gt Enter the number of parking maneuvers per hour on each side of each approach of the current intersection BUSVOLUMES 4 lt Stopping Bus Volume gt Enter th
342. re SAVE the information LOADed at line 10 see Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual SAVE will always put a RETURN command into the file after the last command of the list for subsequent LOADs If the first parameter in lt List of Commands gt is PARAMETERS then PROJECT DESCRIPTION NOTE and RESET will be saved in the file at the PREPASSR B 155 Reference SAVE SAVE specified line number before the lt List of Commands gt and RETURN is saved This is the case when the default condition is used A negative lt Line Number gt of n will start the SAVE at a point in the designated file n lines before the default next line of the file i e SAVE 5 will start the SAVE five lines prior to the current next line of the file Thus SAVE 1 will SAVE lt List of Commands gt on top of the previously saved RETURN command effectively appending the newly SAVEd information to the end of the previously SAVEd information PREPASSR B 156 Reference SEQUENCES SEQUENCES SEQUENCES lt Sequence Code gt lt List of Possible Sequence Codes gt Defaults 11 ALL Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION IMPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the desired and allowed phasings of the traffic signal of the current intersection according to the codes defined in Figure 1 2 of Chapter 1 lt Sequence Code gt is a sequence code which represents the desired phasing and can be any valid two digit code or
343. re necessary The PERIODS command values are used to set up the values of other commands such as VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS which will be accepted as input As such the PERIODS command is active and must be executed This PREPASSR B 139 Reference PERIODS PERIODS sets up the new limits of the counts and opens up the required VEHICLECOUNTS and TRUCKCOUNTS commands in the full screen displays If lt Start Time gt and lt Stop Time gt values of zero are entered for a given time period all subsequent time periods in the list are deleted PREPASSR B 140 Reference PERMISSIVES PERMISSIVES PERMISSIVES 4 lt Permissive Left gt Defaults 4 NO Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter an option for each approach of the current intersection identifying the permissability of left turning traffic to turn on a through phase following or preceding an exclusive left turn phase lt Permissive Left gt is the keyword which identifies whether or not left turns are allowed to turn on through phases following or preceding exclusive left turn phases and can be any of the following NO compound left turn phasing not allowed default YES compound left turn phasing allowed but restricted to non trap and single lane turn lane conditions TRAPOK compound left turn phasing allowed even in so called left turn trap conditions which are otherwise considered unsafe but not for multi l
344. rent intersection lt Lane Group Type gt is a keyword describing the type of lane group being used and can be any of the following NORMAL normal lane group default FREEFLOW free flow lane group not controlled by the signal DUALOPTIONAL _ dual optional lane group STOP stop sign controlled lane group YIELD yield sign controlled lane group Notes This input has no effect on PREPASSR calculations but appears for compatibility with other TEAPAC programs such as SIGNAL2000 PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM PREPASSR _ B 98 Reference HEADING HEADING HEADING lt Number of Lines gt Defaults 3 Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to display the current title heading lines lt Number of Lines gt is the number of lines of the three line heading which are to be displayed and can be any number from 0 to 3 either positive or negative Its default value is 3 Notes The lines which will be displayed are identified by counting the number of lines requested starting at the last line of the heading i e an entry of 1 will display only the last line of the heading the NOTE In an appended output window or within a script control file use of HEADING 0 will force a page break at that point in the output stream HEADING 1 in a script control file will force the update of the output window so that progressive results can be observed before the control file completes PREPASSR B 99 Reference
345. rning and error messages shouldn t be closed automatically by the new AutoClose option if these messages expect or require user response The AutoClose option is now ignored for these cases The Help Messages menu item has been changed to Help RecentChanges to better reflect its purpose The Help About menu item now shows the specific program name The default size of the Help window has been increased in size vertically to better display the contents of the complete on screen manual and context sensitive help topics PREPASSR Ver 1 60 25SEP01 gt Enhanced Dialog Buttons to Navigate Through Intersection Data PREPASSR_ H 265 Reference New buttons have been added to each dialog which contains intersection data which makes it easy to move through the NODELIST of intersections when viewing that dialog s data Pressing the button in the dialog will change the intersection being viewed to the next one in the NODELIST while pressing the button will change to the previous intersection in the NODELIST gt IMPORT Enhanced IMPORT has been enhanced so that only a single set of PASSER data is imported rather than the two sets which have been imported in the past The two sets resulted from the way that the results file from PASSER is structured IMPORT now recognizes this format and halts the import when a single complete set of import data has been imported No change in the imported data results from this change merely a less conf
346. ro any attempt to balance delays among the critical movements is skipped and the optimization starts with an attempt to meet the lt Target v c gt value for all critical movements PREPASSR B 109 Reference LINKLIST LINKLIST LINKLIST 200 lt lt Node Numbers lt Direction gt gt Defaults lt all possible links gt Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM The purpose of this command is to enter the simulation order for each link in the network primarily for earlier versions of TRANSYT This command appears only for compatibility with PRETRANSYT and is not presently used in PREPASSR lt Node Numbers is the number assigned to each intersection as identified on the NODELIST command and can be any integer from 0 to 327 Its default value is 0 it must be specified lt Direction gt is the direction from which the traffic is approaching the node and can be the keyword NORTH EAST SOUTH or WEST It has no default value and must be entered Notes PREPASSR B 110 Reference LOAD LOAD LOAD lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt lt LOAD Type gt lt Blocks gt Defaults next next PROCESS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to input commands and parameters from permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command lt Line Numbers is the first line number in the specified file from which commands will be obtained and can be any valid line number of the file less than or equal to 32767 positive ne
347. roblem has been developed which can be analyzed with the PREPASSR program Consider the following basic traffic problem Chapter 2 Topics Chapter 2 Introduction Description of Example Problem Data Entry Data Review Analysis Evaluation Exiting the Program Additional Concerns Description of Example Problem The three signal arterial system shown in Figure 2 1 is to be timed using the PASSER program The PREPASSR program is to be used as a pre processor to the PASSER program The system currently has timings for each isolated intersection but no system offsets The phase diagrams and timings are shown in Figure 2 2 Table 2 1 contains the demand volumes to be used for each intersection while Table 2 2 contains the saturation flow rate for each lane group shown in Figure 2 1 Both tables are organized by approach the way all input to TEAPAC programs is performed as described in Chapter 1 The task is to generate a PASSER input file produce a report which shows the phasings and timings and plot a time space diagram using the existing splits and offsets In addition use the PASSER generated offsets to re plot the time space diagram PREPASSR 15 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Table 2 1 Demand Volumes for Example Problem Approach From North From From South From West Intersectn RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT RT TH LT 13 Monroe 122 216 80 79 722 212 310 139 660 14 Main 150 813 244 0 12
348. rom the selected program folder of the distribution CD ROM Demos and updates downloaded from the internet install the same way using the downloaded exe file such as S2Kw32 exe for SIGNAL2000 The installation process prompts the user for information about the installation folder etc and performs all the necessary configuration of the Windows environment including icon creation and un install options in the Control Panel The TEAPAC Menu is automatically installed as a part of the process and the default CFG files are also created The default CFG files whose contents can be reviewed and changed from the Options Setup menu contain the default installation path name for the most recent supported version of any host program which works in conjunction with the TEAPAC program e g HCS2000 for SIGNAL2000 PASSER II for PREPASSR TRANSYT 7F for PRETRANSYT CORSIM for PRENETSIM etc These paths should be modified as necessary to reflect the actual installed location of the host program The same is true of the TEAPAC CKG file which directs the TEAPAC Menu where to find non TEAPAC programs if edited externally TEAPAC CFG must be edited with a text editor The program will look for the host program before an TEAPAC G 231 Reference EXPORT AUTO is performed and will issue a message if it cannot be located as specified In the event that a host program uses a name for the required executable file which is different than that expected by the TE
349. rsection number For traffic impact studies with SITE the same function is true for the current distribution type These number and description displays are now also included in the caption of the Tabular View window gt T2004v6 Check For Internet Update Function Provided PREPASSR_ H 252 Reference A new function has been provided in the Help menu of every TEAPAC program that allows the user to have the program check the internet for any available downloadable updates This function can be set to automatically check for updates every time the program is launched If updates are found this fact is displayed along with the status of the update free or if a fee is involved and what that fee is as well as a link to a complete description of what functionality changes the update includes the ability to launch an email requesting a new key for a paid update or a quote for an upgrade Options to view a complete price list online to launch an email requesting technical support and to go to the Strong Concepts main web page are also provided This feature was partially implemented in the most recent downloads of several TEAPAC programs and accepted with great enthusiasm gt T2004v6 INTERSECTION Dialog Includes Option to Renumber a Node and All Refs The INTERSECTION dialog now contains a feature to renumber any intersection in the NODELIST to any value not currently in the NODELIST When selected all references to the old node number anywhere e
350. rsion but also for any version of the program prior to the licensed version This minimizes the hassle of multiple key file management when multiple versions of a program are being used for example to maintain consistency in results throughout the course of a project which was begun with an older version of a given program that has been updated Build 11 22AUG05 gt Optimized Timings Can be Imported When Entry Style is Defined By Movement Optimized timings can now be Imported when the timing entry style is By Movement Previously this was not possible Build 10 04AUG05 gt Print Problem Resolved from Tabular View Difficulties experienced by some users attempting to print results when using the Tabular View have been resolved gt Improved Phasing Display in Dialog Boxes The currently selected signal phasing for an intersection which is displayed in some dialog boxes has been improved so that improperly coded permitted left turns display differently than expected to indicate the error in coding Build 00 23MAY05 gt Enhancements Made to Time Space Diagram The default scale for PLOTting a time space diagram has been changed from 100 feet line to 0 the new default of 0 being a code that instructs PREPASSR to determine a scale automatically which will include the entire time space diagram on a single page gt New Message Warns User That Calculated and or Imported Values Have Not Been Saved PREPASSR_ H 247 Refere
351. ry is adjusted by adding this additional volume with the option of further providing a single factor for each intersection which is first multiplied by the additional volume before the it is added to the base volume This feature provides the ability to test additive growth scenarios in addition to the factored growth scenarios allowed by VOLFACTORS above such as when evaluating site traffic development scenarios The VOLADDITIONALS factor can also be used to easily turn off the additional volume by using a factor of zero and turn back on the additional volumes VOLADDITIONALS are computed directly by SITE for site traffic impact scenarios and saved in data files for immediate analysis and optimization by other TEAPAC programs gt Browse Button Added to Import Dialog A Browse button has been added to the Import dialog to permit easier identification of the PASSER results file which is to be used for Import especially when the default AUTO option is not selected This button opens a normal file select dialog and when a file is selected it is placed in the Import dialog entry field without the need for the user to type the actual file name gt T2004v6 TEAPAC2004 Interface Enhancements Found In All Programs TEAPAC2004 Ver 6 includes a multitude of enhancements which are part of the generic user interface found in all TEAPAC programs some do not apply to NOSTOP TED or TUTOR for readily apparent reasons All of the generic enhancemen
352. s Appendix F Topics TEAPAC system messages are displayed by all TEAPAC programs whenever an identifiable fault condition is detected The message may be due to the command itself to one of its parameters or as a result of the action taken by the command When a condition is detected an error number and message is displayed identifying the type of condition encountered This appendix discusses the TEAPAC messages and their meanings followed by a discussion of potential causes and actions which may correct the conditions Table F 1 summarizes the error numbers which are discussed in this appendix The remainder of the appendix lists and discusses each of these messages in numerical order The messages in this appendix are specifically TEAPAC system messages which can be detected by any TEAPAC program These are identified by a prefix of TPC in the error code Appendix E lists those errors which are unique to a specific TEAPAC program These are identified by a different prefix XXX related to the program being run Appendix G lists those errors which are generated by the operating environment being used and as such are unique to that operating environment The form of these error messages is dependent upon the operating environment being used Messages are either WARNINGS or ERRORS A WARNING might be advisory only while ERRORS are usually fatal and terminate the current action Once an error message has been displayed and acknowledged the
353. s to be printed instead of always printing all pages in the output window Selection of page 0 will print only the current output page the page which contains the insertion point cursor gt View Network Works Without Defined Network Distances Previously it was not possible to perform the View Network function unless all NETWORK distances had been entered This was due to the function s attempt to establish a scale factor between the network distances entered and the potentially arbitrary coordinate system used Now if distances are not entered View Network simply assumes the scale factor is 1 gt Warnings Issued If Too Many Characters Entered or Number Too Large in an Input Field If a user enters more characters in a dialog s input field than the dialog expects or can process a warning is now issued and the entire entry is ignored rather than just ignoring the extra characters This allows for better understanding by the user that the entry may not have been processed correctly The F5 Refresh button should be used in all cases to see the current dialog values after the warning On a similar note if an entry has a numeric value too large for the intended internal variable this condition is also noted with a message rather than allowing the possibility of a more catastrophic reaction by the program at a later point PREPASSR Ver 2 60 0O8SEP04 Build 06 22SEP04 gt Summary of TEAPAC2004 Release of PREPASSR After 2 years in develop
354. s NT and Windows 2000 which has greater compatibility with some 32 bit printer drivers which have been distributed by printer vendors recently This module also has continued compatibility with older printer drivers The new module is now distributed as the standard print module for all Win32 versions of TEAPAC programs The original print module is still distributed as the standard print module for all Win16 versions and is also distributed as an alternate print module for the Win32 versions Build 10 PREPASSR_ H 269 Reference gt Intersection Descriptions Displayed in TIMINGS Output Signal timing outputs produced by the TIMINGS command now display the intersection description in addition to the intersection number if such a description has been provided gt Changes to Standard TEAPAC2000 Interface Ver 4 01 All TEAPAC programs which have Windows versions use the new TEAPAC2000 Interface which was introduced in November 1999 The following changes have been made to this interface to further enhance its effectiveness gt Spaces Allowed in Folder Names for Data Files Folders which contain data files may now contain spaces in the folder name Data files themselves are still limited to 11 characters including the extension and may not have embedded spaces for continued compatibility with supported DOS products but the restriction on path names folders has been removed gt File Name Can Be Inserted in Title Lines The name
355. s default value is 202 to export to PASSER I 02 Notes PREPASSR B 129 Reference OVERLAPS OVERLAPS OVERLAPS 4 lt Right Turn Overlap gt Defaults 4 YES Menus Groups PARAMETERS INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter how right turn overlaps are to be handled for each approach of the current intersection lt Right Turn Overlap gt is a keyword which describes whether right turns will be added to the standard phasings in overlap phases where exclusive right turn lanes exist as follows NO don t allow right turn overlap under any condition YES allow right turn overlap into adjacent phases if an exclusive right turn lane exists default Notes The default is YES for each right turn meaning that if an exclusive right turn lane exists and the phasing would allow a non conflicting overlap to be added as an extension of the normal right turn indication it will be added The other option NO will prevent the addition of a right turn in an overlap phase regardless of the turn lane or phasing conditions PREPASSR B 130 Reference PARKINGSIDES PARKINGSIDES PARKINGSIDES 4 lt Parking Location gt Defaults 4 NONE Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter parking conditions on each approach of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Parking Location gt is a keyword which describes from the driver s point of view the parking conditions
356. s for any one command as long as the characters are unique to one and only one command see TPC02 below and the characters appear in the correct order as in the command For example VLMS is a valid abbreviation for the VOLUMES command while VMLS would generate a TPCO1 error message Since the command could not be identified the program does not process any of the parameters entered and requests another entry Action Re enter the TEAPAC F 211 Reference command or a valid command abbreviation along with its appropriate parameters Use the Help Commands menu or HELP ALL to see all possible commands alphabetically TPC02 ERROR This is an abbreviation for more than one command Use more letters This error is generated when the program has been unable to identify one and only one command from an abbreviated command in the Manual Mode An abbreviation could be a single character if it uniquely defines a command however if the character or string of characters can be interpreted as more than one command a TPC02 error message will be displayed Since the command could not be identified the program does not process any of the parameters entered and returns to the command level prompt This error only applies to the Manual Mode Action Re enter the correct command or a valid command abbreviation along with its appropriate parameters Use the Help Commands menu or HELP ALL to see all possible commands alphabetically TPC11 ERROR This file
357. s is only valid in Usage Level 2 versions of PREPASSR Negative route numbers can also be used on the PLOT and TIMINGS commands to list only the nodes in the defined route This option of the PLOT and TIMINGS commands can also be used in Usage Level 1 versions of PREPASSR PREPASSR B 153 Reference SATURATIONFLOWS SATURATIONFLOWS SATURATIONFLOWS 12 lt Stream Saturation Flow gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the maximum capacity for each lane group of the current intersection lt Stream Saturation Flow gt is the saturation flow rate for the lane group in vehicles per hour of green and can be any integer from 0 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes For exclusive left turn lanes the saturation flow rate for separate signal control should be used If no exclusive turn phase exists PASSER will calculate the appropriate opposed saturation flow rate PREPASSR B 154 Reference SAVE SAVE SAVE lt Line Number gt lt File Numbers lt List of Commands gt Defaults next next PARAMETERS Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to save the current parameter values of the listed commands in permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command for future retrieval with the LOAD command lt Line Numbers is the line number in the file where the first command in the list is to be saved and can be any valid line number of the fi
358. s is pre selected by default on each deletion but can be de selected in the prompt dialog box On a related note the manipulation of nodes in the NODELIST dialog has been extended to include dummy nodes as well as real nodes offering greater flexibility in managing the entire node list from this dialog A problem with the Copy and Paste functions to and from the clipboard has also been fixed gt V7 00 14 Improved Support for PDF Creation Difficulties producing PDF files for formatted output reports with certain PDF writers have been resolved gt V7 00 14 Improved Constraint In Use of SUBSYSTEM Function The use of the drag function in the main window network display to create or edit a SUBSYSTEM has been constrained for better consistency with the allowed use of the SUBSYSTEM feature based on the program s licensed Usage Level This prevents inadvertent setting of the SUBSYSTEM which then causes an error when opening a file which has this feature saved gt V7 00 14 Maximum Link Length Increased from 9999 to 32000 The maximum link length allowed by all TEAPAC programs has been increased from 9 999 feet lt 2 miles to 32 000 feet gt 6 miles and a warning message is now issued if a link is created in the main window network display that exceeds this limit gt V7 00 14 File OpenMerge Function Enhanced The File OpenMerge function has been enhanced in several ways as follows First if a file being merged contains infor
359. s should not be used before the data is first entered with the TAB key PREPASSR_ B 104 Reference IODEVICES IODEVICES IODEVICES lt Visual View gt lt Page gt lt Lines Pg gt lt Last Line gt Defaults NORMAL 0 66 63 Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to set the visual view style for dialogs as well as the page number and the size of the output medium i e paper lt Visual View gt is a keyword representing view of the Visual Mode which will be used and can be either keyword described below NORMAL the normal view of the Visual Mode default TABULAR the tabular view of the Visual Mode lt Page gt is the number of the next page to be printed and can be zero 1 or any positive integer up to 32767 Its default value is 0 do not display page number on output lt Lines Pg gt is the number of printable lines on each page of output and can be zero or any positive integer up to 32767 Its default value is 66 the typical size of printed output on 8 1 2 x 11 paper at 6 lines per inch lt Last Line gt is the number of lines counting from the top of the page which are to be used for printing and can be zero or any positive integer less than or equal to lt Lines Pg gt Its default value is 63 which normally allows a half inch margin at the bottom of a 66 line page Notes Printers normally print 6 lines per inch thus an 11 inch page is 66 lines and an 8 1 2 inch page is 51 lines N
360. se of this command is to enter the first line of information used to identify the situation being analyzed lt First Title Line gt is the first of three lines of information generally used for the project name displayed at the top of every output report and can be up to 80 characters of alphabetic or numeric information Its default value is 80 blanks Notes If the first character of the PROJECT parameter is a plus sign the characters entered on this command will be overlaid over those of the previously entered PROJECT command This overlay will begin at the character position identified by the digits of the first two characters which follow the and will end after the last non blank character which is entered See Chapter 5 of the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual for further explanation and examples of this feature Entries on this command may be enclosed in single quotes or double quotes This option provides the capability to include leading blanks in the entry which is otherwise not possible This option can also be used to enter a single blank as the title line using a or entry thereby blanking out the entire prior contents of the title line The name of the current open file can be inserted anywhere in the title line by placing F at the desired location of the title line The file name can be placed at a specific column location in a title line by using the XX form of a title entry noted above PREPAS
361. sed as a parameter value was detected This most often occurs when an unrecognizable command string is entered for either the HELP ASK DATA SAVE or RESET commands These commands will ignore the entire command list when this occurs Action Re issue the command with the correct or properly abbreviated command parameters TPC42 WARNING There are too many commands listed as parameters for this command Re enter This message is displayed when too many commands are entered as parameter values for a particular command This only occurs when using the HELP ASK DATA SAVE or RESET commands which use commands as parameters Typically this error occurs when using Group Names as parameter values The total number of commands contained in the list cannot exceed the total number of commands in the program When this error occurs the program will prompt the user to re enter the command with a shorter list Action Re issue the command with the correct list of command parameters or re issue the command several times with partial lists to get the desired result TPC43 WARNING AMBIGUOUS ENTRY IGNORED This error is identical to TPC41 above where the command used as a parameter is ambiguous and the parameter is ignored Action Same as TPC41 above TPC44 ERROR This demonstration version does not permit use of the AUTO option of EXPORT For a demonstration program the AUTO option of EXPORT is disabled Normally this option allows the ex
362. sed to define the type of EXPORT to be performed and the IMPORT menu group includes the command information commonly used to import the results of a PASSER run back into PREPASSR PREPASSR_ H 298 Reference Some additional clean up of other group name definitions has been done as well Most notably the MINIMUMS command has been added to the PARAMETERS group so that its values are SAVEd by default with all the other PARAMETERS commands Some missing commands have been added to the ALL group and it has been re alphabetized for ease of use In conjunction with the above changes the PHASEMOVS command has been expanded to PHASEMOVEMENTS for compatibility with SIGNAL85 the default SEQUENCE is 11 not 0 and the extra copies of SYSTEM commands which were SAVEd with each intersection s data have been eliminated from the default SAVE list gt Improved Error Detection and Messages A new error condition has been created checking to make sure non zero SATURATIONFLOWS have been entered for every non zero approach WIDTH Also the error displayed when a zero length GREENTIME is used has been improved to indicate which INTERSECTION has the zero GREENTIME gt Special Phasing Case Handled Better If PHASEMOVEMENTS is used to define a special phasing the determination of when the left turns are always opposed permitted also checks to make sure the opposing volume and the left turn volume are non zero before designating the movement as opp
363. specific assignment method has not been selected Optimization Type The parameters to be optimized such as cycle splits and or offsets or a user specified list NONE indicates simulation only List of Intersection s in Network The list of valid node numbers that are to be included in the study network The Master Node represents which of these is the master location or master offset for the system if not 0 List of Intersection s in Defined Routes The list of node numbers that are included in each of the defined artery routes for the system List of Intersection s in Subsystem The list of node numbers that are to be included in the simulation or optimization If no list appears all nodes of the network list will be included in the analysis A negative number represents the negative value of the route number which will be used for the SUBSYSTEM definition Specified List of Links to be Simulated The list of links in simulation order that are to be simulated for the network If no list appears all possible links will be included in the simulation This is used by PRETRANSYT only Intersection Parameters PREPASSR_ D 187 Reference The Intersection Parameters are those parameters which define an individual intersection within the network These parameters are used by PREPASSR to generate the actual PASSER network Intersection The intersection node number and description of the intersection The node number is as appears i
364. spects of TEAPAC program implementation for any of the 32 bit Windows operating systems The details discussed herein should be appropriate for any standard implementation of the these operating systems Table G 1 summarizes the organization of this appendix Table G 1 Summary of Operating System Messages and Installation Notes Run Time Error Codes File Specification File Access Line Numbers File Numbers Output Control Printer Control Disk File Output Installing TEAPAC Programs Appendix G Topics Appendix G Introduction Run Time Error Codes File Specification TEAPAC G 225 Reference File Access Output Control Installing TEAPAC Programs Run Time Error Codes The list of standard run time error codes for the software development system used for TEAPAC is too extensive to be produced here The most common one is a divide by zero error indicating unexpected conditions usually where not enough information has been provided If this or any other un documented error is encountered and you are unable to identify and or correct the problem Strong Concepts may be able to assist you with the problem if enough information is available to reproduce the problem If the problem can be reproduced document the input conditions which existed prior to executing the command upon which the error occurs This can be done with SUMMARISE prior to issuing the last command which generates the error and copying this out
365. t Enter the version of PASSER to create input for LINKLIST 200 lt lt Node Numbers lt Direction gt gt PREPASSR _ 37 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Enter the simulation order for each link in the network primarily for earlier versions of TRANSYT This command appears only for compatibility with PRETRANSYT and is not presently used in PREPASSR Commands to Enter Intersection Data The following are commands which can be used to describe each intersection being analyzed Some of these commands were also included in the Basic Data discussed above INTERSECTION lt Node Numbers lt Description gt Enter the node number of the current intersection and an optional description as defined in the network NODELOCATION lt X Y Coordinates gt Enter the X and Y coordinates of the current intersection NETWORK lt Direction gt lt Distance gt lt Speed gt lt Node gt 4 lt Movement gt lt Assignment Method gt lt Curvature gt lt Manual Distance gt Enter the current intersection s relative location in the system network including spatial and speed parameters APPLABELS 4 lt Approach Label gt Enter labels for each approach of the current intersection MOVLABELS 12 lt Movement Label gt Enter abbreviated labels for each movement of the current intersection RIGHTTURNONREDS 4 lt Right Turn on Red Volume gt Enter the right turn on red volume for the right turns on each approach of t
366. t AUTO is executed any previous ARTDATA file for LEART which exists in the PASSER host folder will be deleted so that it is not confused with the current run of PASSER particularly in the event of a problem with the current run Also since PREPASSR supports data folder names which exceed the limits of PASSER these limits are checked before the Export AUTO and if PASSER will not be able to handle the folder name C will be used for the location of the PASSER data files instead of the PREPASSR data folder gt TEAPAC2000 Version 5 02 Generic Interface Fine tuning In the first release of the TEAPAC2000 Ver 5 Interface users may have experienced difficulty using the Advanced Datafiles LOAD and SAVE functions from the Tabular View These functions have been updated to work properly from the Tabular View Error messages generated from the Manual Mode data files or control files will list the specific line of input which generated the error with the offending item highlighted in red If the information came from a file the file number and line number of the error is also listed The File New function has been updated to make sure that previous NETWORK entries are set back to default values not just hidden This assures that the old values do not unexpectedly appear later when an incomplete NETWORK entry is made Shortcut keys have been added to the File RecentFiles and File Save dialogs for more expediant keyboard manipulation Certain wa
367. t Over write Loading Message The Manual Mode message given at the opening screen when the Manual Mode is entered has been shortened so that it does not over write the Loading Command File message which also appears on the same line This comes into play when a command file is loaded directly from the DOS prompt particularly during an EXPORT AUTO operation A similar message has also been added when the Manual Mode is entered directly from a full screen display with the F4 key Prevent Saving Problem with PROJECT Command in Certain Manual Mode Cases Earlier versions of the TEAPAC Interface may have experienced a spurious occurrence of a problem SAVing the PROJECT command This would only occur if the Manual Mode is entered directly from the opening screen using the ESCape key and then a SAVE is performed before any other full screen operations In this rare instance the PROJECT information is SAVEd at the first line of the SAVE in a manner that cannot be LOADed without an error This has been corrected V2 L2 3 O7NOV93 Control key Option Increments Decrements Pointer Commands Like INTERSECTION Ctrl Page Down and Up can be used to increment and decrement a pointer command such as INTERSECTION in programs that use pointer commands this is most useful for programs like PREPASSR PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM to move between INTERSECTIONS and SITE to move between either INTERSECTIONS or PATHDISTRIBUTION types PREPASSR_ H 283 Reference Mu
368. t Progression Impact gt lt Remedial Actions Failed gt lt Accidents for Signal gt lt Stop Sign Delay gt lt Accidents for Stop gt lt Minor Street Delay gt Defaults NORTHSOUTH 1 1 NO NO NO NO 0 0 0 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS TURNS WARRANTS The purpose of this command is to enter intersection conditions which affect the conduct of a Warrant Analysis at the current intersection lt Major Direction gt is a keyword which describes whether the major street is counted on the North South approaches or East West approaches It can be any of the following NORTHSOUTH major street counted on North amp South approaches default EASTWEST major street counted on East amp West approaches lt N S Lanes gt is the number of lanes for moving traffic on each of the North and South approaches It can be any integer from 1 to 4 Its default value is 1 lt E W Lanes gt is the number of lanes for moving traffic on each of the East and West approaches It can be any integer from 1 to 4 Its default value is 1 lt High Speed gt is a keyword which describes whether the 85th percentile speed of major street traffic exceeds 40 mph It can be any of the following NO major st speeds don t exceed 40 default YES major street speeds exceed 40 mph lt Low Population gt is a keyword which describes whether the intersection is in an isolated community with a population less than 10 000 It can be any of the following NO
369. t should begin with title headings at the top of the next page Commands to Access Data Stored In Files The following commands are used when analysis data and or commands are to be stored in permanent data files for later use FILES 5 lt File Name gt Enter the names of the permanent storage file areas where information is to be LOADed and SAVE lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt lt List of Commands gt Save the current parameter values of the listed commands in permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command for future retrieval with the LOAD command LOAD lt Line Number gt lt File Number gt lt LOAD Type gt lt Blocks gt Input commands and parameters from permanent storage locations specified by the FILES command PREPASSR_ 45 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS RETURN Return to the source of input which was being used when the last LOAD command was encountered It has no parameters NEXTLINES 5 lt Next Line of File gt Enter the default next line to be accessed in each of the five files Commands to Control Program Execution The following commands are used to direct program control Typically these commands are used within control files to execute a series of program steps STOP lt Next Program gt Stop running the current program and optionally run a new program REPEAT lt Variable Name gt lt First Val gt lt Last Val gt lt Increment gt Initiate a loop
370. t status of the INSert mode The page number of the IODEVICES command will not be incremented if the output display is to the screen so that only subsequent printed pages will be incremented This allows on screen interactive analysis to take place between printed pages without the need to reset the page number each time Another new option for the page number is that if the page number is set to a 1 value on the IODEVICES command the screen header and the title header on printed output will not display the current date and time In a related matter the TITLES commands can now enclose the desired titles in single quotes or double quotes thereby providing a means to get leading blank characters in the titles This also provides a way to remove a title line by entering a or simply a entry for any of the PROJECT DESCRIPTION or NOTE commands A new option for HEADING an entry of a zero value has been added which duplicates the F6 printer eject function The significance here is that F6 cannot be included in a control file while HEADING 0 can Furthermore HEADING 0 will reset the output line count on the printer This allows the IODEVICES command to be used within a control file to turn the printer on and off as long as HEADING 0 is used each time it is turned back on to eject the printed page and reset the output line counter PREPASSR_ H 295_ Reference Commands Included in Menus Adjusted The SUMMARISE command has been added to
371. t will fit on the remaining portion of the current page and can be either of the keywords described below NO do not force a new page with the next report YES advance to a new page with the next report output default Notes If the page length is set to zero with IODEVICES titles will be printed at the current page location without a page advance continuous printing Use of NEWPAGE is primarily oriented towards the batch mode using control files In the batch mode if a report is too large to fit on the remaining portion of the designated report length on the current page as designated on the IODEVICES command it will be placed on a new page regardless of the condition specified by the NEWPAGE command If the first command to reset on the RESET command is PARAMETERS a NEWPAGE YES command is automatically invoked Thus any report produced following a RESET command will be forced to the top of the next page This feature can be defeated by use of a NEWPAGE NO following the RESET command PREPASSR B 120 Reference NEXTLINES NEXTLINES NEXTLINES 5 lt Next Line of File gt Defaults 5 next Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to enter the default next line to be accessed in each of the five files lt Next Line of File gt is the line number of the default next line to be accessed in the file and can be zero or any positive number less than or equal to the last line of the file and less than or
372. ta and PASSER files are stored The TEAPAC BAT file must be similarly configured for the system s batch file location A complete installation guide is provided in the Appendix G update gt New SUBSYSTEM Command Available in Usage Level 2 PREPASSR_ H 286 Reference The SUBSYSTEM command has been implemented allowing a subset of the complete NODELIST to be exported to PASSER in Level 2 versions of PREPASSR This means that the entire network up to 100 signals may be LOADed into PREPASSR then only the pertinent signals are exported to PASSER This allows for extremely efficient testing of various potential subsystem boundaries Like the NODELIST command the entry of a 0 node in the SUBSYSTEM list will terminate the SUBSYSTEM list of nodes and zero out any subsequent nodes in the list Like the LINKLIST command the SUBSYSTEM command is not SAVEd into a data file unless it has been defined If this is the case the SAVE will possibly take up more lines than a previous SAVE so caution must be used if multiple scenarios are SAVEd into a single file gt PASSER Cycle Range Optimization Implemented The PASSER option to optimize the cycle length has now been implemented as an automatic function of PREPASSR It uses the same logic as the SPLIT OFFSET optimization of PREPASSR since PASSER must optimize splits in order to vary the cycle length with the additional use of the new cycle range inputs on the CYCLES command To implement this option
373. ta being entered or control the analysis to be performed Most dialog boxes have at least one Parameter Value associated with it Default Value When the program is run initially all parameter values take on pre assigned default values These are reasonably typical values Default Values can be restored using the File New menu or the RESET command Command Level Prompt The Command Level Prompt gt is displayed in the Manual Mode when ready to accept a Command Input Line from the keyboard Input Line An Input Line consists of a Command keyword and its Parameter Values An Input Line may be entered in either the Tabular View or Manual Mode or LOADed from a data file Group Name Groups Names are used to identify sets of commands which share a common function These commands can be referenced together as a group by using the Group Name enclosed in square brackets e g BASIC File A file is a place on a permanent storage disk where program entry information is stored This information can be either input data information a data file commands to direct computations a control file or a combination of both Intersection Approach and Movement Data Entry PREPASSR 5 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION TEAPAC programs enter intersection approach and movement data in a standard order starting from the north and moving clockwise around the intersection These conventions should be understood when entering intersection data as des
374. ta review Either of these commands may be used to display the current parameter values for the PREPASSR entries SUMMARISE provides a formatted summary report for all of the command parameter values while DATA displays only the parameter values for the list of commands requested To illustrate this operation in either the Visual or Manual Modes enter the following Note that again since this is an active command the Visual Mode requires that the Execute button be used to execute the command The View Summary menu can also be used Datafiles SUMMARISE The current values of all input commands are listed with the values just entered as well as any default values which were not entered Note that the movement parameters such as VOLUMES and WIDTHS have approach and movement labels and a report title is displayed The DATA command only displays the information without any special formatting Datafiles DATA INTERSECTION VOLUMES WIDTHS The program displays the current parameter values for only the INTERSECTION VOLUMES and WIDTHS commands of the current intersection Note that no other command s values are listed nor are there any headings Since DATA accepts other commands as parameter values DATA can be requested for only one several or all commands where SUMMARISE always gives all values This makes DATA quicker to use but less clear for others to review other than on the computer display PREPASSR_ 22 Tutorial Chapter 2 I
375. tension is not entered the program will automatically generate tpc as the default extension The older TEAPAC file format extension of for is also allowed Use of the default extension is recommended Switch s When using the FILES command the operating systems provide the capability to automatically create data files on disk This capability also allows the unintentional creation of a file or the TEAPAC G 227 Reference accidental overwriting of an existing file without warning In the case of overwriting an existing file the loss of valuable data may result In order to eliminate these potential file management problems TEAPAC programs use two switches N and O to indicate the intention of creating a new disk data file If a data file is expected to already exist a switch is not required The N switch is used to automatically create a New data file that doesn t already exist without any error or user query If the N option is used and a data file already exists for lt File Name gt a warning message will be displayed stating that the lt File Name gt already exists This protects the user from accidentally over writing an existing file when a new file was expected If no switch is used the TEAPAC program will expect to find an existing data file on the designated disk drive If there is no existing data file for lt File Name gt a warning message will be displayed indicating the file can not be located This prote
376. tential solutions PREPASSR errors are identified by the letters PPS followed by a two digit number In addition potential trouble spots associated with using the PREPASSR program are outlined This appendix is useful for identifying program specific causes for certain problems in the use of PREPASSR as well as preventing future errors Appendix F TEAPAC SYSTEM ERROR MESSAGES Appendix F describes error messages which are common to all TEAPAC programs TEAPAC error or warning messages are identified by the letters TPC followed by a two digit number This appendix discusses each TEAPAC error and potential causes and solutions Appendix F of each TEAPAC Manual is identical for quick reference purposes Appendix G OPERATING SYSTEM MESSAGES AND INSTALLATION NOTES Appendix G discusses the unique aspects of the installation of TEAPAC programs on a particular operating system Operating system dependent functions such as error messages file specification procedures and output control features are discussed Special function keys such as control characters are also discussed Appendix G of each TEAPAC Manual is identical for quick reference purposes Appendix H ADDENDA Appendix H provides a location for recent release notes and addenda which may be published after the official release of this documentation This appendix can also be used to store printed copies of new release notes for updated versions of PREPASSR as produced by the Help Re
377. tered This is a convenient way to adjust traffic count data for seasonal variations in count data or to apply a projected growth factor e VOLFACTORS can also be used to project growth of traffic at the intersection for example if the count is several years old and must be used for a current study or to project a future volume condition e See the discussion in Appendix C Calculation of Volumes for a complete discussion of how VOLUMES VOLFACTORS VOLADDITIONALS and PEAKHOURFACTORS are used to generate analysis volumes for various types of analyses within TEAPAC PREPASSR _ B 175 Reference VOLUMES VOLUMES VOLUMES 12 lt Design Hour Volume gt Defaults 12 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS BASIC INTERSECTION The purpose of this command is to enter the turning and through movement volumes for each of the movements at the current intersection lt Design Hour Volume gt is a volume in vehicles per hour for the movement and can be any integer from 0 to 9999 Its default value is 0 Notes A volume of 0 indicates the movement is prohibited at the intersection allowed movements with no measured activity should show at least 1 vehicle per hour e Note that the VOLUMES entered will be factored up for analysis by PASSER according to the PEAKHOURFACTORS entries made for each movement See the discussion in Appendix C Calculation of Volumes for a complete discussion of how VOLUMES VOLFACTORS VOLADDITIONALS and PEAKHOURFACT
378. th has been defined A bug has been fixed that could cause a crash when clicking within an output being displayed at a zoomed out scale on some low resolution monitors PREPASSR Ver 2 70 O7NOVO5 Build 28 28AUG06 Scroll down to Ver 2 70 O7NOVOS5 Build 07 1LNOVO5 below for the major changes which were implemented for the original Visual TEAPAC release gt V7 00 28 Generic Enhancements Made to All Visual TEAPAC Programs A number of generic enhancements and fixes have been made to the original Ver 7 00 releases of Visual TEAPAC and are collectively included as Ver 7 00 Build 28 These are documented below and use heading lines that begin with V7 00 28 In addition minor program specific changes have been made as summarized here and detailed in the program s own specific list of updates and changes Ver 7 00 Build 28 changes are free updates for Ver 7 00 licenses gt V7 00 28 Number of Access Drives Increased From 5 to 10 for SITE Computations The permitted number of driveways which provide access to a development area for SITE computations has been increased from 5 to 10 in all TEAPAC programs allowing greater flexibility in modeling all driveways which may exist or be proposed for a development Along PREPASSR_ H 237 Reference with this change comes a quicker way of entering driveway locations by combining the intersection leg direction N E S W with the node number of the drive such as 1N or 132E gt V7 00 28 Input
379. the CYCLE and OFFSET Only GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES are required if only the offsets will be optimized but if splits will also be optimized as indicated by the OPTIMIZE command then the GREENTIMES and YELLOWTIMES are not needed and the MINIMUMS are required If a version of PASSER other than the most current version is to be used this must be indicated with the OUTPUT command Optional inputs include the SIMULATION command to set parameters which define the type of simulation to be performed and the MASTERNODE command to define which intersection represents the master node The NODELOCATION RIGHTTURNONREDS LANES GROUPTYPE TRUCKPERCENTS PEAKHOURFACTORS ACTUATIONS STARTUPLOST ENDGAIN STORAGE LEADLAGS PERMISSIVES OVERLAPS and PHASEMOVS commands may also be used to further define the intersection coordinates the PREPASSR 28 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES movement s RTOR lanes lane groupt types heavy vehicles peak hour factors actuated startup lost time end gain time and storage conditions and the SEQUENCE of operation at each signal Route entries may also be used to define specific arteries in the system If a subset of the entire nodelist is to be analyzed this can be done conveniently by using the SUBSYSTEM command in Usage Level 2 and 3 versions of PREPASSR Timing Diagrams Inputs In order to produce phasing and timing diagrams for each intersection virtually the same basic inputs are required as for a sim
380. the Minimum Cycle Maximum Cycle and Cycle Increment must be input on the CYCLES command and the new CYCLE SPL OFF option of the OPTIMIZE command must be used In conjunction with this enhancement the CYCLES command has been added to the EXPORT group name Although this new option of PREPASSR makes the cycle optimization with PASSER more convenient it is still recommended that this PASSER option not be used in lieu of a more robust optimization of splits with SIGNAL85 and the use of PASSER only for offset optimization gt New Data Displayed in TIMINGS Report The TIMINGS report has been enhanced with the addition of two types of phase time calculations First phase times the sum of the green and yellow intervals for each phase are displayed in both seconds and percent both with one decimal place of accuracy These values are also displayed rounded to the nearest second and percent for implementation on systems which require such rounding If rounding error causes these rounded values not to add up to the cycle length or 100 percent the cumulated error is placed in the phase with the most allocated time The characters used to display arrow head and vertical lines have also been improved while still maintaining compatibility with any ASCII printer and the report has been compressed slightly so that six phase intersections will fit on any 80 character screen or printer gt Check Made to Make Sure Input Network is Connected Throughout A
381. the PROS DI performance index The default values of 0 for these fields perform the normal minimization of delay and stops but these entries can be used to conduct other optimizations with the PROS model being the one of greatest interest e If the LIST option of OPTIMIZE is not used then the fourth step size value input is used to designate the 8th field of the 5X card the optimization algorithm 2 for Hillclimb 1 for Genetic non elitist and 0 for Genetic elitist If the LIST option of OPTIMIZE is not used then the fifth step size value input is used to designate whether a single cycle 0 or multi cycle 1 simulation will be PREPASSR B 127 Reference OPTIMIZE OPTIMIZE performed as defined by the X value of the 5X card If multi cycle is selected step wise simulation will be forced If LIST is used then when a zero value is entered as a step size anywhere except the first field this will zero out the remainder of the step size list PREPASSR B 128 Reference OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT lt Prog gt lt PASSER Version gt Defaults PREPASSR 202 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SYSTEM EXPORT The purpose of this command is to enter the version of PASSER to create input for lt Prog gt is the TEAPAC program for which the OUTPUT values are to be provided and can be any valid TEAPAC program name Its default value is PREPASSR lt PASSER Versions is the version of PASSER to be used and can be either 287 290 or 202 It
382. the active command dialogs which perform the various analyses specific to the purpose of the PREPASSR program These commands are summarized in this section All the details about each command dialog can be found alphabetically in Appendix B The data entry values which must be made prior to using the active commands are listed in the following section EXPORT lt File AUTO STACK gt lt Display Output gt lt Auto Option gt Create a PASSER compatible input data file from the current data values with an optional automatic link to PASSER II IMPORT lt File AUTO gt lt Display Output gt Import signal timings from a PASSER II output file which was created by a PREPASSR Export PLOT lt Scale gt lt List of Nodes gt Plot a time space diagram for the nodes specified TIMINGS lt List of Nodes gt Display the phasing and timings defined for each intersection in the list of nodes including the system offset value PARAMETERS Dialogs PARAMETERS commands are the data entry command dialogs used to enter the parameter values which are specific to the purpose of the PRENETSIM program Each is summarized in the following paragraphs First those PARAMETERS commands which are the most basic entry commands are described These commands are frequently the only ones needed to describe a signalized system completely using the defaults for the remaining PARAMETERS commands These remaining commands are then described organized by the type of
383. the development GENERATION lt Direction gt lt Generation Rate gt 10 lt Node Dir gt Enter the traffic generation rates and access points and access directions for the development PATHDISTRIBUTION lt Distr Type gt lt Distr gt lt Node gt lt Node Dir gt lt Descr gt Enter and set the current distribution type number and enter its related distribution percentage external node and description PREPASSR _ 42 Tutorial Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS PATHASSIGNMENT lt Path gt lt Path gt lt Path List gt Enter a path list of intersections which vehicles of the current distribution type follow when traveling to and from the development ASSIGNMENT lt Type gt lt Intersection gt 12 lt lt Movement gt lt Assignment Factor gt gt Enter the percentage of a distribution type to be assigned to the movements at an intersection This is only used to define special assignment situations and is not normally used for typical site traffic assignment situations Commands to Enter Traffic Count Data The following are commands which can be used to describe traffic count data for each intersection being analyzed but whose data values are not used by PREPASSR Their inclusion in the program is to provide seamless data file compatibility with the TURNS and WARRANTS programs in particular and all TEAPAC programs in general COUNTTYPE lt Type of Data gt lt Type of Truck Counts gt
384. the movement number or the beginning time of the time interval for the counts to be entered and can be any of the following 1 12 Movement number or 0 2400 Beginning time This parameter has no default value and must be entered each time the TRUCKCOUNTS command is used lt List of Counts gt is the list of counted trucks for the specified movement number or time interval and can be any number from 999 to 9999 Its default value is 0 e g it must be entered Notes Movement numbers begin with the north leg right turn and proceed clockwise around the intersection If a movement number is given for the first parameter the counts should be for that movement only one for each interval in each of the periods If a time is given twelve counts for each of the movements at that time should follow Use of the movement number option is limited to the Manual Mode only e Usually for capacity analysis purposes vehicles with 6 or more tires or 3 or more axles should be considered trucks heavy vehicles All counted trucks entered by this command may either be included or not included in the counts on the VEHICLECOUNTS command This is determined by the second parameter of the COUNTTYPE command Truck counts may not exceed 9999 Input should always be no more than four digits If cumulative counts are made with five digit counters only enter the last four digits When cumulative counts are being reduced if the difference is n
385. there is an error in the VOLUMES entered for intersection 15 The right turn on the east approach should be 466 not 366 To correct this re enter the VOLUMES entry with the proper value using either of the entry modes Visual or Manual Basic gt VOLUMES 466 Note that in either mode only the value to be changed need be entered In the Visual Mode the cursor is moved to the field with the 366 value and the 466 is typed right over the 366 followed by TAB or ENTER In the Manual Mode the VOLUMES command is typed followed by 3 asterisks used as place holders to skip the first three entries It is frequently desirable to print the summary of input values both as a document to use in the input checking process as well as a physical record of the input data used in subsequent analyses Use of the printer is easy with PREPASSR Simply use the File Print menu of the output window or Ctrl P to direct the output to the default printer Various available printers and printer options can be selected using the Setup options in the File menu and the last produced PREPASSR_ 23 Tutorial Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE output can be printed from the File menu of the main window If your printer is connected perform the above sequence for the SUMMARISE command to get a printed summary of input then recheck all the data input for proper values before proceeding Analysis The third step in program execution is to perform an analysis of the
386. ti intersection database to be saved as a single file TPC64 WARNING UTILIZATION entries gt 1 0 from old data file have been inverted for HCM 2000 This warning indicates that a UTILIZATION entry has been encountered with a value greater than 1 0 normally when a SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 data file has been loaded Due to the new TEAPAC F 221 Reference technique used to define unbalanced lane utilization in the 1997 amp 2000 HCMs these values have been automatically inverted 1 x to reflect the new definition This message warns the user of this automatic conversion Action If the UTILIZATION values gt 1 0 are in fact from an old SIGNAL85 or SIGNAL94 file no action should be required In any case the user should simply make sure that this is the case and verify that the inverted results are appropriate TPC65 WARNING The SEQUENCE code for this INTERSECTION must be 1 thru 9 to use PHASEMOVS This warning indicates that the PHASEMOVEMENTS command was executed for an intersection whose SEQUENCES code was not in the range of 1 through 9 Action The SEQUENCE code for the intersection must first be set to a number in the range of 1 through 9 before the PHASEMOVS command can be executed TPC66 ERROR Entry of this command is not allowed for the demonstration program In a demonstration version of TURNS the intersection conditions for a warrant analysis take on preset values which cannot be changed by use of the CONDITIONS c
387. tibility with that and other TEAPAC programs New error checks occur to make sure each non zero WIDTH entry has VOLUME in it and that each non zero VOLUME entry has a WIDTH gt Minor Bugs Fixed A bug in the re entry of a NODELIST longer than 12 intersections using the ASK command has been fixed as has a line counting problem for certain cases displayed by the SUMMARISE command Also a potential bug in terminating control files executed from the DOS command prompt has been repaired Finally PREPASSR now requires that all GREENTIMES be entered as values less than 1 00 a decimal percentage before any of them will be converted to seconds The same is true of YELLOWTIMES A bug has been located and fixed which caused difficulties when trying to enter PHASEMOVEMENTS in the Menu Mode when no PHASEMOVEMENTS had been previously defined gt TEAPAC Interface V2 L2 0 V2 L2 1 and V2 12 2 Installed PREPASSR_ H 289 Reference The latest releases of the standard TEAPAC Interface V2 L2 0 1INOV91 V2 L2 1 O7JAN92 and V2 L2 2 OIMAY92 have been installed in the PREPASSR program these interfaces being a major update of the version previously used in PREPASSR The following paragraphs summarise the improvements and changes implemented as documented in the updated TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual Check this documentation for complete details of this new interface release V2 L2 2 OIMAY92 Simplified LOAD and SAVE Commands Don t Require FILES Comm
388. tion version For a demonstration program certain input ranges are limited so arbitrary input values cannot be entered Normally a full range of typical input values is allowed for every input accepted by the program Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC49 ERROR This command s values cannot be modified in this demonstration version For a demonstration program certain command entry values cannot be changed from their default values Normally a full range of typical input values is allowed for every input accepted by the program Action Purchase a full use license for this program to enable this feature TPC51 ERROR The GOTO variable does not match the current REPEAT command Access aborted If the lt Destination gt parameter on a GOTO command is not a lt Variable gt parameter of the most active REPEAT command this message will be displayed Command execution is terminated and a new command instruction is issued Action Verify that all REPEAT and GOTO variable references are correct and re issue the LOAD command to restart the REPEAT loop process TPC52 ERROR ERROR IN PROGRAM SPECIFICATION This error occurs when an invalid lt Program Name gt parameter is used with the STOP command The lt Program Name gt parameter must be specified following the rules for file specification outlined in Appendix G Action Re issue the STOP command using the correct file TEAPAC F 218 Reference
389. tions for the development lt Direction gt is a keyword which describes whether the following information applies to inbound outbound or both directions of trip generation and can be any keyword as described below IN data applies to inbound trips only OUT data applies to outbound trips only BOTH data applies to inbound amp outbound trips Manual Mode only It has no default value it must be entered lt Generation Rate gt is the trip generation rate to be applied to the generation base and can be any number which when multiplied by the BASE development size yields the total vehicle trips generated from 9 99 to 99 99 Its default value is 0 000 lt Node Dir gt is the node number and leg direction providing the access to the development site For example a 1N entry means the north leg of node 1 provides access to the site The Node part of the entry can be 0 999 see note below and its default value is O at least one access node is required The Dir part of the entry is a character which describes the leg of the intersection which provides access to the site can be either N E S or W and has no default value it must be entered for every non zero Node entry Notes The Node part of lt Node Dir gt must be included in the list of intersections previously established with the NODELIST command If a previously entered list of access nodes must be shortened the entry of Node number 0 anywhere in the list
390. tions initiated from the Manual Mode Previously these helps were not available PREPASSR Ver 1 61 25APR02 Build 16 14JUL02 PREPASSR_ H 262 Reference gt Updated Build for Consistency with Release of Build 16 of Full TEAPAC Ver 5 System Build 16 of PREPASSR has been created for consistency with the complete release of Build 16 of the full TEAPAC Ver 5 system which includes the generic TEAPAC2000 interface update to Ver 5 02 Since these updates were included in the previous build of PREPASSR no changes other than the build number have occurred for this program Build 00 25APR02 gt Many New Entries Allow Advanced Modeling A vast array of new entries have been added to the inputs which are used to describe intersection conditions These match inputs by the same labels allowed in the SIGNAL2000 program and thus can be input directly from SIGNAL2000 data files They also match corresponding updates in PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM so the same information can be shared with these programs as well These new entries are primarily for enhanced modeling possibilities in PRETRANSYT and PRENETSIM but the same input changes are made here in PREPASSR for purposes of data sharing The new inputs allowed are described briefly here The new inputs are also displayed by the View Summary menu and the SUMMARISE command Also if an attempt is made to Save information into a file written by an older version of the program a warning will be issued t
391. to be sure they are the same since this is required by PASSER If they are not the same the largest minimum for each phase is used These apply for example to SEQUENCE codes 1 4 and 7 If no left turn lane exists left turn volumes are not shown separately but included in the through volumes The PASSER phasing used for unopposed single phase operation when a left turn lane doesn t exist has also been changed gt YELLOWTIMES Inputs Override LOSTTIMES in PASSER Minimum Inputs If YELLOWTIMES are input when a SPLIT OFFSET or CYCLE optimization is requested these values will be added to the green MINIMUMS to generate PASSER s input minimum values If no YELLOWTIMES are provided the sum of the two LOSTTIMES values will be used instead gt Improved Input Checking Tighter input range checks have been implemented with particular attention to only allowing the input of values which can be properly displayed in the Menu Mode even if entered in the Manual Mode This prevents bogus displays from appearing in the Menu Mode under these conditions Active commands are also prevented from continuation if an error has been detected in the event that it is not corrected properly gt GREENTIMES Not Required as Input for SPLIT or CYCLE Optimization PREPASSR_ H 288 Reference When EXPORTing to PASSER for a split or cycle optimization the input of GREENTIMES is no longer required since they will be ignored by PASSER YELLOWTIMES may also be om
392. tructure and Organization Conventions Review of TEAPAC Procedures Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Description of Example Problem Data Entry Data Review Analysis Evaluation Exiting the Program Additional Concerns Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES Input Requirements Analysis Procedures Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS RESULTS Dialogs PARAMETERS Dialogs Common TEAPAC Dialogs Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Sharing Data Files with Other TEAPAC Programs In order to illustrate the features and basic procedures of PREPASSR Chapter 2 presents a hands on example problem with detailed step by step instructions on how to execute a simple analysis using the PREPASSR program This chapter provides an opportunity to use the PREPASSR program and observe the results Chapter 3 discusses the analysis techniques and procedures which should be used with the PREPASSR program as illustrated by the example presented in the previous chapter After reading this section it should be possible to perform simple analyses using the PREPASSR program Chapter 4 provides a summary of each of the action and entry dialogs used by the PREPASSR program organized by function details are in Appendix B This includes a summary of the basic TEAPAC actions and entries which appear in all TEAPAC programs More detail on these TEAPAC functions can be found in Appendix B and the TEAPAC Tutorial Reference Manual PREPASSR_ 3 Tutorial Chapter 1 INTRODUCT
393. ts are listed below with heading lines that begin with T2004v6 gt T2004v6 One Common Data File Supports All TEAPAC Programs The most significant and obvious change made to each TEAPAC program in Version 6 is that all programs now share a single common data file structure that contains all of the data entries used by all TEAPAC programs This means that any TEAPAC program except NOSTOP and TUTOR can open any file from any other TEAPAC program make changes to any of the data PREPASSR_ H 250 Reference values it contains and re Save the file with complete retention of all data values for future use by any other TEAPAC program The first implication of this major fundamental change is that the concept of File OpenShare of earlier TEAPAC programs is no longer needed since the sharing of TEAPAC files among TEAPAC programs is now fundamental and automatic File OpenShare has been re named to File OpenMerge Share to better reflect its current function to merge the content of multiple files and can still be used to read and merge the content of files from older versions of SIGNAL97 SIGNAL2000 Ver 1 SITE TURNS and WARRANTS OpenMerge is automatic when reading these files Also the warning message when saving to a file created by one of these other programs has been removed again because this function is now standard procedure and has no risk of loss of data The second implication of this change is that any values computed by one progr
394. ty loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by TEAPAC programs or documentation including but not limited to any interruption of service loss of business or anticipatory profits or consequential damages resulting from the use or operation of such computer programs Strong Concepts makes no representations commitments or warranties with respect to the contents hereof TEAPAC programs are licensed on an as is basis THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE ALL SUCH WARRANTIES ARE EXPRESSLY AND SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMED Further Strong Concepts reserves the right to revise programs and related publications and to make changes from time to time in the content thereof without obligation of Strong Concepts to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes PREPASSR_ iv Manual CONTENTS PREPASSR Pre and Post processor for PASSER II Arterial Optimization Acknowledgments Proprietary Notice Disclaimer List of Tables List of Figures Tutorial Manual Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION Chapter 2 INITIAL EXAMPLE Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES Chapter 4 ACTIONS AND ENTRY PARAMETERS Chapter 5 ADVANCED PROCEDURES Reference Manual Summary of Appendices Appendix A ABBREVIATED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AND ENTRIES Appendix B DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF ACTIONS AN
395. uctures used prior to PASSER I 02 If PASSER I 02 or later is being used the file is directly useable In this case the user will be prompted to acknowledge a name change and with a warning about converted data values Both responses should be affirmative and the renamed file will have the P2I extension e A direct linkage to and from PASSER can be created which handles the export file naming running of PASSER and optional review of PASSER s results This option is selected by entering AUTO as the EXPORT file name When AUTO is selected a third parameter can be entered to define what actions should be taken after the automatic export The third parameter is ignored if AUTO is not selected AUTO may not be abbreviated nor may any file name used start with the four letters A U T O When the AUTO option is selected the export file name used is TMPPSR DAT and the PASSER results are stored in the file TMPPSR P20 In order for the AUTO option of EXPORT to function properly the PREPASSR CFG file must be configured to properly represent the folders where the TEAPAC PREPASSR data and PASSER files are stored see Options Setup menu for on screen editing of the PREPASSR CFG file e The output of the EXPORT command normally starts at the beginning of the file named It can also be stacked behind a previous EXPORT to the same file used by the previous EXPORT so that multiple runs of PASSER can be made from a PREPASSR_ B 88 Reference EXPORT
396. ue long command lines to the subsequent entry line When using the Visual Mode only the first 12 entries may be entered or modified PREPASSR B 165 Reference SUBSYSTEM SUBSYSTEM The order of entries on SUBSYSTEM has no effect on the order that the intersections are EXPORTed to PASSER The NODELIST defines this order Route numbers can be referenced by use of a negative number on the SUBSYSTEM command to quickly identify a route for analysis For example if ROUTE 1 is defined by an appropriate ROUTE command a subsystem analysis for only this route can be created through the use of the SUBSYSTEM 1 command PREPASSR B 166 Reference SUMMARISE SUMMARISE SUMMARISE Defaults Menus Groups DATAFILES The purpose of this command is to display a formatted summary of all PARAMETERS values It has no parameters Notes SUMMARISE is similar in function to DATA but provides better column organization and section headings where DATA only lists the current data values for each command DATA on the other hand allows selection of which command s data to view and can sometimes save time whereas SUMMARISE will always display all data values e The SUMMARISE command is spelled with an S at the end in order that it does not conflict with the typical command SIZE If SUMMARISE were spelled with a Z then typing the full command SIZE would still be an ambiguous abbreviation for both the SIZE and SUMMARIZE commands an
397. ulation EXPORT as described above including the GREENTIMES YELLOWTIMES and OFFSET inputs The major exception is that the NETWORK WIDTHS and SATURATIONFLOWS are not required nor are any of the optional inputs described above such as SIMULATION etc Note that VOLUMES are required in order to display the proper arrows in the phasing diagram The special phasing commands may be used to further define the SEQUENCE used and SUBSYSTEM may be used to see a subset of the NODELIST in Usage Level 2 and 3 versions of PREPASSR Time Space Inputs In order to produce time space diagrams the input requirements are the same as the timing diagrams inputs except that the NETWORK inputs are required and the VOLUMES inputs are not Input Limitations PREPASSR is designed to optimize the operation of as many as 500 four legged intersection using the PASSER program as a basis for the analyses In accomplishing this objective certain limitations in the input and use of the program exist These are described in this section In some instances references to Chapter 5 are made where techniques are described to get around some of these limitations None of these limitations constrain the basic use of the program for most situations however and this section should not be viewed as diminishing the usability of the program but merely documenting the limitations which should be observed in its use Usage Level 2 of PREPASSR allows the definition of up to 100 interse
398. ully constrain the splits This will be an option in a future version of PREPASSR As before use of either the OFFSETS or LIST options of OPTIMIZE will still create the same optimization results with PASSER as the SPLITS OFFSETS for now PREPASSR V1 L1 2 31DEC90 gt Changes Improve Ability to Share SIGNAL85 Data Files Two difficulties have been corrected which allow improved sharing of SIGNAL85 data files When the SHARE option of the LOAD command is used PHASEMOVEMENTS commands which are SAVEd in a SIGNAL85 data file are ignored unless the SEQUENCE code for that intersection has been entered as 1 through 5 No error message is issued in this case as was previously the case PREPASSR_ H 297 Reference Also to account for the fact that the OUTPUT command in PREPASSR differs from that in SIGNAL85 input from the SAVEd OUTPUT command in a SIGNAL85 data file is ignored without an error message when that data file is LOADed with the SHARE option The current values of PREPASSR s OUTPUT command remain unchanged in this situation PREPASSR V1 L1 1 210CT90 gt New PASSER Options Enabled Through PREPASSR Several system control parameters in a PASSER run can now be controlled by inputs to the PREPASSR program The OPTIMIZE command can be used to signal whether a simulation only is desired by PASSER by using the NONE entry no optimization and normal optimization by PASSER can be requested with the OFFSETS keyword The other possible i
399. ult value a variable name must be provided lt First Val gt is the value which will be assigned to the loop variable the first time through the loop and can be any integer from 32767 to 32767 Its default value is 1 lt Last Val gt is the last value which the loop variable will be allowed to have in the loop and can be any integer from 32767 to 32767 Its default value is 1 lt Increment gt is the value which will be added to the loop variable for each pass of the loop in order to increment from lt First Val gt to lt Last Val gt and can be any non zero integer from 32767 to 32767 Its default value is 1 Notes The end of a REPEAT loop is defined by a GOTO command which has lt Variable Name gt as its lt Destination gt e Although any character string is allowed as a variable name only the first letter is used as the actual variable All following non blank characters are ignored If another loop is currently active its associated loop variable may not be used A REPEAT loop will terminate when the value of the loop variable exceeds the specified lt Last Val gt When a loop terminates the loop variable will have the same value as lt Last Val gt e A negative value for lt Increment gt is allowed in which case the loop variable will be decremented until it is less than lt Last Val gt e A limit of five REPEAT loops may be active at any one time i e nested Any number of sequential loops may be use
400. um Input Requirements Many of the input parameter values have defaults which eliminate the need to enter data for every parameter After the program is started or the File New menu or RESET PARAMETERS command is issued these default values can be viewed in any of the input dialogs of the Visual Mode or with the DATA or ASK commands in the Manual Mode The default values of each command are also listed in the right hand section of the HELP displays which are generated by the Help Commands menu or the HELP command in the Manual Mode PREPASSR_ 27 Tutorial Chapter 3 ANALYSIS PROCEDURES On the other hand there are a number of commands for which it is necessary to input data in order to produce legitimate results The most obvious of these are the NODELIST and SEQUENCE commands to describe the intersections under study and their phasings Values for these commands are needed to do most any function of the PREPASSR program As such examples of these inputs were illustrated in the initial example of Chapter 2 For an approximate effort only a few of these commands may be needed For a more detailed operations analysis the other commands which describe intersection conditions completely should be used although each has a preset default value which may be usable in an analysis Each of the input parameters for these commands should be reviewed to check the appropriateness of the default values using the View Summary menu or the dialog boxes of the E
401. upper right northeast corner of the site for display in the schematic diagram and can be any common coordinate system value as an integer from 2 147 483 647 to 2 147 483 647 Its default value is 0 0 Notes The coordinate system used for BASE should match that used by each NODELOCATION command PREPASSR B 72 Reference BIKEVOLUMES BIKEVOLUMES BIKEVOLUMES 4 lt Conflicting Bicycles gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the volume of conflicting bicycles for right turns on each approach of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compatibility only lt Conflicting Bicycles gt is the volume of conflicting bicycles in bikes per hour for right turns on the approach and can be any integer from 0 to 2000 Its default value is 0 Notes Entries for bicycle interference should be made for the approach from which the conflicting right turn is made For example bicycles crossing the east leg of the intersection interfere with right turns made from the south approach so the lt Conflicting Bicycles gt value for that right turn should be input for the south approach PREPASSR B 73 Reference BUSVOLUMES BUSVOLUMES BUSVOLUMES 4 lt Stopping Bus Volume gt Defaults 4 0 Menus Groups PARAMETERS SIGNAL2000 The purpose of this command is to enter the volumes of stopping buses which stop on each approach of the current intersection for SIGNAL2000 file compat
402. using and less redundant IMPORT report gt TEAPAC2000 User Interface Version 5 Implemented The WinTEAPAC2000 Version 5 interface has been implemented in PREPASSR to provide the latest standardized TEAPAC interface found in all TEAPAC programs The following lists the many changes which this new interface provides gt New Tabular View Option Provides Dense Data Entry Displays Two views for Visual Mode normal and tabular More data inputs per dialog less helps and cues Toggle view between Normal and Tabular with View menu or F3 key Tooltip help and status line help for each entry field Context sensitive help button for access to complete help in HLP Execute button for action functions Next amp Prev buttons if input list takes more than one dialog PgUp amp PgDn Alt X accel to move through input keywords commands with keyboard Create custom Tabular View input dialog with ASK command from Manual Mode IODEV param 1 changed to toggle View Options Setup allows option to startup program in Tabular View gt New Recent File Dialog in File Menu Review list of last nine files and paths used Can select edit file names and re open selected files Option to include list of recent files and paths in File menu List of recent files can be cleared from the dialog gt New Features for Saving Files PREPASSR_ H 266 Reference Files now contain name amp version of program which wrote the file also include the date amp time of the S
403. what results were generated by the current run since the same output file name will be used In addition the EXPORT file is closed after the EXPORT is completed so that in a multi tasking Windows system this file may be opened by any other program such as PASSER itself or an editor while PREPASSR is still running gt New Option Available to Disable PASSER s Actuated Model The use of the PASSER actuated model which is used to simulate actuated systems can be somewhat confusing and may lead to erroneous results and misinterpretations of the results if not clearly understood by the user On the other hand the ACTUATIONS input makes it quite simple to implement this model without knowledge of the consequences In light of this dilemma a new option has been added to the SIMULATION entry to disable the PASSER actuated model regardless of the ACTUATIONS inputs and disabling the PASSER actuated model is the default and recommended condition gt Additional Method for Defining Analysis Period PREPASSR H 274 Reference An option that was implemented for PRENETSIM has now been implemented for PREPASSR as well This allows the simulation period to be defined as an even number of signal cycles by entering the number of cycles as a negative number for the SIMULATION period gt Workaround for PASSER Bug in LEART In PASSER the IOSPEC DAT file is supposed to point to the data files which are used for a given run of PASSER However in the cas
404. will erase all nodes and directions from that point to the end of the list PREPASSR B 93 Reference GOTO GOTO GOTO lt Destination gt Defaults next Menus Groups CONTROL The purpose of this command is to divert the input stream within a file by providing the next location to be LOADed from that file lt Destination gt is a number which defines the next line number which will be LOADed from the current file or a variable name associated with a REPEAT loop and can be any valid line number of the current file less than or equal to 32767 positive negative or zero or any REPEAT loop variable name that is currently in use Its default value is the line number which follows the line which contains the GOTO command Notes e A REPEAT loop variable name can be used with GOTO if the same variable name is in active use by a REPEAT command In addition the GOTO command can only be encountered when its associated REPEAT command is the most active REPEAT command This means that REPEAT loops must not partially overlap one another i e one must be entirely contained within the other or they must be completely separate from each other A negative line number of n will divert input to a point in the current file n lines before the line which follows the GOTO command i e GOTO 5 sets up a loop which will continue to LOAD the four lines prior to the GOTO PREPASSR B 94 Reference GRADES GRADES GRADES 4 lt Grade of Approac
405. work coordinate system for any given data file has been added to all programs that use the Visual TEAPAC drag and drop network editing and display all TEAPAC programs except NOSTOP TED and TUTOR The options appear in a new dialog which is displayed when the Coord Sys button is pressed in the network Setup dialog The Coordinate System Management dialog offers three main function 1 to Analyze the current network for possible coding errors such as improperly connected nodes and scaling issues 2 to create a New Coordinate System by shifting and or scaling the current coordinate system and 3 to compute New Link Distances based on the current coordinate system For the Analyze function a percentage error can be input to define the threshold which identifies potential scaling problems between the coordinate system scale and each link s entered distance and an option can be selected to check the approach angle of each intersection leg One of the motivations for this new option is to be able to identify and adjust network coordinate systems from older TEAPAC programs which exercised the option to specify the units of the coordinate system in something other than feet Although this is still possible it can be problematic with the new drag and drop Visual TEAPAC interface and is not recommended In combination with the new Manual Distance option described below and the functions of this new dialog old coordinate systems can be easily converted for
406. xxxx in file x ESCape to abort continued attempts This error indicates that the lt Record Number gt in the file currently being accessed is not readable This typically occurs when the record of the file has never been defined by a SAVE command or other file creation techniques It will also occur if an attempt is made to access data past the physical end of the file especially if the file does not have an end of file terminator Action Re specify the location within the file to be accessed or first create information in that part of the file before trying to use it In the case where repeated TPC17 errors occur through an attempt to LOAD non existent information from a file normally past the end of the defined file s contents the ESCape key will abort the LOAD process and return to enter another command Frequently this error can be avoided by adding an end of file terminator to the end of the file TEAPAC F 213 Reference TPC18 WARNING This file name already exists Use it anyway No Yes This error message occurs when the requested lt File Name gt on the FILES command already exists but the File Switch for a new file was used see Appendix G File Specification For example if the N Switch is designated and the file currently exists then the warning message will be displayed to indicate that the file s contents if any will be overwritten if the file has been specified properly This condition normally occurs if the name

PREPASSR Tutorial/Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents